Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G Circuit Breakers
2.1 Introduction
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-2
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-2
Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-3
2.2 Series G®
Globally Accepted Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4
Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-6
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-9
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-14
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
2.3 Series C®
North American Standards and Special Application Breakers
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
2.4 Definite Purpose
Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications.
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-329
2.5 Metering and Communications
Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-336
2.6 Specialty
Specialty Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard™ Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-410
2.7 Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-425
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
V4-T2-2 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Series G E-Frame and Series C F-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Introduction
Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-4
Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Definite Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-329
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . V4-T2-336
Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
Product Overview
Series G vs. Series C
Eaton’s Electrical Sector,
under the Eaton brand, offers
the widest variety of molded
case circuit breakers available
today. Designed for electrical
and machinery OEMs serving
a range of industries and
applications, these proven
designs incorporate the latest
in innovation with the high
reliability that has been our
hallmark since the advent of
the circuit breaker in the
1920s.
The Series C family ranges
from 15–2500 amperes, and
includes thermal-magnetic
breakers, electronic trip
breakers, molded case
switches, motor circuit
protectors, and specially
designed breakers for engine
generator, DC and mining
applications.
The new Series G line
features an average 35%
size reduction, common
field-installable internal
accessories, and advanced
trip unit functionality that
eliminates the need for rating
plugs. These breakers meet
the requirements of UL®,
CSA®, IEC, CCC and CE,
allowing the OEM to
standardize on a design that
meets the needs of their
global customer base.
Application Description
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers cover the widest
range of applications in the
industry:
●Electrical OEMs
●Machinery OEMs
●Navy breakers:
●UL 489 Supplement SB
●MIL-C-17588
●MIL-C-17361
●ABS/NVR
●Mining breakers up to 1100
Vac
●Earth leakage
●DC breakers 125–750 Vdc
●Engine generator breakers
15–1200 amperes
●Current limiting breakers
Typical Applications
Machine Tool Control Panels
and Motor Control Centers
Designed for these
equipment requirements,
including new world-class
accessories.
Panelboards
As both main and branch
circuit protection devices.
Feeder Pillars
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
circuit protection.
Switchgear
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
circuit protection up to 2500
amperes (RG-Frame).
Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs
In busbar trunking tap-offs to
provide circuit protection.
Individual Enclosures
Completely assembled in
enclosures to meet specific
customer requirements.
Additional Applications
Special versions of each Eaton
frame are available to provide
safe equipment control and
protection in mining and other
applications. Contact your
Eaton agent or distributor for
additional information.
Typical Eaton Applications
Switchboard
Busbar Trunking
Tap-Off
Individual Circuit
Breaker Enclosure
Panelboard
Machine Tool
Control Panel
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies
Applications
Notes
1125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG.
2600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG.
31200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
Panelboards Switchboards Motor Control Centers
Frame
Ampere
Range 1A 2A 1A-LX 2A-LX 3A 3E 4 4B 4D 5P PRL-C PRL-i PRL-C/i Freedom IT.
Enclosed
Control
Bus
Plugs
Enclosed
Breaker
Series G
EG 15–160 1—————
■ ————— — — ■ ■ ■ ——
JG 20–250 — — — — — — — — ■ —— — — — — — — —
LG 100–630 2■ ■ ——■ ■ ■ ■ ■ —
■ —
■ ——— —
■
NG 400–1600 — — — — — — — ■ ■ —
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ——
■
RG 800–2500 3— — — — ——————■ —
■ ■ ■ ———
Series C
FD/ED 15–225 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
JD 70–250 ■ ■ ——■ —
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
KD 70–400 ■ ■ ——■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
LD 400–600 — — — — ■ —
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
MDL 300–800 — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
ND 400–1200 — — — — — — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
RD 800–2500 — — — — — — — — — ■ ■ - ■ ■ ■ ———
V4-T2-4 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications
Contents
Description Page
Series G
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-5
Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-6
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-9
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-14
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4 -T 2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
Product Overview
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for
UL, CSA and IEC Applications
Eaton Series G molded case
circuit breakers provide
increased performance in
considerably less space than
standard circuit breakers or
comparable fusible devices.
The “G” signifies global
applications: Series G circuit
breakers are marked with UL,
CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA
KEUR listings. Other
advantages include:
●Field-fit accessories
●Common accessories
through 630 amperes
●Electronic trip units from
20 to 2500 amperes
●UL-listed and IEC-rated,
30 mA ground fault/earth
leakage modules
●Built-in ground fault
protection down to
20 amperes
The EG, JG and LG frames are
designed around space-saving
footprints. The NG and RG
use the proven Eaton Series C
ND and RD designs.
The Series G family includes
five frame sizes in ratings
from 15 to 2500 amperes.
Series G offers a choice of
several interrupting capacities
up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC
(200 kA at 240 volts AC).
Series G molded case circuit
breakers are also available in
direct current options. Please
see Specialty Breakers
Section 2.6 for more details.
Standard calibration is 40 °C.
For applications in high
ambient temperature
conditions, 50 °C factory
calibration is available on
thermal-magnetic breakers
(not UL).
The Most Logically Designed
Contact Assembly
The flexibility and outstanding
performance characteristics
of Eaton circuit breakers are
made possible by the best
contact designs in circuit
breaker history. Our
technology creates a high-
speed “blow-open” action
using the electromechanical
forces produced by high-level
fault currents.
Eaton circuit breakers are
operated by a toggle-type
mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free from
the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held
closed against short circuit
currents. Tripping due to
overload or short circuits is
clearly indicated by the
position on the handle. This
remarkably fast and
dependable contact action is
designed to enhance safety.
Thorough In-Plant Testing
The quality, dependability and
reliability of every Eaton
Circuit Breaker is ensured by
a thorough program of in-
plant testing. Two calibration
tests are conducted on every
pole of every circuit breaker
to verify the trip mechanism,
operating mechanism,
continuity and accuracy.
Current Limiting
Characteristics
Circuit breakers are current
limiting because of their
high repulsion contact
arrangement and use of
state-of-the-art arc
extinguishing technology.
Eaton offers one of the most
complete lines of current
limiting breakers in the
industry. The industrial
breakers are available in
current limiting versions with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 480 V without
fuses in the same physical
size as standard and high
interrupting capacity
breakers.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Operating Mechanisms
Eaton circuit breakers have
a toggle handle operating
mechanism, which also
serves as a switching position
indicator. The indicator shows
the positions of: ON, OFF and
TRIPPED.
The toggle handle snaps into
the TRIPPED position if the
breaker is tripped by one of
its overcurrent, short circuit,
shunt or undervoltage
releases. Before the circuit
breaker can be reclosed
following a trip-out, the toggle
handle must be brought
beyond the OFF position
(RESET). The circuit breaker
can then be reclosed.
As an additional switching
position indicator for EG- to
RG-Frame circuit breakers,
there are two windows on
the right and on the left of the
toggle handle, in which the
switching state is indicated
by means of the colors
red, green and white
corresponding to the ON,
OFF and TRIPPED positions
respectively.
Positions of the Toggle
Handle Drive
Standards and Certifications
Eaton Series G circuit
breakers meet applicable UL
489 and IEC 60947-2
standards.
Molded case circuit breakers
from Eaton are designed to
conform with the following
international standards:
●Australian Standard AS
2184 and AS 3947-2
molded case circuit
breakers
●British Standards
Institution Standard
EN60947.2
●International
Electromechanical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947.2 circuit breakers
●Japanese T-Mark standard
molded case circuit
breakers
●National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
Standards Publication No.
AB1-1993 molded case
circuit breakers
●South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SANS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
●Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
947.2, Safety Regulations
for circuit breakers
●Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control
gear circuit breaker
requirements
●Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechnike
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Global Third-Party
Certification
Certification marks ensure
product compliance with the
total standard via the third
party witnessing of tests
by globally recognized
independent certification
organizations.
KEMA is a highly recognized,
independent international
organization that offers
certification and inspection
facilities for equipment in
many industries. The KEMA-
KEUR mark is the highest
certification an electrical
product can receive from
KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2
molded case circuit breakers
are KEMA tested and
certified. These breakers are
also listed in accordance with
UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2
No. 5-02.
KEMA, UL and CSA provide
ongoing follow-up testing and
inspections to ensure that
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers continue to meet
their exacting standards.
ISO Certification
Eaton circuit breakers are
manufactured in ISO®
certified facilities.
OFF
Reset
ON Tripped
V4-T2-6 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Overview
Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications
True rms Sensing
Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing,
permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to
nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present.
Digitrip RMS 310+
Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic
trip units are available with
Eaton Series G circuit
breakers JG, LG, NG and RG,
as well as Series C FD, KD,
LD and MDL circuit breakers.
Digitrip 310+ trip units are
equipped with an integrated Ir
switch that allows users to
modify the continuous
current rating of the breaker
without having to replace a
rating plug. This provides
further flexibility for
coordination in systems.
The trip units may be used
in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications.
The Digitrip 310+ offers true
rms sensing, is front
adjustable and has an optional
local display of current and
cause of trip.
Curve Shaping
When selectively coordinated
systems are called for,
Digitrip RMS 310+ will
provide a cost-effective
solution for a variety of
applications.
The standard Digitrip RMS
310+ includes an adjustable
short time pickup setting
encompassing an I2t ramp
function that provides the
basic LS curve shaping
function.
Digitrip 310+ trip units also
include selectable long time
delay (tLD) and pickup
settings (Ir). A rating plug is
not required.
The optional Digitrip RMS
310+ LSI and LSIG provide
additional flat response short
time delay adjustments and
an instantaneous setting to
provide LSI curve shaping
capability.
Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and
LSIG units are available with
ground fault pickup and flat
response ground fault delay.
Ground fault alarm options
are available with trip and no
trip functionality as a means
to notify users of a ground
fault condition with the option
to maintain the breaker
online.
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
can effectively coordinate
with both sophisticated
upstream power breakers as
well as downstream thermal-
magnetic breakers, making
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
the cost-effective reliable
choice for selectively
coordinated systems.
Thermal Memory
All Digitrip RMS trip units
incorporate a long delay.
Thermal memory prevents the
system from cumulative
overheating due to repeated
overcurrent events that may
occur in quick succession.
Field Testing
A field test kit is available for
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units.
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance Mode (ARMS)
ARMS is an available feature
on KD, LG, LD, MDL, NG and
RG frames with 310+
electronic trip units. This
feature increases worker
safety by providing an
accelerated instantaneous trip
unit to reduce arc flash.
Additionally, LG, NG and RG
frames with the ARMS feature
include a fully adjustable
instantaneous setting.
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
units are available with Eaton
R-Frame circuit breakers 800
through 2500 amperes.
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
provide unparalleled system
protection with the added
convenience of a local
display.
Curve Shaping
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
units are available with up to
nine curve shaping choices
achieved by adjusting up to
seven switches on the front
of the unit for optimum
system coordination.
Maximum curve shaping
flexibility is provided by
dependent long and short
delay adjustments that are
long delay pickup (Ir) based,
depicted on the front of the
unit by the blue portion of the
time-current curve.
Additional coordination
capability can be provided by
utilizing the short delay and
ground fault zone selective
interlocking features available
on these trip units.
System Diagnostics
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
models of trip units provide
long delay, short delay,
instantaneous, and ground
fault cause of trip LEDs on
the front of the unit. Their
display shows a magnitude of
trip information, as well as
remote signal contacts, for
improved system alarming.
System Monitoring
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
have the capability to monitor
phase currents, as well as
neutral or ground currents.
This information is displayed
on a large digital display
mounted on the unit.
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
can also provide the user with
power and energy monitoring
capability. Peak power
demand, present power
demand, and total energy, as
well as forward and reverse
energy can be monitored with
this unit.
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line
voltage, as well as system
power factor. Both
parameters are displayed in
the digital display window
and are supported by LEDs to
indicate which parameter is
being displayed.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
are capable of displaying
values of current harmonics
in the digital display window.
Percentage of harmonic
content can be monitored for
each phase, up to the 27th
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion value can
be calculated and displayed.
Communications
Digitrip RMS 910 units have
built-in communications
options to allow all protection,
monitoring, and control
information to be transmitted
back to a central location via
the Eaton PowerNet™
system.
Field Testing
Integral field testing capability
is provided on all 610 and 910
trip units. No additional test
set is needed to perform both
trip and no trip field testing.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Guide
Electronic Trip Units
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910
Notes
In = Rating plug rating.
Ir = Long delay setting.
1310+ trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug.
2310+ trip units have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 2–14 seconds.
3310+ details are included by frame in Pages V4-T2-44 (JG), V4-T2-62 (LG), V4-T2-72 (NG), and V4-T2-83 (RG).
4JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–9X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 2X–6X% x (In).
5LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting.
6LS, LSG only.
7Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910
Breaker Type
Series G frame(s) JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames RG-Frame RG-Frame
Ampere rating 20–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
Interrupting rating at 415 V 35, 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA 70, 100 kA
Trip Unit Sensing
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes
Protection and Coordination
Protection Ordering options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG
Fixed rating plug (In) 1Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long delay Adjustable lr switch Yes Yes No No
Long delay setting VAR/frame VAR/frame 0.5–1.0 x (ln) 0.5–1.0 x (ln)
Long delay time I2t at 6x 10 seconds 210 seconds 22–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
High load alarm 1.05 lr1.05 lr0.85 x Ir0.85 x Ir
Short delay Short delay setting VAR/frame 4VAR/frame 4200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir) 200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100 ms No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms
Short delay time flat No I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time ZSI No Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Independent adjustable Inst. setting No Yes 5Yes Yes
Instantaneous setting No VAR/frame 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln) 200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)
Discriminator No No Yes 6Yes 6
Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault Ground fault setting VAR/Frame 7VAR/Frame 725–100% x (ln) 725–100% x (ln) 7
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x No No 100, 300, 500 ms 100, 300, 500 ms
Ground fault delay flat I–300 ms I–300 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault ZSI No Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault thermal memory No No Yes Yes
JG
LG/NG
RG
V4-T2-8 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued
Notes
1Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED).
2RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs.
3Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06).
4Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST230V).
RMS 310+ RMS 610 RMS 910
LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A) LSI (A), LSIG
System Diagnostics
Cause of trip LEDs Yes 1 2 Yes 1 2 Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information No No Yes Yes
Remote signal contacts No No Yes Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 3Yes 3Yes Yes
Current Yes 3Yes 3Yes Yes
Voltage NoNoNoYes
Power and energy No No No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes
Power factor No No No Yes
System Communications
PowerNet No No No Yes
Field Testing
Testing method Test set 4Test set 4Integral Integral
JG
LG/NG
RG
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
Ratings
Frames EG, JG and LG
Notes
1125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489.
4EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac.
5Two poles in series.
6125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers.
7Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
EG JG LG
Maximum rated current (amperes) 125, 160 1250 400, 630 2
Breaker type 3BBE SSHHC E SHC UX ESHCUX
Number of poles 1 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 1 2, 3, 4 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz
NEMA®,
UL, CSA
240 Vac 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
480 Vac — 18 25 — 35 — 65 100 25 35 65 100 150 200 35 50 65 100 150 200
600 Vac 4——18—22—2535 181825355050 182535506565
125/250 Vdc 510 610 10 35 635 42 642 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 25 25 35 85 85 100 100 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
Ics 25 25 35 43 43 50 50 200 65 85 100 200 200 200 65 85 100 200 200 200
380–415 Vac Icu — 18 25 — 40 — 70 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 70 100 150 200
Ics — 18 25 — 30 — 35 100 25 40 70 100 150 200 35 50 53 100 150 200
660–690 Vac Icu ———————— 1212 1416 1818 1220 2530 3535
Ics ———————— 66712141461013151818
125/250 Vdc 5Icu 10 610 10 35 635 42 642 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
Ics 10 610 10 35 635 42 642 42 10 22 22 42 50 50 22 22 42 42 50 50
Ampere range 15–160 A 120–250 A 100–630 A 2
Trip Units
F = Fixed
A = Adjustable
T = Thermal
M = Magnetic
FT-FM
AT-FM
FT-AM
AT-AM
Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
FT-AM
AT-AM
Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
Interchangeable ———————— ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
Built-in ■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
Thermal
magnetic
Fixed thermal ■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
Adjustable
thermal
■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
Magnetic Fixed Adjustable Adjustable
Electronic
RMS 7
LS ———————— ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
LSI ———————— ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
LSG ———————— ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
LSIG ———————— ■■■■■■ ■■■■■■
ALSI ———————— —————— ■■■■■■
ALSIG ———————— —————— ■■■■■■
Utilization category AAAAAAAA AAAAAA AAAAAA
V4-T2-10 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Frames NG and RG
Notes
1NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed.
2Not KEMA-KEUR listed.
3IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested.
4Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
5RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped
6Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units.
NG RG
Maximum rated current (amperes) 800, 1200 800, 1200 800, 1200 1600 1800 1600, 2000, 2500 1600, 2000, 2500
Breaker type S H C 2SU H C
2
Number of poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 3 3, 4 3, 4
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
NEMA,
UL, CSA
240 Vac 85 100 200 — 200 125 200
480 Vac 50 65 100 — 150 65 100
600 Vac 25 35 65 — 65 50 65
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac Icu 85 100 200 85 — 135 200
Ics 85 100 100 85 — 100 100
380–415 Vac Icu 50 70 100 50 — 70 100
Ics 50 50 50 50 — 50 50
660–690 Vac Icu 20 325 335 20 3—25
335 3
Ics 10 13 18 10 — 13 18
250 Vdc Icu ————— — —
Ics ————— — —
Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 400–1200 A 1600 A 800 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
Trip units Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+)
Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910)
Interchangeable — — — — — ■ 5■ 5
Built-in ■■■■■ ■ ■
Electronic 4LI ————— ■ 6■ 6
LS ■■■■■ ■ ■
LSI ■■■■■ ■ ■
LIG ————— ■ 6■ 6
LSG ■■■■■ ■ ■
LSIG ■■■■■ ■ ■
ALSI ■■■■—■■
ALSIG ■■■■—■■
Utilization category A A A A A A A
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-11
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
General Specifications
All Series G Frames
Notes
1125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
31200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG.
4Thermal overload release set to the lower value.
5Thermal overload release set to the upper value.
6Not suitable for DC switching.
EG JG LG NG RG
Maximum rated current In depending on the version 160 A 1250 A 400, 630 A 2800, 1200, 1600 A 31600, 2000, 2500 A
Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2
Main conducting paths 500 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac 750 Vac
Auxiliary circuits 500 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Main conducting paths 6 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
Auxiliary circuits 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Rated operational voltage Ue
IEC 415 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac 690 Vac
NEMA 600Y/347 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac
UL and CSA listed Yes 1Yes Yes
2Yes 3Yes
Permissible ambient temperature –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C –20 ° to 70 °C
Permissible load for various ambient temperatures
close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current
of the circuit breaker
454545——
Circuit breakers for plant protection
At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
At 50 °C 96% 92% 96% 94% 96% 91% 91% 91%
At 55 °C 93% 87% 94% 90% 93% 86% 85% 85%
At 60 °C 91% 83% 92% 87% 90% 82% 81% 81%
At 70 °C 86% 73% 88% 80% 84% 70% 70% 70%
Circuit breakers for motor protection
At 40 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 50 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 55 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 60 °C — 100% 100% — —
At 70 °C — 90% 90% — —
Circuit breakers for starter combinations and
isolating circuit breakers
At 40 °C 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
At 50 °C 100% 100% 100% 91% 91%
At 55 °C 96% 96% 95% 85% 85%
At 60 °C 91% 82% 90% 81% 81%
At 70 °C 86% 88% 84% — —
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit
breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms)
Two conducting paths in series
For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc
42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 66
NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms)
Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc
42 kA max. 42 kA max. 42 kA max. 66
V4-T2-12 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
All Series G Frames, continued
EG JG LG NG RG
Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2
in combination with lockable rotary drives
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to
IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz)
For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-9.
Endurance (operating cycles) 10,000 10,000 8,000 3,000 3,000
Maximum switching frequency 300 1/h 240 1/h 240 1/h 60 1/h 60 1/h
Conductor cross sections and terminal types for
main conductors
Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals
Solid or stranded 2.5 to 95 mm250 to 150 mm295 to 240 mm2—— —
Finely stranded with end sleeve 2.5 to 50/70 mm235 to 120 mm270 to 150 mm2—— —
Busbar — — — 600 A Optional Optional
Tightening torque for box terminals 5.6 Nm 20 Nm 42 Nm 31 Nm 31 Nm —
Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces 5.6 Nm 15 Nm 30 Nm 6 Nm 50 Nm 20 Nm
Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with
terminal connection or terminal strip
Solid 0.75 to 2.5 mm20.75 to 2.5 mm20.75 to 2.5 mm2Up to 2x4 mm2Up to 2x4 mm2
Finely stranded with end sleeve 0.75 to 2.5 mm20.75 to 2.5 mm20.75 to 2.5 mm2Up to 2x2.5 mm2Up to 2x2.5 mm2
With brought-out cable ends — 0.82 (AWG 18) mm20.82 (AWG 18) mm20.82 (AWG 18) mm20.82 (AWG 18) mm2
Tightening torque for fitting screws — 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm 0.8 to 1.4 Nm
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated
current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage
releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary)
at three-phase symmetrical load) 400 A: 600 A:
For plant protection 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
As isolating circuit breaker 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W 87/210 W 220/270/400 W
For starter combinations 40 W 45 W 65 W 120 W — —
For motor protection — 45 W 65 W 120 W — —
Permissible mounting position
Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes (except HMCPE) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Auxiliary Switches
Rated thermal current lth 6A 6A 6A 6A 6A
Rated making capacity 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A
AC-14 AC-14 AC-14 AC-15 AC-15
Rated operational voltage 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 230/400/600 V 600 V 600 V
Rated operational current 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6/3/0.25 A 6A 6A
DC-13 DC-13
Rated operational voltage 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V 125/250V
Rated operational current 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.15 A 0.5/0.25 A 0.5/0.25 A
Backup fuse 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A (4) 6/4/4 A
Miniature circuit breaker 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A 6/4 A
90
90
90
90
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-13
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
All Series G Frames, continued
EG JG LG NG RG
Releases
Undervoltage releases (“r” releases)
Response voltage:
Drop (breaker tripped) Us 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70% 35–70%
Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110% 85–110%
Power consumption in continuous operation at:
50/60 Hz 12 Vac ———1.9 VA2.9 VA
50/60 Hz 24 Vac 0.72 VA 3.9 VA 3.9 VA 2.4 VA 3.1 VA
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 1.15–1.78 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.5–3.8 VA 2.3–4.1 VA 3.4–6.0 VA
50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac 0.96–1.25 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 1.8–2.4 VA 3.4–4.2 VA 3.3–3.8 VA
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac 1.28–1.68 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 2.7–3.8 VA 4.8–6.5 VA 4.2–7.2 VA
50/60 Hz 380–500 Vac 2.2–3.9 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 3.4–5.8 VA 6.8–12.0 VA 3.8–10.0 VA
50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA 3.4–4.3 VA — —
12 Vdc ———2.6W3.4W
24 Vdc 0.70 W 3.1W 3.1W 3.6W 4.3W
48–60 Vdc 1.12–1.76W 2.0–3.1W 2.0–3.1W 3.5–5.5W 4.8–7.2W
110–125 Vdc 0.94–1.21W 1.6–2.2W 1.6–2.2W 2.9–3.6W 3.3–3.8W
220–250 Vdc 1.45–1.86W 3.1–4W 3.1–4W 4.8–6.3W 6.6–7.5W
Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips (“f” releases)
Response voltage:
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110% 70–110%
Power consumption in (short time) at:
50/60 Hz 24 Vac 10–41 VA 87–405 VA 87–405 VA 98–475 VA 612 VA
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac 139–210 VA 710–1105 VA 710–1105 VA 24–50 VA 403–666 VA
50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac — ————
50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac 83–360 VA 66–432 VA 66–432 VA 67–432 VA 396–1896 VA
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac — 127–188 VA 127–188 VA 76–110 VA 1596–2156 VA
50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac 418–1080 VA————
50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac — 34–60 VA 34–60 VA 19–42 VA 230–384 VA
12–24 Vdc 29–120 W 164–631 W 164–631 W 145–610 W 396 W
48–60 Vdc 475–720 W 830–1580 W 830–1580 W 67–102 W 341–528 W
110–125 Vdc 99–121 W 112–150 W 112–150 W 121–150 W 264–350 W
220–250 Vdc — 40–58W 40–58 W 46–55 W 374–475 W
Maximum load duration Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically Interrupts automatically
Maximum opening time 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms 62 ms 62 ms
Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip)
Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70) 65 (70)
Self-protected, will trip above 1250 for EG125;
1600 for EG160
2500 4000/6300 12,500 20,000
V4-T2-14 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
Series G—Frame NG and RG
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
EG JG LG
HWD HWD HWD
Single-pole 5.50 (139.7) 1.00 (25.4) 2.99 (76.0) — — — — — —
Two-pole 5.50 (139.7) 2.00 (50.8) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) — — —
Three-pole 5.50 (139.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 4.13 (105.0) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 5.48 (140.0) 4.09 (104.0)
Four-pole 5.50 (139.7) 4.00 (101.6) 2.99 (76.0) 7.00 (177.8) 5.34 (135.6) 3.57 (87.4) 10.13 (258.0) 7.22 (183.0) 4.09 (104.0)
NG RG
HWD HWD
Single-pole ——— ———
Two-pole ——— ———
Three-pole 16.00 (406.0) 8.25 (210.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 15.50 (394.0) 9.75 (229.0)
Four-pole 16.00 (406.0) 11.13 (280.0) 5.50 (140.0) 16.00 (406.0) 20.00 (508.0) 9.75 (229.0)
EG JG LG NG RG
Single-pole 0.85 (0.39) — — — —
Two-pole 1.57 (0.71) 11.3 (5.13) — — —
Three-pole 2.28 (1.04) 5.06 (2.30) T/M
5.31 (2.41) ETU
12.36 (5.61) T/M
13.04 (5.92) ETU
46.8 (21.3) 103.0 (47.0)
Four-pole 2.85 (1.29) 6.76 (3.07) T/M
7.12 (3.23) ETU
16.27 (7.39) T/M
16.92 (7.68) ETU
62.0 (28.3) 118.4 (54.0)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-16
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-17
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-26
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-27
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-27
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Product Description
EG breaker is HACR rated.
V4-T2-16 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Notes
1Cannot be UL rated.
2Available only as 125 and 160 A sizes.
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
E = Imperial end caps
G = Line/load standard
B = Bolt-on
Metric
Imperial
Metric
—
Frame
E
Performance
600Y/347 480 415 240
B— 181825
E18 25 25 35
S22 35 40 85
H25 65 70 100
C35 100 100 200
KMolded case switch 2
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
016 1
015
020
025
030
032 1
035
040
045
050
060
063 1
070
080
090
100
110
125
160 1
Number of Poles
1 = One
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
7 = Four—neutral 100% protected Trip Unit
FF = Fixed fixed
AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
E G H 3 015 FF G
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-17
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
EG-Frame—18/18
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 EGB1015FFG EGB2015FFG EGB3015FFG — EGB4015FFG —
16 EGB1016FFG EGB2016FFG EGB3016FFG — EGB4016FFG —
20 EGB1020FFG EGB2020FFG EGB3020FFG — EGB4020FFG EGB4020AFG
25 EGB1025FFG EGB2025FFG EGB3025FFG EGB3025AFG EGB4025FFG EGB4025AFG
30 EGB1030FFG EGB2030FFG EGB3030FFG — EGB4030FFG —
32 EGB1032FFG EGB2032FFG EGB3032FFG EGB3032AFG EGB4032FFG EGB4032AFG
35 EGB1035FFG EGB2035FFG EGB3035FFG — EGB4035FFG —
40 EGB1040FFG EGB2040FFG EGB3040FFG EGB3040AFG EGB4040FFG EGB4040AFG
45 EGB1045FFG EGB2045FFG EGB3045FFG — EGB4045FFG —
50 EGB1050FFG EGB2050FFG EGB3050FFG EGB3050AFG EGB4050FFG EGB4050AFG
60 EGB1060FFG EGB2060FFG EGB3060FFG — EGB4060FFG —
63 EGB1063FFG EGB2063FFG EGB3063FFG EGB3063AFG EGB4063FFG EGB4063AFG
70 EGB1070FFG EGB2070FFG EGB3070FFG — EGB4070FFG —
80 EGB1080FFG EGB2080FFG EGB3080FFG EGB3080AFG EGB4080FFG EGB4080AFG
90 EGB1090FFG EGB2090FFG EGB3090FFG — EGB4090FFG —
100 EGB1100FFG EGB2100FFG EGB3100FFG EGB3100AFG EGB4100FFG EGB4100AFG
110 EGB1110FFG EGB2110FFG EGB3110FFG — EGB4110FFG —
125 EGB1125FFG EGB2125FFG EGB3125FFG EGB3125AFG EGB4125FFG EGB4125AFG
160 — — EGB3160FFG EGB3160AFG EGB4160FFG EGB4160AFG
EG-Frame
V4-T2-18 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable
EG-Frame—25/25
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 EGE2015FFG EGE3015FFG — EGE4015FFG —
16 EGE2016FFG EGE3016FFG — EGE4016FFG —
20 EGE2020FFG EGE3020FFG — EGE4020FFG EGE4020AFG
25 EGE2025FFG EGE3025FFG EGE3025AFG EGE4025FFG EGE4025AFG
30 EGE2030FFG EGE3030FFG — EGE4030FFG —
32 EGE2032FFG EGE3032FFG EGE3032AFG EGE4032FFG EGE4032AFG
35 EGE2035FFG EGE3035FFG — EGE4035FFG —
40 EGE2040FFG EGE3040FFG EGE3040AFG EGE4040FFG EGE4040AFG
45 EGE2045FFG EGE3045FFG EGE3050AFG EGE4045FFG —
50 EGE2050FFG EGE3050FFG — EGE4050FFG EGE4050AFG
60 EGE2060FFG EGE3060FFG — EGE4060FFG —
63 EGE2063FFG EGE3063FFG EGE3063AFG EGE4063FFG EGE4063AFG
70 EGE2070FFG EGE3070FFG — EGE4070FFG —
80 EGE2080FFG EGE3080FFG EGE3080AFG EGE4080FFG EGE4080AFG
90 EGE2090FFG EGE3090FFG — EGE4090FFG —
100 EGE2100FFG EGE3100FFG EGE3100AFG EGE4100FFG EGE4100AFG
125 EGE2125FFG EGE3125FFG EGE3125AFG EGE4125FFG EGE4125AFG
160 — EGE3160FFG EGE3160AFG EGE4160FFG EGE4160AFG
EG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—40/35
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 EGS1015FFG EGS2015FFG EGS3015FFG — EGS4015FFG —
16 EGS1016FFG EGS2016FFG EGS3016FFG — EGS4016FFG —
20 EGS1020FFG EGS2020FFG EGS3020FFG — EGS4020FFG EGS4020AFG
25 EGS1025FFG EGS2025FFG EGS3025FFG EGS3025AFG EGS4025FFG EGS4025AFG
30 EGS1030FFG EGS2030FFG EGS3030FFG — EGS4030FFG —
32 EGS1032FFG EGS2032FFG EGS3032FFG EGS3032AFG EGS4032FFG EGS4032AFG
35 EGS1035FFG EGS2035FFG EGS3035FFG — EGS4035FFG —
40 EGS1040FFG EGS2040FFG EGS3040FFG EGS3040AFG EGS4040FFG EGS4040AFG
45 EGS1045FFG EGS2045FFG EGS3045FFG — EGS4045FFG —
50 EGS1050FFG EGS2050FFG EGS3050FFG EGS3050AFG EGS4050FFG EGS4050AFG
60 EGS1060FFG EGS2060FFG EGS3060FFG — EGS4060FFG —
63 EGS1063FFG EGS2063FFG EGS3063FFG EGS3063AFG EGS4063FFG EGS4063AFG
70 EGS1070FFG EGS2070FFG EGS3070FFG — EGS4070FFG —
80 EGS1080FFG EGS2080FFG EGS3080FFG EGS3080AFG EGS4080FFG EGS4080AFG
90 EGS1090FFG EGS2090FFG EGS3090FFG — EGS4090FFG —
100 EGS1100FFG EGS2100FFG EGS3100FFG EGS3100AFG EGS4100FFG EGS4100AFG
125 EGS1125FFG EGS2125FFG EGS3125FFG EGS3125AFG EGS4125FFG EGS4125AFG
160 — — EGS3160FFG EGS3160AFG EGS4160FFG EGS4160AFG
EG-Frame
V4-T2-20 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—70/65
Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 EGH1015FFG EGH2015FFG EGH3015FFG — EGH4015FFG —
16 EGH1016FFG EGH2016FFG EGH3016FFG — EGH4016FFG —
20 EGH1020FFG EGH2020FFG EGH3020FFG EGH3020AFG EGH4020FFG EGH4020AFG
25 EGH1025FFG EGH2025FFG EGH3025FFG EGH3025AFG EGH4025FFG EGH4025AFG
30 EGH1030FFG EGH2030FFG EGH3030FFG — EGH4030FFG —
32 EGH1032FFG EGH2032FFG EGH3032FFG EGH3032AFG EGH4032FFG EGH4032AFG
35 EGH1035FFG EGH2035FFG EGH3035FFG — EGH4035FFG —
40 EGH1040FFG EGH2040FFG EGH3040FFG EGH3040AFG EGH4040FFG EGH4040AFG
45 EGH1045FFG EGH2045FFG EGH3045FFG — EGH4045FFG EGH4050AFG
50 EGH1050FFG EGH2050FFG EGH3050FFG EGH3050AFG EGH4050FFG —
60 EGH1060FFG EGH2060FFG EGH3060FFG — EGH4060FFG —
63 EGH1063FFG EGH2063FFG EGH3063FFG EGH3063AFG EGH4063FFG EGH4063AFG
70 EGH1070FFG EGH2070FFG EGH3070FFG — EGH4070FFG —
80 EGH1080FFG EGH2080FFG EGH3080FFG EGH3080AFG EGH4080FFG EGH4080AFG
90 EGH1090FFG EGH2090FFG EGH3090FFG — EGH4090FFG —
100 EGH1100FFG EGH2100FFG EGH3100FFG EGH3100AFG EGH4100FFG EGH4100AFG
125 EGH1125FFG EGH2125FFG EGH3125FFG EGH3125AFG EGH4125FFG EGH4125AFG
EG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-21
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable)
EG-Frame—100/100
Molded Case Switches 4
Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100%
neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
4 Molded case switches may open above 1250 A.
Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 EGC3015FFG — EGC7015FFG —
16 EGC3016FFG — EGC7016FFG —
20 EGC3020FFG EGC3020AFG EGC7020FFG EGC7020AFG
25 EGC3025FFG EGC3025AFG EGC7025FFG EGC7025AFG
30 EGC3030FFG — EGC7030FFG —
32 EGC3032FFG EGC3032AFG EGC7032FFG EGC7032AFG
35 EGC3035FFG — EGC7035FFG —
40 EGC3040FFG EGC3040AFG EGC7040FFG EGC7040AFG
45 EGC3045FFG — EGC7045FFG —
50 EGC3050FFG EGC3050AFG EGC7050FFG EGC7050AFG
60 EGC3060FFG — EGC7060FFG —
63 EGC3063FFG EGC3063AFG EGC7063FFG EGC7063AFG
70 EGC3070FFG — EGC7070FFG —
80 EGC3080FFG EGC3080AFG EGC7080FFG EGC7080AFG
90 EGC3090FFG — EGC7090FFG —
100 EGC3100FFG EGC3100AFG EGC7100FFG EGC7100AFG
125 EGC3125FFG EGC3125AFG EGC7125FFG EGC7125AFG
Catalog
Number
EGK3125KSG
EGK7125KSG
EGK3160KSG
EGK7160KSG
EG-Frame
V4-T2-22 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware)
EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac
EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15 EGB1015FFB EGB2015FFB EGB3015FFB
20 EGB1020FFB EGB2020FFB EGB3020FFB
25 EGB1025FFB EGB2025FFB EGB3025FFB
30 EGB1030FFB EGB2030FFB EGB3030FFB
35 EGB1035FFB EGB2035FFB EGB3035FFB
40 EGB1040FFB EGB2040FFB EGB3040FFB
45 EGB1045FFB EGB2045FFB EGB3045FFB
50 EGB1050FFB EGB2050FFB EGB3050FFB
60 EGB1060FFB EGB2060FFB EGB3060FFB
70 EGB1070FFB EGB2070FFB EGB3070FFB
80 EGB1080FFB EGB2080FFB EGB3080FFB
90 EGB1090FFB EGB2090FFB EGB3090FFB
100 EGB1100FFB EGB2100FFB EGB3100FFB
110 EGB1110FFB EGB2110FFB EGB3110FFB
125 EGB1125FFB EGB2125FFB EGB3125FFB
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15 EGS1015FFB EGS2015FFB EGS3015FFB
20 EGS1020FFB EGS2020FFB EGS3020FFB
25 EGS1025FFB EGS2025FFB EGS3025FFB
30 EGS1030FFB EGS2030FFB EGS3030FFB
35 EGS1035FFB EGS2035FFB EGS3035FFB
40 EGS1040FFB EGS2040FFB EGS3040FFB
45 EGS1045FFB EGS2045FFB EGS3045FFB
50 EGS1050FFB EGS2050FFB EGS3050FFB
60 EGS1060FFB EGS2060FFB EGS3060FFB
70 EGS1070FFB EGS2070FFB EGS3070FFB
80 EGS1080FFB EGS2080FFB EGS3080FFB
90 EGS1090FFB EGS2090FFB EGS3090FFB
100 EGS1100FFB EGS2100FFB EGS3100FFB
110 EGS1110FFB EGS2110FFB EGS3110FFB
125 EGS1125FFB EGS2125FFB EGS3125FFB
EG-Frame
EG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-23
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Load Terminals
Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15 EGH1015FFB EGH2015FFB EGH3015FFB
20 EGH1020FFB EGH2020FFB EGH3020FFB
25 EGH1025FFB EGH2025FFB EGH3025FFB
30 EGH1030FFB EGH2030FFB EGH3030FFB
35 EGH1035FFB EGH2035FFB EGH3035FFB
40 EGH1040FFB EGH2040FFB EGH3040FFB
45 EGH1045FFB EGH2045FFB EGH3045FFB
50 EGH1050FFB EGH2050FFB EGH3050FFB
60 EGH1060FFB EGH2060FFB EGH3060FFB
70 EGH1070FFB EGH2070FFB EGH3070FFB
80 EGH1080FFB EGH2080FFB EGH3080FFB
90 EGH1090FFB EGH2090FFB EGH3090FFB
100 EGH1100FFB EGH2100FFB EGH3100FFB
110 EGH1110FFB EGH2110FFB EGH3110FFB
125 EGH1125FFB EGH2125FFB EGH3125FFB
Maximum Breaker
Amps
Terminal,
Body
Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2AWG Wire Range
(Package of Three Terminals)
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
15–50 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14–1/0 3TA125EF
60–125 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6–3/0 3TA150EF
EG-Frame
V4-T2-24 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
EG-Frame
Line and Load Terminals
EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals
as standard equipment.
Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely
with screw and washer.
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer.
Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical
connections. Includes hardware.
Notes
1Standard line and load terminals.
2Four-pole kit with four terminals.
3T125EF 3TA125EF 3TA150EF 3TA160EFK EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric
EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric
EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric
EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial
EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial
EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial
Control Wire
Terminal Kit
GCWTK
Multiwire
Connectors
Maximum
Breaker
Amps
Terminal
Body
Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range
(Package of
Three Terminals)
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
125 Steel Al 4–6 #12-10 3T125EF 1
125 Steel Cu 2.5–95 #14-3/0 3T125EF 1
125 Aluminum Cu/Al 2.5–50 #14-1/0 3TA125EF
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 16–70 #6-3/0 3TA150EF
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 3TA160EFK
160 Aluminum Cu/Al 35–120 #3-250 4TA160EFK 2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-25
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Control Wire Terminal Kit
For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load
terminals only.
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation
between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering.
Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting
Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker
or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order S/N 8703C80G08.
Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog
number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Single-
pole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware
8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100.
Terminal Shields
The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in three-
and four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also
available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is
mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by
pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced
per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged
individually.
Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection
Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier)
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering.
Terminal End Covers
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit
breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate
distribution terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three
mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side
(OFF) end.
EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3) 1
Note
1For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.”
Catalog
Number
Control wire terminal kit 5652B38G01
Package of 12—priced individually
Catalog
Number
Interphase barriers EIPBK
Package of 12—priced individually
Catalog
Number
DIN rail adapter—single-pole EF1DIN
DIN rail adapter—two-pole EGDIN
DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole EF34DIN
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3EFTS3K
4EFTS4K
Conductor Opening Diameter
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
6.35 (0.25) EEC3K
10.41 (0.41) EEC4K
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
125 3 14–2 3TA125E3K
125 6 14–6 3TA125E6K
V4-T2-26 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
EG-Frame Accessories
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Reference
Page
Single-
Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-109 ——■——■——■—
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-109 ——■——■——■—
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-109 ——■——■——■—
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-109 ——■——■——■—
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-109 ——■——■——■—
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-109 ———■——■———
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-110 ———■——■———
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-25 —●●●●●●●●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-25 ●●●●●●●●●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-25 ●●●●●●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-25 ●●●●●●●●●●
Terminal shields V4-T2-25 ●●●●●●●●●●
Terminal end covers V4-T2-25 ———●●●————
Interphase barriers V4-T2-25 —●●●●●●●●●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-107 ■■——■——■——
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ■■——■——■——
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ——■❏—❏❏—❏—
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-107 ———●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-107 —●●●●●●●●●
Electrical operator V4-T2-107 ———●●●————
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-413 ———●●●————
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-105 ●●●●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement
SA and SB
—●●●●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-27
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
EG-Frame
EG-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
EG-Frame
Notes
1DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2IEC only.
3Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
4Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
5Current limiting per UL 489.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
120
220–240
277 347
380–415
480 600Y/ 347
690 2125 250 34
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGB1251 3525 2518 ————— — — 10 10 — —
2, 3, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10
EGE125 2, 3, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10
EGS1251 100854335 22———— — — 35 35 — —
2, 3, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35
EGH125 1 200 100 50 65 30 ———— — — 42 42 — —
2, 3, 4—10050——70356525 — — — — 42 42
EGC125 53, 4 — 200 200 — — 100 100 100 35 — — — — 42 42
EGB160 23, 4 — 25 25 — — 18 18 18 — — — — — 10 10
EGE160 23, 4 — 35 35 — — 25 25 25 18 — — — — 10 10
EGS160 23, 4 — 85 43 — — 40 30 35 22 — — — — 35 35
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
1 1.00 (25.4) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
2 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
4 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
1 2 3 4 Breaker Type
Number of Poles
34
EGB125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGB160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)
EGC125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGE160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)
EGE125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82) EGS160 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)
EGH125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)
EGS125 1.5 (0.68) 2.0 (0.91) 3.0 (1.36) 4.9 (1.82)
Front View Three-PoleFront Cover Cutout Side View
2.77
(70.4)
3.03
(77.0)
5.50
(139.7)
0.14 (3.6) R 1.85
(47.0)
1.30 Dia.
(33.0) 0.94 (23.9)
0.90
(22.9)
0.47 (11.9)
C
L
3.00
(76.2)
Handle
C
L
Breaker
V4-T2-28 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
3.17
(80.5)
3.01
(76.5)
2.75
(69.9)
0.09
(2.29)
10.26
(260.6) 4.75
(120.6) 0.55 (14.0)
3-Pole
2.98
(75.7)
3.98
(101.1)
2.00
(50.8)
1.49
(37.8)
1.0 0
(25.4)
1.0 0
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
8.59
(218.2)
4.78
(121.4) 0.70 (17.8)
0.78
(19.8)
0.50
(12.7)
1.50
(38.1)
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
3.20
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
2.75
(69.9)
0.09
(2.3)
0.78
(19.8)
0.41
(10.4)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-29
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-30
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-31
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-42
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-43
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-45
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Product Description
JG breaker is HACR rated.
V4-T2-30 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Trip Unit
Notes
1Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
Frame
J
Performance
600 480 415 240
E18 25 25 65
S18 35 40 85
H25 65 70 100
C35 100 100 200
U50 150 150 200
X50 200 200 200
KMolded case switch
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
050
070
080
090
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
NN = Frame only (250 A only; no trip unit)
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
E = Imperial end caps
G = Line/load standard
W = Without terminals
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC)
F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC)
Number of Poles
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% Protected
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected
J G S 3 250 FA G C
Trip
JT
Amperes
T/M ETU
080
090
100
110
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
050
100
160
250
Number of Poles
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60%% Protected
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
JT 4 100 FA B20
Features (ETU Only) 12
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-31
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGE2070FAG JGE3070FAG — JGE4070FAG —
90 450–900 JGE2090FAG JGE3090FAG — JGE4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGE2100FAG JGE3100FAG JGE3100AAG JGE4100FAG JGE4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGE2125FAG JGE3125FAG JGE3125AAG JGE4125FAG JGE4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGE2150FAG JGE3150FAG — JGE4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — — JGE3160AAG — JGE4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGE2175FAG JGE3175FAG — JGE4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGE2200FAG JGE3200FAG JGE3200AAG JGE4200FAG JGE4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGE2225FAG JGE3225FAG — JGE4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGE2250FAG JGE3250FAG JGE3250AAG JGE4250FAG JGE4250AAG
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGS2070FAG JGS3070FAG — JGS4070FAG —
90 450–900 JGS2090FAG JGS3090FAG — JGS4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGS2100FAG JGS3100FAG JGS3100AAG JGS4100FAG JGS4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGS2125FAG JGS3125FAG JGS3125AAG JGS4125FAG JGS4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGS2150FAG JGS3150FAG — JGS4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — — JGS3160AAG — JGS4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGS2175FAG JGS3175FAG — JGS4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGS2200FAG JGS3200FAG JGS3200AAG JGS4200FAG JGS4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGS2225FAG JGS3225FAG — JGS4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGS2250FAG JGS3250FAG JGS3250AAG JGS4250FAG JGS4250AAG
JG-Frame
JG-Frame
V4-T2-32 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGH2070FAG JGH3070FAG — JGH4070FAG —
90 450–900 JGH2090FAG JGH3090FAG — JGH4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGH2100FAG JGH3100FAG JGH3100AAG JGH4100FAG JGH4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGH2125FAG JGH3125FAG JGH3125AAG JGH4125FAG JGH4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGH2150FAG JGH3150FAG — JGH4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAG — JGH4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGH2175FAG JGH3175FAG — JGH4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGH2200FAG JGH3200FAG JGH3200AAG JGH4200FAG JGH4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGH2225FAG JGH3225FAG — JGH4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGH2250FAG JGH3250FAG JGH3250AAG JGH4250FAG JGH4250AAG
JG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-33
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable 0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGC3070FAG — JGC4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGC3080AAG — JGC4080AAG
90 450–900 JGC3090FAG — JGC4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGC3100FAG JGC3100AAG JGC4100FAG JGC4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGC3125FAG JGC3125AAG JGC4125FAG JGC4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGC3150FAG — JGC4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGC3160AAG — JGC4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGC3175FAG — JGC4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGC3200FAG JGC3200AAG JGC4200FAG JGC4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGC3225FAG — JGC4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGC3250FAG JGC3250AAG JGC4250FAG JGC4250AAG
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole Four-Pole 0% 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGU3070FAG — JGU4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGU3080AAG — JGU4080AAG
90 450–900 JGU3090FAG — JGU4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGU3100FAG JGU3100AAG JGU4100FAG JGU4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGU3125FAG JGU3125AAG JGU4125FAG JGU4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGU3150FAG — JGU4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGU3160AAG — JGU4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGU3175FAG — JGU4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGU3200FAG JGU3200AAG JGU4200FAG JGU4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGU3225FAG — JGU4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGU3250FAG JGU3250AAG JGU4250FAG JGU4250AAG
JG-Frame
JG-Frame
V4-T2-34 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting
Molded Case Switches 3
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is
0.8 and 1.0.
2 Change the fourth digit to 8 for adjustable
0–60% neutral protection, 9 for 0–100%
neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
3 Molded case switches will trip above
2500 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole Four-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGX3070FAG — JGX4070FAG —
80 400–800 — JGX3080AAG — JGX4080AAG
90 450–900 JGX3090FAG — JGX4090FAG —
100 500–1000 JGX3100FAG JGX3100AAG JGX4100FAG JGX4100AAG
125 625–1250 JGX3125FAG JGX3125AAG JGX4125FAG JGX4125AAG
150 750–1550 JGX3150FAG — JGX4150FAG —
160 800–1600 — JGX3160AAG — JGX4160AAG
175 875–1750 JGX3175FAG — JGX4175FAG —
200 1000–2000 JGX3200FAG JGX3200AAG JGX4200FAG JGX4200AAG
225 1125–2250 JGX3225FAG — JGX4225FAG —
250 1250–2500 JGX3250FAG JGX3250AAG JGX4250FAG JGX4250AAG
Catalog
Number
JGK3250KSG
JGK7250KSG
JG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-35
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Notes
1Standard line and load terminals.
2Components—100% rated frame.
3Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
Maximum
Amperes
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 0%
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25/25
250 JGE2250NN JGE3250NN JGE4250NN
40/35
250 JGS2250NN JGS3250NN JGS4250NN
70/65
250 JGH2250NN JGH3250NN JGH4250NN
100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 — JGC3250NN JGC4250NN
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 — JGU3250NN JGU4250NN
200/200 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 — JGX3250NN JGX4250NN
25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489 2
250 — JGE3250NNC —
40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489 2
250 — JGS3250NNC —
70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 2
250 — JGH3250NNC —
Ampere
Rating Range
Catalog
Number Range
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JT2070FA JT3070FA — — JT4070FA —
80 400–800 — JT3080FA JT3080AA 364–100 — JT4080AA 3
90 450–900 JT2090FA JT3090FA — —JT4090FA —
100 500–1000 JT2100FA JT3100FA JT3100AA 380–100 JT4100FA JT4100AA 3
125 625–1250 JT2125FA JT3125FA JT3125AA 3100–125 JT4125FA JT4125AA 3
150 750–1550 JT2150FA JT3150FA — —JT4150FA —
160 800–1600 ——JT3160AA
3128–160 — JT4160AA 3
175 875–1750 JT2175FA JT3175FA — —JT4175FA —
200 1000–2000 JT2200FA JT3200FA JT3200AA 3160–200 JT4200FA JT4200AA 3
225 1125–2250 JT2225FA JT3225FA — —JT4225FA —
250 1250–2500 JT2250FA JT3250FA JT3250AA 3200–250 JT4250FA JT4250AA 3
V4-T2-36 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Notes
1For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the
neutral is required.
2Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is
not adjustable.
3Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for LSG
and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JT305033 JT305032 JT305035 JT305036 JGFCT050
100 JT310033 JT310032 JT310035 JT310036 JGFCT100
160 JT316033 JT316032 JT316035 JT316036 JGFCT160
250 JT325033 JT325032 JT325035 JT325036 JGFCT250
Four-Pole 23
50 JT405033 JT405032 JT405035 JT405036 —
100 JT410033 JT410032 JT410035 JT410036 —
160 JT416033 JT416032 JT416035 JT416036 —
250 JT425033 JT425032 JT425035 JT425036 —
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (250 A) JGFCT250
External neutral sensor (160 A) JGFCT160
External neutral sensor (100 A) JGFCT100
External neutral sensor (80 A) JGFCT050
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-37
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
Notes
1Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGE305033G JGE305032G JGE305035G JGE305036G JGFCT050
100 JGE310033G JGE310032G JGE310035G JGE310036G JGFCT100
160 JGE316033G JGE316032G JGE316035G JGE316036G JGFCT160
250 JGE325033G JGE325032G JGE325035G JGE325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
50 JGE405033G JGE405032G JGE405035G JGE405036G —
100 JGE410033G JGE410032G JGE410035G JGE410036G —
160 JGE416033G JGE416032G JGE416035G JGE416036G —
250 JGE425033G JGE425032G JGE425035G JGE425036G —
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGS305033G JGS305032G JGS305035G JGS305036G JGFCT050
100 JGS310033G JGS310032G JGS310035G JGS310036G JGFCT100
160 JGS316033G JGS316032G JGS316035G JGS316036G JGFCT160
250 JGS325033G JGS325032G JGS325035G JGS325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 23
50 JGS405033G JGS405032G JGS405035G JGS405036G —
100 JGS410033G JGS410032G JGS410035G JGS410036G —
160 JGS416033G JGS416032G JGS416035G JGS416036G —
250 JGS425033G JGS425032G JGS425035G JGS425036G —
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGH305033G JGH305032G JGH305035G JGH305036G JGFCT050
100 JGH310033G JGH310032G JGH310035G JGH310036G JGFCT100
160 JGH316033G JGH316032G JGH316035G JGH316036G JGFCT160
250 JGH325033G JGH325032G JGH325035G JGH325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
50 JGH405033G JGH405032G JGH405035G JGH405036G —
100 JGH410033G JGH410032G JGH410035G JGH410036G —
160 JGH416033G JGH416032G JGH416035G JGH416036G —
250 JGH425033G JGH425032G JGH425035G JGH425036G —
V4-T2-38 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489
IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489
IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Notes
1Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGC305033G JGC305032G JGC305035G JGC305036G JGFCT050
100 JGC310033G JGC310032G JGC310035G JGC310036G JGFCT100
160 JGC316033G JGC316032G JGC316035G JGC316036G JGFCT160
250 JGC335033G JGC325032G JGC325035G JGC325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
50 JGC405033G JGC405032G JGC405035G JGC405036G —
100 JGC410033G JGC410032G JGC410035G JGC410036G —
160 JGC416033G JGC416032G JGC416035G JGC416036G —
250 JGC435033G JGC425032G JGC425035G JGC425036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGU305033G JGU305032G JGU305035G JGU305036G JGFCT050
100 JGU310033G JGU310032G JGU310035G JGU310036G JGFCT100
160 JGU316033G JGU316032G JGU316035G JGU316036G JGFCT160
250 JGU335033G JGU325032G JGU325035G JGU325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 23
50 JGU405033G JGU405032G JGU405035G JGU405036G —
100 JGU410033G JGU410032G JGU410035G JGU410036G —
160 JGU416033G JGU416032G JGU416035G JGU416036G —
250 JGU435033G JGU425032G JGU425035G JGU425036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
50 JGX305033G JGX305032G JGX305035G JGX305036G JGFCT050
100 JGX310033G JGX310032G JGX310035G JGX310036G JGFCT100
160 JGX316033G JGX316032G JGX316035G JGX316036G JGFCT160
250 JGX325033G JGX325032G JGX325035G JGX325036G JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
50 JGX405033G JGX405032G JGX405035G JGX405036G —
100 JGX410033G JGX410032G JGX410035G JGX410036G —
160 JGX416033G JGX416032G JGX416035G JGX416036G —
250 JGX425033G JGX425032G JGX425035G JGX425036G —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-39
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGE3070FAGC
90 450–900 JGE3090FAGC
100 500–1000 JGE3100FAGC
125 625–1250 JGE3125FAGC
150 750–1550 JGE3150FAGC
160 800–1600 —
175 875–1750 JGE3175FAGC
200 1000–2000 JGE3200FAGC
225 1125–2250 JGE3225FAGC
250 1250–2500 JGE3250FAGC
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGS3070FAGC
90 450–900 JGS3090FAGC
100 500–1000 JGS3100FAGC
125 625–1250 JGS3125FAGC
150 750–1550 JGS3150FAGC
160 800–1600 —
175 875–1750 JGS3175FAGC
200 1000–2000 JGS3200FAGC
225 1125–2250 JGS3225FAGC
250 1250–2500 JGS3250FAGC
JG-Frame
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Number
70 350–700 JGH3070FAGC
90 450–900 JGH3090FAGC
100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGC
125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGC
150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGC
160 800–1600 —
175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGC
200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGC
225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGC
250 1250–2500 JGH3250FAGC
V4-T2-40 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
Note
1Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50 JGE305033GC JGE305032GC JGE305035GC JGE305036GC JGFCT050
100 JGE310033GC JGE310032GC JGE310035GC JGE310036GC JGFCT100
160 JGE316033GC JGE316032GC JGE316035GC JGE316036GC JGFCT160
250 JGE325033GC JGE325032GC JGE325035GC JGE325036GC JGFCT250
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50 JGS305033GC JGS305032GC JGS305035GC JGS305036GC JGFCT050
100 JGS310033GC JGS310032GC JGS310035GC JGS310036GC JGFCT100
160 JGS316033GC JGS316032GC JGS316035GC JGS316036GC JGFCT160
250 JGS325033GC JGS325032GC JGS325035GC JGS325036GC JGFCT250
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50 JGH305033GC JGH305032GC JGH305035GC JGH305036GC JGFCT050
100 JGH310033GC JGH310032GC JGH310035GC JGH310036GC JGFCT100
160 JGH316033GC JGH316032GC JGH316035GC JGH316036GC JGFCT160
250 JGH325033GC JGH325032GC JGH325035GC JGH325036GC JGFCT250
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-41
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
JG-Frame
Load and Line Terminals
JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ
as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are
required, order by catalog number.
Endcap Kits
Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar
or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware.
Control Wire Terminal Kit
For use with aluminum or copper terminals only.
Rear Fed Terminals
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase
barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal.
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order 66A2546G02.
Terminal Shields IP30
Interphase Barriers
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3)
Notes
1Individually packed.
2Standard line and load.
3Individually priced.
T250FJ TA250FJ Endcap Kit Control Wire
Terminal Kit
Rear Fed Terminals Multiwire Connectors
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range/ Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250 Stainless steel Cu 25–185 #4–350 (1) T250FJ 1
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 12
Number of Poles
Catalog Number
Metric Imperial
3FJ3RTWK FJ3RTDK
4FJ4RTWK FJ4RTDK
Description
Catalog
Number
Package of 14 (priced individually) FJCWTK
Maximum
Amperes
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Catalog
Number
250 #4–350 kcmil TA250JGRF
3TA250JGRF
Location Number of Poles Catalog Number
Line or Load 2, 3 FJTS3K
4FJTS4K
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3FJIPBK 3
4FJIPBK4 3
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
250 3 14–2 3TA250FJ3
250 6 14–6 3TA250FJ6
V4-T2-42 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
JG-Frame Accessories
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Note
1Contact Eaton.
Reference
Page
Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole
Description Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-109 ——■——■—
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-109 ——■——■—
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-109 ——■——■—
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-109 ——■——■—
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-109 ■——■———
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-110 ■——■———
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-41 ●●●●●●●
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-107 —■——■——
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ❏—❏❏—❏—
Key interlock kit V4-T2-107 ❏—❏❏—❏—
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-107 ●●●————
Electrical operator V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-413 ●●●●●●●
Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-92 ●●●●●●●
Drawout cassette V4-T2-114 ●●●●●●●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-36 ●●●●●●●
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-105 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB 1●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-43
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
JG 310+ Specifications
Notes
1DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
4Current limiting per UL 489.
5B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
220–240 380–415
480 600
690 2
250 23
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
JGE250 2, 3, 4 65 65 25 25 25 18 12 6 10
JGS2502, 3, 4858540403518126 22
JGH250 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22
JGC250 43, 4 200 200 100 100 100 35 16 12 42
JGU250 43, 4 200 200 150 150 150 50 18 14 50
JGX250 43, 4 200 200 200 200 200 50 18 14 50
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation JG
Frames available 50 A, 100 A, 160 A 250 A
Continuous current range (A) 20–250A
Ground fault pickup (A) 10–250A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) No
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 5Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories Yes
V4-T2-44 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
1Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG.
JG Frame
310+ Settings 50 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 204063100
B 204580125
C 255090150
D 3063100160
E 3270110175
F 4080125200
G 4590150225
H (= In) 50 100 160 250
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Position 12222
Position 24444
Position 37777
Position 4 10 10 10 10
Position 5 12 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x 2x 2x 2x
Position 2 3x 3x 3x 3x
Position 3 4x 4x 4x 4x
Position 4 5x 5x 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x 8x 8x
Position 8 10x 10x 10x 10x
Position 9 14x 14x 14x 14x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300 300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 1 10 20 32 50
Position 2 15 30 48 75
Position 3 20 40 64 100
Position 4 30 60 96 150
Position 5 40 80 128 200
Position 6 50 100 160 250
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1N/A
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2N/A
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-45
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
JG-Frame
JG-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
JG-Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
4 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
Front View Three-Pole
Front Cover Cutout Side View
4.13
(104.9)
1.25 (31.8)
0.63 (16.0)
0.19 (4.8) R
3.44
(87.4)
7.00
(177.8)
3.95
(100.3)
4.00
(101.6)
3.06
(77.7) 2.05 (52.1)
C
L
Breaker
1.06 (27.0)
0.50
(12.7)
C
L
Handle
0.28 (7.1)
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
2, 3 4
JGC 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGE 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGH 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGS 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGU 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
JGX 6.00 (2.70) 8.00 (3.60)
V4-T2-46 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
RESET
TEST
4.09
(103.9)
2.05
(52.1)
3.57
(90.7)
3.69
(93.7)
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
4.13 (104.9)
1.38
(35.1)
2.06
(52.3)
3.92
(99.6) 5.50
(139.7)
11.25
(285.8)
7.00
(177.8)
4.25
(108.0)
3.31
(84.1)
0.69
(17.5)
3.81
(96.8)
4.78
(121.4)
3.37
(85.6)
6.97
(177.0)
1.06
(26.9)
4.93
(125.2)
1.88
(47.8)
0.63
(16.0)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
3.57
(90.7)
2.05
(52.1)
3.92
(99.6)
11.25
(285.8)
R 0.19
(4.8)
0.28
(7.1)
0.50
(139.7)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-47
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-48
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-49
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-60
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-61
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-63
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Product Description
LG breaker is HACR rated.
V4-T2-48 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Trip Unit
Notes
1Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
L G S 3 600 FA G C
Frame
L
Performance
600 480 415 240
E18 35 35 65
S25 50 50 85
H35 65 70 100
C50 100 100 200
U65 150 150 200
X65 200 200 200
KMolded case switch
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
Amperes
250
300
350
400
500
600
630
Number of Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected
6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected
7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected
9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit)
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
E = Imperial end caps
G = Line/load standard
W = Without terminals
Metric
Imperial
Metric
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only)
LT 3 600 FA B20
Trip
LT
Amperes
250
300
350
400
500
600
630
Number of Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected
9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic
FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
Features (ETU Only) 12
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-49
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGE3250FAG LGE3250AAG LGE4250FAG LGE4250AAG
300 LGE3300FAG — LGE4300FAG —
320 — LGE3320AAG — LGE4320AAG
350 LGE3350FAG — LGE4350FAG —
400 LGE3400FAG LGE3400AAG LGE4400FAG LGE4400AAG
500 LGE3500FAG LGE3500AAG LGE4500FAG LGE4500AAG
600 LGE3600FAG — LGE4600FAG —
630 4— LGE3630AAG — LGE4630AAG
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGS3250FAG LGS3250AAG LGS4250FAG LGS4250AAG
300 LGS3300FAG — LGS4300FAG —
320 — LGS3320AAG — LGS4320AAG
350 LGS3350FAG — LGS4350FAG —
400 LGS3400FAG LGS3400AAG LGS4400FAG LGS4400AAG
500 LGS3500FAG LGS3500AAG LGS4500FAG LGS4500AAG
600 LGS3600FAG — LGS4600FAG —
630 4— LGS3630AAG — LGS4630AAG
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGH3250FAG LGH3250AAG LGH4250FAG LGH4250AAG
300 LGH3300FAG — LGH4300FAG —
320 — LGH3320AAG — LGH4320AAG
350 LGH3350FAG — LGH4350FAG —
400 LGH3400FAG LGH3400AAG LGH4400FAG LGH4400AAG
500 LGH3500FAG LGH3500AAG LGH4500FAG LGH4500AAG
600 LGH3600FAG — LGH4600FAG —
630 4— LGH3630AAG — LGH4630AAG
LG-Frame
LG-Frame
LG-Frame
V4-T2-50 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGC3250FAG LGC3250AAG LGC4250FAG LGC4250AAG
300 LGC3300FAG — LGC4300FAG —
320 — LGC3320AAG — LGC4320AAG
350 LGC3350FAG — LGC4350FAG —
400 LGC3400FAG LGC3400AAG LGC4400FAG LGC4400AAG
500 LGC3500FAG LGC3500AAG LGC4500FAG LGC4500AAG
600 LGC3600FAG — LGC4600FAG —
630 4— LGC3630AAG — LGC4630AAG
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGU3250FAG LGU3250AAG LGU4250FAG LGU4250AAG
300 LGU3300FAG — LGU4300FAG —
320 — LGU3320AAG — LGU4320AAG
350 LGU3350FAG — LGU4350FAG —
400 LGU3400FAG LGU3400AAG LGU4400FAG LGU4400AAG
500 LGU3500FAG LGU3500AAG LGU4500FAG LGU4500AAG
600 LGU3600FAG — LGU4600FAG —
630 4— LGU3630AAG — LGU4630AAG
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGX3250FAG LGX3250AAG LGX4250FAG LGX4250AAG
300 LGX3300FAG — LGX4300FAG —
320 — LGX3320AAG — LGX4320AAG
350 LGX3350FAG — LGX4350FAG —
400 LGX3400FAG LGX3400AAG LGX4400FAG LGX4400AAG
500 LGX3500FAG LGX3500AAG LGX4500FAG LGX4500AAG
600 LGX3600FAG — LGX4600FAG —
630 4— LGX3630AAG — LGX4630AAG
LG-Frame
LG-Frame
LG-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-51
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Molded Case Switches 1
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Notes
1Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes.
2For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
4Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
5Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%.
6100% rated frame.
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
400 3 2LGK3400KSG
4LGK4400KSG
630 33 2LGK3630KSG
4LGK4630KSG
Maximum
Amperes 3
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole 0%
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
35/35
630 3LGE3630NN LGE4630NN
LGE3630NNWC —
50/50
630 3LGS3630NN LGS4630NN
LGS3630NNWC —
70/53
630 3LGH3630NN LGH4630NN
LGH3630NNWC —
100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489
630 LGC3630NN LGC4630NN
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
630 LGU3630NN LGU4630NN
200/200 Current Limiting
630 LGX3630NN LGX4630NN
Three-Pole 2Four-Pole (0%) 5
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 4
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 4
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LT3250FA LT3250AA LT4250FA LT4250AA
300 LT3300FA — LT4300FA —
320 — LT3320AA — LT4320AA
350 LT3350FA — LT4350FA —
400 LT3400FA LT3400AA LT4400FA LT4400AA
500 LT3500FA LT3500AA LT4500FA LT4500AA
600 LT3600FA — LT4600FA —
630 — LT3630AA — LT4630AA
V4-T2-52 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Notes
1Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
4Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
250 LT325033 LT325032 LT325035 LT325036 LGFCT250
400 LT340033 LT340032 LT340035 LT340036 LGFCT400
600 LT360033 LT360032 LT360035 LT360036 LGFCT600
630 2LT363033 LT363032 LT363035 LT363036 LGFCT600
Four-Pole 34
250 LT425033 LT425032 LT425035 LT425036 —
400 LT440033 LT440032 LT440035 LT440036 —
600 LT460033 LT460032 LT460035 LT460036 —
630 2LT463033 LT463032 LT463035 LT463036 —
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (630 A) LGFCT630
External neutral sensor (600 A) LGFCT600
External neutral sensor (400 A) LGFCT400
External neutral sensor (250 A) LGFCT250
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-53
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Notes
1Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
4630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
5Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
6Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGE325033G LGE325032G LGE325035G LGE325036G LGFCT250
400 LGE340033G LGE340032G LGE340035G LGE340036G LGFCT400
600 LGE360033G LGE360032G LGE360035G LGE360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGE363033G LGE363032G LGE363035G LGE363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5
250 LGE425033G LGE425032G LGE425035G LGE425036G —
400 LGE440033G LGE440032G LGE440035G LGE440036G —
600 LGE460033G LGE460032G LGE460035G LGE460036G —
630 4LGE463033G LGE463032G LGE463035G LGE463036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGS325033G LGS325032G LGS325035G LGS325036G LGFCT250
400 LGS340033G LGS340032G LGS340035G LGS340036G LGFCT400
600 LGS360033G LGS360032G LGS360035G LGS360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGS363033G LGS363032G LGS363035G LGS363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 56
250 LGS425033G LGS425032G LGS425035G LGS425036G —
400 LGS440033G LGS440032G LGS440035G LGS440036G —
600 LGS460033G LGS460032G LGS460035G LGS460036G —
630 4LGS463033G LGS463032G LGS463035G LGS463036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGH325033G LGH325032G LGH325035G LGH325036G LGFCT250
400 LGH340033G LGH340032G LGH340035G LGH340036G LGFCT400
600 LGH360033G LGH360032G LGH360035G LGH360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGH363033G LGH363032G LGH363035G LGH363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 56
250 LGH425033G LGH425032G LGH425035G LGH425036G —
400 LGH440033G LGH440032G LGH440035G LGH440036G —
600 LGH460033G LGH460032G LGH460035G LGH460036G —
630 4LGH463033G LGH463032G LGH463035G LGH463036G —
V4-T2-54 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Notes
1Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
4630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
5Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
6Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGC325033G LGC325032G LGC325035G LGC325036G LGFCT250
400 LGC340033G LGC340032G LGC340035G LGC340036G LGFCT400
600 LGC360033G LGC360032G LGC360035G LGC360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGC363033G LGC363032G LGC363035G LGC363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 56
250 LGC425033G LGC425032G LGC425035G LGC425036G —
400 LGC440033G LGC440032G LGC440035G LGC440036G —
600 LGC460033G LGC460032G LGC460035G LGC460036G —
630 4LGC463033G LGC463032G LGC463035G LGC463036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGU325033G LGU325032G LGU325035G LGU325036G LGFCT250
400 LGU340033G LGU340032G LGU340035G LGU340036G LGFCT400
600 LGU360033G LGU360032G LGU360035G LGU360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGU363033G LGU363032G LGU363035G LGU363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5
250 LGU425033G LGU425032G LGU425035G LGU425036G —
400 LGU440033G LGU440032G LGU440035G LGU440036G —
600 LGU460033G LGU460032G LGU460035G LGU460036G —
630 4LGU463033G LGU463032G LGU463035G LGU463036G —
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250 LGX325033G LGX325032G LGX325035G LGX325036G LGFCT250
400 LGX340033G LGX340032G LGX340035G LGX340036G LGFCT400
600 LGX360033G LGX360032G LGX360035G LGX360036G LGFCT600
630 4LGX363033G LGX363032G LGX363035G LGX363036G LGFCT600
Four-Pole 5
250 LGX425033G LGX425032G LGX425035G LGX425036G —
400 LGX440033G LGX440032G LGX440035G LGX440036G —
600 LGX460033G LGX460032G LGX460035G LGX460036G —
630 4LGX463033G LGX463032G LGX463035G LGX463036G —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-55
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65
kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number
250 LGE3250FAGC
300 LGE3300FAGC
320 —
350 LGE3350FAGC
400 LGE3400FAGC
500 LGE3500FAGC
600 LGE3600FAGC
630 4—
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number
250 LGS3250FAGC
300 LGS3300FAGC
320 —
350 LGS3350FAGC
400 LGS3400FAGC
500 LGS3500FAGC
600 LGS3600FAGC
630 4—
LG-Frame
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating Catalog Number
250 LGH3250FAGC
300 LGH3300FAGC
320 —
350 LGH3350FAGC
400 LGH3400FAGC
500 LGH3500FAGC
600 LGH3600FAGC
630 4—
V4-T2-56 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
Notes
1Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGE325033GC LGE325032GC LGE325035GC LGE325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGE340033GC LGE340032GC LGE340035GC LGE340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGE360033GC LGE360032GC LGE360035GC LGE360036GC LGFCT600
630 2LGE363033GC LGE363032GC LGE363035GC LGE363036GC LGFCT600
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGS325033GC LGS325032GC LGS325035GC LGS325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGS340033GC LGS340032GC LGS340035GC LGS340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGS360033GC LGS360032GC LGS360035GC LGS360036GC LGFCT600
630 2LGS363033GC LGS363032GC LGS363035GC LGS363036GC LGFCT600
Ampere
Rating
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGH325033GC LGH325032GC LGH325035GC LGH325036GC LGFCT250
400 LGH340033GC LGH340032GC LGH340035GC LGH340036GC LGFCT400
600 LGH360033GC LGH360032GC LGH360035GC LGH360036GC LGFCT600
630 2LGH363033GC LGH363032GC LGH363035GC LGH363036GC LGFCT600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-57
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
Series G LG circuit breakers
are available with the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance
System™ integrated into the
electronic trip units helping to
improve safety by providing a
simple and reliable method to
reduce fault clearing time.
The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System unit
utilizes a separate analog trip
circuit that provides faster
interruption times than the
standard (digital)
“instantaneous” protection.
Work locations downstream
of a circuit breaker with an
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System unit can
have a significantly lower
incident energy level,
reducing arc flash potential to
the system.
LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Note
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
Ampere
Rating
ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250 LGE325038G LGE365039G LGFCT250
400 LGE340038G LGE340039G LGFCT400
600 LGE360038G LGE360039G LGFCT600
630 LGE363038G LGE363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250 LGS325038G LGS365039G LGFCT250
400 LGS340038G LGS340039G LGFCT400
600 LGS360038G LGS360039G LGFCT600
630 LGS363038G LGS363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250 LGH325038G LGH365039G LGFCT250
400 LGH340038G LGH340039G LGFCT400
600 LGH360038G LGH360039G LGFCT600
630 LGH363038G LGH363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 LGC325038G LGC365039G LGFCT250
400 LGC340038G LGC340039G LGFCT400
600 LGC360038G LGC360039G LGFCT600
630 LGC363038G LGC363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 LGU325038G LGU365039G LGFCT250
400 LGU340038G LGU340039G LGFCT400
600 LGU360038G LGU360039G LGFCT600
630 LGU363038G LGU363039G LGFCT600
IEC/UL/CSA 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250 LGX325038G LGX365039G LGFCT250
400 LGX340038G LGX340039G LGFCT400
600 LGX360038G LGX360039G LGFCT600
630 LGX363038G LGX363039G LGFCT600
Ampere
Rating
ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LT325038 LT325039 LGFCT250
400 LT340038 LT340039 LGFCT400
600 LT360038 LT360039 LGFCT600
630 LT363038 LT363039 LGFCT600
LG with
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
V4-T2-58 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order 66A4560G03.
Terminal Covers
End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts)
Control Wire Terminal Kit
Terminal Spreaders
Terminal Extensions
Handle Extension
Interphase Barrier
Rear Fed Terminals
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase
barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal.
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3)
Notes
1Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.
2Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
3Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG
Wire Range/
Number of
Conductors
Metric
Wire Range
(mm2)
Number of
Terminals
Included
Catalog
Number
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3TA631LK 1
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4TA631LK 1
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 3 3T631LK 1
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) 240–380 (1) 4 4T631LK 1
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK 12
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK 12
630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3T632LK 1
630 Copper Cu 2–500 (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK 1
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK 2
400 Copper Cu 3–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK
Description
Catalog
Number
Three-pole terminal cover 3LTS3K
Four-pole terminal cover 3LTS4K
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3L3RTWK
4L4RTWK
Description
Terminal
Body Type
Catalog
Number
Three-pole kit Aluminum 3TA632LKW
Four-pole kit Aluminum 4TA632LKW
Three-pole kit Copper 3T632LKW
Four-pole kit Copper 4T632LKW
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3LGTEW3
4LGTEW4
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3LGTES3
4LGTES4
Description
Catalog
Number
Handle extension HEXLG
Package of 2
Catalog
Number
Interphase barrier IPB3
Maximum
Amperes
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Catalog
Number
400 2–500 kcmil TA350LKRF
400 2–500 kcmil 3TA350LKRF
630 2–500 (2) kcmil TA632LKRF
630 2–500 (2) kcmil 3TA632LKRF
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
600 6 14–1/0 3TA600L6K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-59
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers
Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length.
V4-T2-60 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch.
(Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03.
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
LG-Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Note
1Contact Eaton.
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-109 ■■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-109 ■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-110 ■■
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-58 ●●
Handle extension V4-T2-58 ●●
Terminal cover V4-T2-58 ●●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-58 ●●●●●●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-58 ●●●●●●●
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-107 ■■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Electrical operator V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-413 ●●●●●●●
Earth leakage/ground fault protector V4-T2-92 ●●●●●●●
Drawout cassette V4-T2-114 ●●●●●●●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-52 ●●●●●●●
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-105 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-61
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
LG 310+ Specifications
Notes
1DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
3Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4Current limiting per UL 489.
5B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
240–240 380–415 480 600 690 250 23
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
LGE6303, 4 656535353518126 2222
LGS6303, 4 85855050502520102222
LGH6303, 4 1001007070653525134242
LGC630 43, 4 200 200 100 100 100 50 30 15 42 42
LGU630 43, 4 200 200 150 150 150 65 35 18 50 50
LGX630 43, 4 200 5200 200 200 200 65 35 18 50 50
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation LG
Frames available 250 A, 400 A, 600 A
Continuous current range (A) 100–600 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 50–600 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 5Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories Yes
V4-T2-62 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
150 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
LG Frame
310+ Settings 250 A 400 A 600 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 100 160 250
B 125 200 300
C 150 225 315
D 160 250 350
E 175 300 400
F 200 315 450
G 225 350 500
H (= In) 250 400 600
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Position 1 2 2 2
Position 2 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10
Position 5 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x 2x 2x
Position 2 3x 3x 3x
Position 3 4x 4x 4x
Position 4 5x 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x 8x
Position 8 10x 10x 10x
Position 9 12x 12x 12x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 50 80 120
Position 2 75 120 180
Position 3 100 160 240
Position 4 150 240 360
Position 5 200 320 480
Position 6 250 400 600
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 10x,
12x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 10x,
12x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 10x,
12x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) 2
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Fixed 2.5x
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
LG-Frame
LG-Frame
Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or
LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG.
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
LG-Frame
Notes
1DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
3Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4Three-poles in series. 750 Vdc ratings available (four-pole in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton.
5IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.
6Current limiting per UL 489.
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
5.58
(141.7) 10.13
(257.3)
4.06
(103.1)
5.48
(139.2)
1.92
(48.8)
2.43 (61.7)
3.16
(80.3)
R 0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.69
(68.3) 5.38
(136.7)
Breaker
Three-Pole
C
L
Breaker Type Two- and Three-Pole Four-Pole
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX 16 (7.3) 20 (9.1)
V4-T2-64 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.4)
5.16
(131.1)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
15.38
(390.7)
10.13
(257.3)
15.38
(390.7)
3.98
(101.1)
4.30
(109.2)
4.31
(109.5)
4.55
(115.6)
8.44
(214.4)
13.69
(347.7)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
5.58
(141.7)
5.43
(137.9)
4.06
(103.1)
3.97
(100.8)
8.44
(214.4)
13.68
(347.5)
4.73
(120.1)
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.4)
0.86
(21.8)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-65
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
NG-Frame (1200 Ampere)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-66
Product Selection Guide and Ordering
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-67
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-70
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-71
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-73
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton NG-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
●All NG-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
V4-T2-66 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
Notes
1800 A only.
2Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG.
3Breakers do not ship with lugs.
Trip units are factory installable only.
Amperes
080 = 800
120 = 1200
Frame
NG
Performance
at 480 Vac
S = 50 kAIC
H = 65 kAIC
C = 100 kAIC
U = 150 kAIC 1
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four; neutral 2
0% protected
7 = Four; neutral 2
100% protected
9 = Four; neutral 2
0/60/100% adjustable
protection
Trip Unit
33 = 310+ Electronic LS
32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
35 = 310+ Electronic LSG
36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode
39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C= 100% rated
Terminations 3
M= Metric tapped line/load
conductors
E= Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-67
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Molded Case Switches 78
Notes
1For AC use only.
2NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available.
4Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pocket; GN, neutral in left pocket.
5Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
7For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.
8For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors
LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG
800 3NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
4 4NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E NGH408036E NGH408038E NGH408039E —
4 5NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — —
4 6NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — —
1200 33NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
4 4NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E NGH412036E —NGH412039E —
4 5NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
4 6NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Metric Tapped Conductors
LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG
800 3NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
4 4NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E NGH408036E NGH408038E NGH408039E —
4 5NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — —
4 6NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — —
1200 3NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
4 4NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E NGH412036E —NGH412039E —
4 5NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
4 6NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —
Ampere
Rating
Ue Maximum 690 Vac
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
800 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3080KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4080KSE
1200 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3120KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK4120KSE
1250 MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK3125KSE MCS with Imperial line and load terminals NGK43125KSE
V4-T2-68 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Notes
1For AC use only.
2NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pocket; GN, neutral in left pocket.
4Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
5Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG
800 3NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
4 3NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E NGH408036E NGH408038E NGH408039E —
4 4NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — —
4 5NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — —
1200 3NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
4 3NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E NGH412036E —NGH412039E —
4 4NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
4 5NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
LS LSI LSG LSIG ALSI ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG
800 3NGH308033E NGH308032E NGH308035E NGH308036E NGH308038E NGH308039E NGFCT120
4 3NGH408033E NGH408032E NGH408035E NGH408036E NGH408038E NGH408039E —
4 4NGH708033E NGH708032E — — NGH708038E — —
4 5NGH908033E NGH908032E — — NGH908038E — —
1200 3NGH312033E NGH312032E NGH312035E NGH312036E NGH312038E NGH312039E NGFCT120
4 3NGH412033E NGH412032E NGH412035E NGH412036E —NGH412039E —
4 4NGH712033E NGH712032E — — NGH712038E — —
4 5NGH912033E NGH912032E — — NGH912038E — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-69
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number.
Line and Load Terminals
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch.
Base Mounting Hardware 2
Terminal Shield
Terminal Shield
Conductor Extension Kit
Conductor Extension Kit 3
Keeper Nut
Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded.
Handle Extension
Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are
available.
Handle Extension
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance
between circuit breaker poles for special termination
applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that
are installed in the molded slots between the terminals.
(Field installation only.)
Interphase Barriers
Notes
1Single terminals individually packed.
2Metric hardware included with breaker.
3Included as standard on 100% rated 800/1200 A breakers.
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
AWG Wire
(Number of
Conductors)
AWG Wire
Catalog
Number 1
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Metric
Catalog
Number 1
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
700 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 (2) TA700NB1 50–240 TA700NB1M
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 (3) TA1000NB1 95–185 TA1000NB1M
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 (4) TA1200NB1 120–240 TA1200NB1M
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 500–750 (3) TA1201NB1 300–400 TA1201NB1M
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1 70–240 T700NB1M
1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1 95–240 T1000NB1M
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3 95–185 T1200NB3M
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (1200 A) NGFCT120
External neutral sensor (800 A) NGFCT120
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
Number
of Poles Description
Catalog
Number
Three- and four-pole Imperial hardware:
0.3125–18 x 1.25
pan-head steel screws and lock washers
BMH5
Three- and four-pole Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws
and lock washers
BMH5M
Description
Catalog
Number
Three-pole terminal shield NTS3K
Description
Catalog
Number
Three-pole both ends Metric 5104A24G04
Three-pole both ends English 5104A24G02
Description
Catalog
Number
Single handle extension HEX5
Description
Catalog
Number
Interphase barriers 123 IPB5
V4-T2-70 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
NG-Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Note
1Contact Eaton.
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-109 ●■●■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-109 ●■●■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-109 ●■●■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-109 ●■●■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-109 ■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-110 ■■
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-69 ●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-69 ●●●●●●●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-107 ■■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-107 ●●●
Electrical operator V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-113 ●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-413 ●●●●●●●
Drawout cassette V4-T2-114 ●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-69 ●●●●●●●
Ammeter/cause of trip display V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Cause of trip LED module V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-105 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-71
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications
NG 310+ Specifications
Notes
11600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
2B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles 240 (UL)
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
220–240 380–415
480 600
690
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
NGS 12, 3, 4 65 8585505050252010
NGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 100 70 50 65 35 25 13
NGC 2, 3, 4 200 200 100 100 50 100 65 35 18
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation NG
Frames available 800 A, 1200 A
Continuous current range (A) 320–1200A
Ground fault pickup (A) 160–1200A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100, 150
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
Interchangeable trip unit No
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories No
V4-T2-72 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
150 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
RG Frame
310+ Settings 800 A 1200 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 320 500
B 400 600
C 450 630
D 500 700
E 600 800
F 630 900
G 700 1000
H (= In) 800 1200
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Position 1 2 2
Position 2 4 4
Position 3 6 7
Position 4 8 10
Position 5 10 12
Position 6 12 15
Position 7 14 20
Position 8 14 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x 2x
Position 2 3x 3x
Position 3 4x 4x
Position 4 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x
Position 8 9x 9x
Position 9 9x 9x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
Position 1 Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120
Position 3 300 300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 160 240
Position 2 240 360
Position 3 320 480
Position 4 480 720
Position 5 640 960
Position 6 800 1200
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120
Position 3 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
8x, 10x, 18x
2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
8x, 10x, 12x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In)
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
Fixed 2.5x 2.5x
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-73
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NG-Frame
NG-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
NG-Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
9.25
(235.0)
Front View Three-Pole
Front Cover Cutout
16.00
(406.4)
3.44
(87.4)
Side View
5.50
(139.7)
8.25
(209.6)
1.91
(48.5)
1.50
(38.1)
6.38
(162.1)
3.19
(81.0)
BREAKER
R .25
(6.4)
3.68
(93.5)
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole
NGS, NGH, NGC 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
V4-T2-74 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-75
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-76
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-81
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-82
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-84
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4 -T 2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Product Description
●Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
terminals
●All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-75
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit
RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C
Amperes
160 = 1600
200 = 2000
250 = 2500
Frame
RG
Performance
at 480 Vac
H = 65 kAIC
C = 100 kAIC
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four
Trip Unit
33 = 310+ Electronic LS
32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
35 = 310+ Electronic LSG
36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode
39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C= 100% rated (except 2500 A)
Terminations
M= Metric tapped line/load
conductors
E= Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
W= No terminals
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Poles
3 = Three
Amperes
160 = 1600
200 = 2000
250 = 2500
Type
RT
RT 3250 39 ZG
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Trip Unit
33 = 310+ Electronic LS
32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
35 = 310+ Electronic LSG
36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ Electronic LSI
w/ Maintenance Mode
39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
w/ Maintenance Mode
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four
Trip Function
Digitrip 610
T61 = LI
T62 = LSI
T63 = LS
T64 = LIG
T65 = LSG
T66 = LSIG
Digitrip 910
T91 = LI
T92 = LSI
T93 = LS
T94 = LIG
T95 = LSG
T96 = LSIG
Amperes
16 = 1600
20 = 2000
25 = 2500
Type
RGH 65K
RGC 100K
Modification Suffix
R= Ground fault remote
RES trip
E= 100% protection
(new design 310)
RES trip unit
P= 100% prot. neut.
4P RES trip unit
V3 = Electronic trip without
ambient temperature
marked on trip unit
W= w/o terms
K= Molded case switch
RGH 316 T92 W
V4-T2-76 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
Notes
1For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
3Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
4No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
5Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIGLS LSI LSG 3LSIG 3ALSI ALSIG
1600 13RGH316033E RGH316032E RGH316035E RGH316036E RGH316038E RGH316039E RGFCT160A
2000 3 RGH320033E RGH320032E RGH320035E RGH320036E RGH320038E RGH320039E RGFCT200A
2500 3 RGH325033E RGH325032E RGH325035E RGH325036E RGH325038E RGH325039E RGFCT250A
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
LS LSI LSG 34 LSIG 34 ALSI ALSIG 34
1600 14 5RGH416033E RGH416032E — — RGH416038E —
2000 4 5RGH420033E RGH420032E — — RGH420038E —
2500 4 5RGH425033E RGH425032E — — RGH425038E —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-77
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
Molded Case Switches 6
Notes
1For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
3Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
4No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
5Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
6Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes.
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIGLS LSI LSG 3LSIG 3ALSI ALSIG
1600 13RGC316033E RGC316032E RGC316035E RGC316036E RGC316038E RGC316039E RGFCT160A
2000 3 RGC320033E RGC320032E RGC320035E RGC320036E RGC320038E RGC320039E RGFCT200A
2500 3 RGC325033E RGC325032E RGC325035E RGC325036E RGC325038E RGC325039E RGFCT250A
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
LS LSI LSG 34 LSIG 34 ALSI ALSIG 34
1600 14 5RGC416033E RGC416032E — — RGC416038E —
2000 4 5RGC420033E RGC420032E — — RGC420038E —
2500 4 5RGC425033E RGC425032E — — RGC425038E —
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
1600 3 RGK3160KSE
2000 3 RGK3200KSE
1600 4 RGK4160KSE
2000 4 RGK4200KSE
V4-T2-78 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910
Notes
1Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable
Rating Plug
(Order as Individual
Component)
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
Long Delay Pickup
Long Delay Time
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
Instantaneous
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–I.0n
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGH316T61WP44 RGH316T63WP44 RGH316T62WP44 RGH316T64WP44 RGH316T65WP44 RGH316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 3 RGH320T61WP49 RGH320T63WP49 RGH320T62WP49 RGH320T64WP49 RGH320T65WP49 RGH320T66WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 3 RGH325T61WP53 RGH325T63WP53 RGH325T62WP53 RGH325T64WP53 RGH325T65WP53 RGH325T66WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGC316T61WP44 RGC316T63WP44 RGC316T62WP44 RGC316T64WP44 RGC316T65WP44 RGC316T66WP44 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 3 RGC320T61WP49 RGC320T63WP49 RGC320T62WP49 RGC320T64WP49 RGC320T65WP49 RGC320T66WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 3 RGC325T61WP53 RGC325T63WP53 RGC325T62WP53 RGC325T64WP53 RGC325T65WP53 RGC325T66WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-79
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued
Notes
1Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable
Rating Plug
(Order as Individual
Component)
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG Fixed Rating Plug
Long Delay Pickup
Long Delay Time
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
Instantaneous
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–I.0n
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGH316T91WP44 RGH316T93WP44 RGH316T92WP44 RGH316T94WP44 RGH316T95WP44 RGH316T96WP44 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 3 RGH320T91WP49 RGH320T93WP49 RGH320T92WP49 RGH320T94WP49 RGH320T95WP49 RGH320T96WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 3 RGH325T91WP53 RGH325T93WP53 RGH325T92WP53 RGH325T94WP53 RGH325T95WP53 RGH325T96WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600 3 RGC316T91WP44 RGC316T93WP44 RGC316T92WP44 RGC316T94WP44 RGC316T95WP44 RGC316T96WP44 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1250 RP6R16A125
Includes 1600 A rating plug 1600 RP6R16A160
2000 3 RGC320T91WP49 RGC320T93WP49 RGC320T92WP49 RGC320T94WP49 RGC320T95WP49 RGC320T96WP49 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1250 RP6R20A125
1600 RP6R20A160
Includes 2000 A rating plug 2000 RP6R20A200
2500 3 RGC325T91WP53 RGC325T93WP53 RGC325T92WP53 RGC325T94WP53 RGC325T95WP53 RGC25T96WP53 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
Includes 2500 A rating plug 2500 RP6R25A250
V4-T2-80 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and
copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation
is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze
testing requirements.
Line and Load Terminals
RG Rear Connector Exploded View
TA2000RD Wire Terminal
Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number
includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or
load side of three-pole breaker.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Wire Terminals
1600 Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 500–1000 (4) 300–500 TA1600RDM 1
1600 Copper Cu Metric 1–600 (4) 50–300 T1600RDM 1
2000 Aluminum Cu/Al Metric 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RDM 2
Rear Connectors
2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDM 1
2000 Copper — Metric — — B2016RDLM 1
2500 Copper — Metric — — B2500RDM 1
Conductor
(Viewed from Front
of Circuit Breaker)
Conductor
(Viewed from Rear
of Circuit Breaker and Cut
Away for Clarity)
Rear Connector (Cu)
B2016RDM
B2016RDLM (For 100% Application)
(For 1600 A and 2000 A Frames)
B2500RDM for 2500 A
Securing
Hardware
Securing Hardware
Cu Only
Terminal
Catalog Number
T1600RDM 3
(For 1600 A
Frame Only)
Al/Cu
Terminal
Catalog
Number
TA1600RDM 3
(For 1600 A
Frame Only)
OR
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
Base Mounting Hardware
Supplied by customer.
Handle Extension
Included with breaker.
Additional handle extensions
are available.
Handle Extension
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to
secure the cover on the trip
unit to prevent adjustments
after settings are confirmed.
Wire Seal
Notes
1Order one per pole—single terminals
individually packed.
2Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles.
Catalog number includes bus connection,
terminals and hardware for either line
side or load side of three-pole breaker.
3For use with 2500 A Frame. Do not order
separately unless for replacement
purposes. Included in breaker carton
when 2500 A frame is ordered.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line
and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if
imperial threading is required.
Description
Catalog
Number
Single handle
extension
HEX6
Description
Catalog
Number
Wire seal 5108A03H01
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-81
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
RG-Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Notes
1Contact Eaton.
2Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units.
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-109 ■■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-109 ■■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-109 ●●
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-110 ●●
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-80 ●●●●●●●
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-107 ❏❏❏❏
Electrical operator V4-T2-107 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-413 ●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-80 ●●●●●●●
Digitrip 310+ test kit V4-T2-106 ●●●●●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-105 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB 1●●●●●●●
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (2500 A) RGFCT250A
External neutral sensor (2000 A) RGFCT200A
External neutral sensor (1600 A) RGFCT160A
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 2—
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
V4-T2-82 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
RG 310+ Specifications
Notes
1Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
See Page V4-T2-74 for trip unit specifications.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
RGH 3, 4 125 — 65 50
RGC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 415 690
RGH 3, 4
Icu 135 70 25
Ics 100 50 13
RGC 3, 4
Icu 200 100 35
Ics 100 50 18
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation RG
Frames available 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A
Continuous current range (A) 800–2500 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 200–1200 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 65, 100
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) Yes
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories No
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-83
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
150 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
RG Frame
310+ Settings 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 800 1000 1600
B 900 1200 1700
C 1000 1400 1800
D 1100 1600 2000
E 1200 1700 2100
F 1400 1800 2200
G 1500 1900 2400
H (= In) 1600 2000 2500
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Position 1 2 2 2
Position 2 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10
Position 5 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x 2x 2x
Position 2 3x 3x 2x
Position 3 4x 4x 2x
Position 4 5x 5x 3x
Position 5 6x 6x 4x
Position 6 7x 7x 5x
Position 7 8x 8x 6x
Position 8 8x 8x 6x
Position 9 9x 9x 6x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 200 200 200
Position 2 400 400 400
Position 3 600 600 600
Position 4 800 800 800
Position 5 1000 1000 1000
Position 6 1200 1200 1200
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 11x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 9x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In)
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
Fixed 2.5x 2.5x 2.5x
V4-T2-84 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RG-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
RG-Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker
Number of Poles
Three-Pole Four-Pole
1600 Amperes
RGH, RGC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2000 Amperes
RGH, RGC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2500 Amperes
RGH, RGC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
14.50
(368.3)
7.25
(184.2)
(129.5)
(196.9)
0.16 R
(4.1)
Front View 3-Pole
Front Cover Cutout
C
L
Breaker
16.00
(406.4)
8.25
(209.6)
15.50
(393.7)
13.13
(333.5)
6.57
(166.9)
(246.4)
15.00
(381.0)
4 Holes
0.44 Dia.
(11.2)
C
L
Handle
13.00
(330.2)
2.25 (57.2)
Tee
Connectors
May Be
Rotated 90
6.75
(171.5)
9.00
(228.6)
Side View
.44 R
(11.2)
5.10
9.70
7.75
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-85
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Product Selection Guide and Ordering
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-86
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Motor Circuit Protectors
(MCP)
V4-T2-86 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1
Notes
1UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 2
MCP
Trip
Setting 3
MCP
Catalog
Number
3 A 0.69 –0.91 9 HMCPE003A0C
B1.1–1.3 15
C1.6–1.7 21
D2.0–2.2 27
E2.3–2.5 30
F 2.6– 2.8 33
7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCPE007C0C
B2.6–3.1 35
C3.7–3.9 49
D4.8–5.2 63
E5.3–5.7 70
F5.8–6.1 77
15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPE015E0C
B5.7–6.8 75
C 8.0–9.1 105
D 10.4–11.4 135
E 11.5–12.6 150
F 12.7–13.0 165
30 A 3.9–9.1 90 HMCPE030H1C
B 11.5–13.7 150
C 16.1–18.3 210
D 20.7–22.9 270
E 23.0–25.2 300
F 25.3–26.1 330
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-87
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1
JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
Notes
1UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
4Settings above 10 x In are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be
less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 2
MCP
Trip
Setting 3
MCP
Catalog
Number
50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPE050K2C
B 19.2–22.9 250
C 26.9–30.6 350
D 34.6–38.3 450
E 38.4–42.1 500
F 42.2–43.5 550
70 A 16.1–30.6 210 HMCPE070M2C
B 26.9–32.2 350
C 37.6–42.9 490
D 48.4–53.7 630
E 53.8–59.1 700
F 59.2–60.9 770
100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPE100R3C
B 38.4–46.0 500
C 53.8–61.4 700
D 69.2–76.8 900
E 76.9–84.5 1000
F 84.6–87.0 1100
100 A 38.4–46.0 500 HMCPE100T3C
B 57.6–65.2 750
C 76.9–84.5 1000
D41250
E41375
F41500
Continuous
Amperes
MCP
Trip Range
(Amperes)
MCP
Catalog
Number
250 500–1000 HMCPJ250D5L
625–1250 HMCPJ250F5L
750–1500 HMCPJ250G5L
875–1750 HMCPJ250J5L
1000–2000 HMCPJ250K5L
1125–2250 HMCPJ250L5L
1250–2500 HMCPJ250W5L
V4-T2-88 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
Notes
1UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.
Continuous
Amperes
MCP
Trip Range
(Amperes)
MCP
Catalog
Number
600 1250–2500 HMCPL600L6G
1500–3000 HMCPL600N6G
1750–3500 HMCPL600R6G
2000–4000 HMCPL600X6G
2250–4500 HMCPL600Y6G
2500–5000 HMCPL600P6G
3000–6000 HMCPL600M6G
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-89
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-90
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-91
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2 -111
Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Description
●Eliminates need for
separate overload relay
Application Description
●Can be used with
contactor to eliminate need
for overload relay and still
create manual motor
control
●Meets requirement for
motor branch protection,
including:
●Disconnecting means
●Branch circuit short
circuit protection
●Overload protection
Features and Benefits
●Phase unbalance
protection
●Phase loss protection
●Hot trip/cold trip
●High load alarm
●Pre-detection trip relay
option
●Class 10, 15, 20, 30
protection
Standards and Certifications
●IEC 60947-2
●UL 489 100% rated
●UL 508
●CSA C22.2
V4-T2-90 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
JGMP Catalog Numbers
JGMP FLA le Dial Setting
LGMP Catalog Numbers
LGMP FLA le Dial Setting
Notes
1630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-265.
Continuous Amperes
35 kAIC 65 kAIC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G
100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G
160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G
250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
50 20 20 25 30 32 40 45 50
100 40455063708090100
160 63 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250
Continuous Amperes
50 kAIC 65 kAIC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G
400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G
600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G
630 1LGMPS630G LGMPH630G
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
250 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250
400 160 200 225 250 300 315 350 400
600 250 300 315 350 400 450 500 600
630 1250 300 315 350 400 500 600 630
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-91
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Notes
1630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
Maximum Rated Current—250 A
Breaker Type
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz JGMPS JGMPH
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu 85 100
I cs 85 100
380–415 Vac I cu 40 70
I cs 40 70
660–690 Vac I cu 12 14
I cs 6 7
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
480 Vac 35 65
600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 33
Ampere range 50–250 50 –250
Maximum Rated Current—630 A 1
Breaker Type
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz LGMPS LGMPH
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac I cu 85 100
I cs 85 100
380–415 Vac I cu 50 70
I cs 50 53
660–690 Vac I cu 20 25
I cs 10 13
NEMA UL 489 240 Vac 85 100
480 Vac 50 65
600 Vac 25 35
Number of poles 33
Ampere range 250–630 1250 –630 1
V4-T2-92 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Clockwise from Left:
JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with
Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-93
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-94
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
Product Description
Eaton offers three- and four-
pole 30 mA ground fault
(earth leakage) protection
modules for Series G E-, J-
and L-frame molded case
circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Separate UL listed and IEC
rated devices are available for
each frame.
The modules are bottom
mounted and are available for
each frame circuits up to:
●EG: 125 amperes
●JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC)
or 250 amperes
●LG: 400, 600 (UL)
or 630 (IEC) amperes
The module is completely self
contained, including a current
sensor, relay and power
supply inside the device.
Current pickup settings are
selectable from 0.03 to 10
amperes for all devices,
except for the UL listed
module, for which settings
are selectable from 0.03 to 30
amperes. Time delays are
also selectable from
Instantaneous to 1.0 second
for pickup settings of 0.10
amperes and above. The
current pickup setting of
0.03 amperes defaults to an
Instantaneous time setting
regardless of the time dial’s
position.
Two alarm contacts are
included with each device,
which can be wired externally
for remote indication. Both of
these are also indicated by an
LED on the front of the
device:
1. 50% pre-trip: alarms
when the earth leakage
current reaches 50% of
the set pickup setting
value.
2. 100% after trip: alarms
when the breaker
reaches the set pickup
setting value and the
breaker trips.
UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-93
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz) 1
EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
Note
1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG
breaker connected to an earth leakage module.
LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
125 3 ELEBN3125G
125 4 ELEBN4125G
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
125 3 ELEBE3125G
125 4 ELEBE4125G
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
150 3 ELJBN3150W
150 4 ELJBN4150W
250 3 ELJBN3250W
250 4 ELJBN4250W
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
160 3 ELJBE3160W
160 4 ELJBE4160W
250 3 ELJBE3250W
250 4 ELJBE4250W
EG-Frame
JG-Frame
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
400 3 ELLBN3400W
400 4 ELLBN4400W
600 3 ELLBN3600W
600 4 ELLBN4600W
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
400 3 ELLBE3400W
400 4 ELLBE4400W
630 3 ELLBE3630W
630 4 ELLBE4630W
LG-Frame
V4-T2-94 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
Frame Height Width Depth
Three-Pole
EG 10.25 (260.3) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8)
JG 11.25 (285.8) 4.13 (104.9) 3.57 (90.7)
LG 15.38 (390.7) 5.48 (139.2) 4.06 (103.1)
Four-Pole
EG 10.25 (260.3) 4.00 (101.6) 2.98 (75.8)
JG 11.25 (285.8) 5.50 (139.7) 3.57 (90.7)
LG 15.38 (390.7) 7.23 (183.6) 4.06 (103.1)
0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
3.17
(80.5)
3.01
(76.5)
2.75
(69.9)
0.09
(2.29)
10.26
(260.6) 4.75
(120.6) 0.55 (14.0)
3-Pole
2.98
(75.7)
3.98
(101.1)
2.00
(50.8)
1.49
(37.8)
1.0 0
(25.4)
1.0 0
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
8.59
(218.2)
4.78
(121.4) 0.70 (17.8)
0.78
(19.8)
0.50
(12.7)
1.50
(38.1)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-95
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
RESET
TEST
4.09
(103.9)
2.05
(52.1)
3.57
(90.7)
3.69
(93.7)
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
4.13 (104.9)
1.38
(35.1)
2.06
(52.3)
3.92
(99.6) 5.50
(139.7)
11.25
(285.8)
7.00
(177.8)
4.25
(108.0)
3.31
(84.1)
0.69
(17.5)
3.81
(96.8)
4.78
(121.4)
3.37
(85.6)
6.97
(177.0)
1.06
(26.9)
4.93
(125.2)
1.88
(47.8)
0.63
(16.0)
1.25
(31.8)
5.50
(139.7)
3.57
(90.7)
2.05
(52.1)
3.92
(99.6)
11.25
(285.8)
R 0.19
(4.8)
0.28
(7.1)
0.50
(139.7)
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.4)
5.16
(131.1)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
15.38
(390.7)
10.13
(257.3)
15.38
(390.7)
3.98
(101.1)
4.30
(109.2)
4.31
(109.5)
4.55
(115.6)
8.44
(214.4)
13.69
(347.7)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
5.58
(141.7)
5.43
(137.9)
4.06
(103.1)
3.97
(100.8)
8.44
(214.4)
13.68
(347.5)
4.73
(120.1)
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.4)
0.86
(21.8)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
V4-T2-96 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-97
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-98
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Overview
Power demand continues
to grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and
large facility transformers
are installed. The increased
capacity of the electrical
source results in increased
fault currents in excess
of 100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
manufactures non-fused
current limiting modules with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at
690 Vac. Unlike fused current
limiters with a one-time use,
a current limiter module
provides an automatic reset
of the module after a short-
circuit event. Resetting the
molded-case circuit breaker is
the only action required to
restore critical power to the
system; there is no time
wasted with sourcing the
correct replacement fuses
or module to bring system
back online.
Product Description
The current limiting breaker
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
system protection similar to
that of the circuit breaker.
When high short-circuit
current is flowing through the
contacts of these modules,
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
improved current limiting
characteristics.
Application Description
High-performance breakers
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
are available and with
applications where the
current limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
load to limit current. Typical
loads include lighting, power
distribution, and motor
control applications.
Features and Benefits
Superior system protection:
●Auto reset improves
system uptime and
eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
●No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
ownership and the waste
created by fuses
●Overloads, by using inverse
time current tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
●Low-level short circuits, by
using instantaneous and/or
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
●High-level short circuits, by
using ultra-high-speed,
blow-apart contacts of the
current limiting module in
series with the circuit
breaker contacts
●Let-through currents, by
improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
the system
Standards and Certifications
●IEC 60947-2
●UL 489
●CSA C22.2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-97
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
Series G High Performance Family Offering
EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
Notes
1 600Y/347V.
2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker
(2) load end of limiter.
Type Product Amperes
480 Vac
(UL)
600 Vac
(UL)
415 Vac (IEC) 690 Vac (IEC)
Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–125 100 35 1100 100 — —
With limiter 15–100 150 100 1150 150 — —
JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 70–250 200 50 200 200 18 14
With limiter 70–225 200 200 200 150 70 18
JG 3P electronic Breaker only 20–250 200 50 200 200 18 14
With limiter 100–250 200 200 200 150 70 18
LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 250–600 200 65 200 200 35 18
LG3P electronic Breaker only 100–600 200 65 200 200 35 18
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated)
Base Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Breaker with
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations Included 2
Interphase Barrier
Included for Limiter
EGC3015FFG EGC3015FFGQ01 EGC3015FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3016FFG EGC3016FFGQ01 EGC3016FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3020FFG EGC3020FFGQ01 EGC3020FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3025FFG EGC3025FFGQ01 EGC3025FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3030FFG EGC3030FFGQ01 EGC3030FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3032FFG EGC3032FFGQ01 EGC3032FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3035FFG EGC3035FFGQ01 EGC3035FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3040FFG EGC3040FFGQ01 EGC3040FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3045FFG EGC3045FFGQ01 EGC3045FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3050FFG EGC3050FFGQ01 EGC3050FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3060FFG EGC3060FFGQ01 EGC3060FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3063FFG EGC3063FFGQ01 EGC3063FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3070FFG EGC3070FFGQ01 EGC3070FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3080FFG EGC3080FFGQ01 EGC3080FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3090FFG EGC3090FFGQ01 EGC3090FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EGC3100FFG EGC3100FFGQ01 EGC3100FFGQ02 T125EF EIPBSK
EG-Frame
V4-T2-98 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg)
EG 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 2.91 (1.32)
HMCP 9.66 (245.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.98 (75.8) 4.18 (1.90)
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
0.56
(14.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
3.20
(81.3)
4.17
(105.9)
2.75
(69.9)
0.09
(2.3)
0.78
(19.8)
0.41
(10.4)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-99
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac
Series G HMCP
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK.
2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above.
Ampere
Rating
Magnetic
Range
UL Listed, IEC Rated
Breaker With Line Side
Mounted Current Limiter 1
UL Listed, IEC Rated
Breaker With Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter 2
IEC Rated Breaker
With Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter 1
IEC Rated Breaker
With Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter 2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
70 350–700 JGH3070FAGQ01 JGH3070FAGQ02 ——
90 450–900 JGH3090FAGQ01 JGH3090FAGQ02 ——
100 500–1000 JGH3100FAGQ01 JGH3100FAGQ02 JGH3100AAGQ01 JGH3100AAGQ02
125 625–1250 JGH3125FAGQ01 JGH3125FAGQ02 JGH3125AAGQ01 JGH3125AAGQ02
150 750–1550 JGH3150FAGQ01 JGH3150FAGQ02 ——
160 800–1600 — — JGH3160AAGQ01 JGH3160AAGQ02
175 875–1750 JGH3175FAGQ01 JGH3175FAGQ02 ——
200 1000–2000 JGH3200FAGQ01 JGH3200FAGQ02 JGH3200AAGQ01 JGH3200AAGQ02
225 1125–2250 JGH3225FAGQ01 JGH3225FAGQ02 ——
Electronic Trip LS
250 — JGH325033GQ01 JGH325033GQ02 ——
Electronic Trip LSI
250 — JGH325032GQ01 JGH325032GQ02 ——
Electronic Trip LSG
250 — JGH325035GQ01 JGH325035GQ02 ——
Electronic Trip LSIG
250 — JGH325036GQ01 JGH325036GQ02 ——
Ampere
Rating
Motor Circuit Protector with
Line Side Mounted Current Limiter
Breaker with Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter
250 HMCPJ250D5LQ01 HMCPJ250D5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250F5LQ01 HMCPJ250F5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250G5LQ01 HMCPJ250G5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250J5LQ01 HMCPJ250J5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250K5LQ01 HMCPJ250K5LQ02
250 HMCPJ250L5LQ01 HMCPJ250L5LQ02
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range/ Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 3
JG Frame
V4-T2-100 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg)
JG + limiter 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48)
HMCP 13.06 (331.7) 4.13 (104.9) 3.44 (87.4) 9.87 (4.48)
3.34
(84.8)
3.44
(87.4)
4.41
(112.0)
4.12
(104.6)
4.13
(104.9)
13.06
(331.7)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-101
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-102
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-103
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-103
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2 -111
Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
Product Description
Eaton’s Electrical Sector
introduces new high-magnetic
withstand molded case circuit
breakers, specifically designed
for critical operations and
selective coordination
requirements. The high-
magnetic withstand LHH
and NHH frames continue
the legacy of circuit breaker
innovation for which Eaton
is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH
breakers are equipped with
125 to 400 ampere trip units
with high-magnetic capability.
This design enables the
breakers to withstand up
to 90 times rated current
before opening under short-
circuit conditions.
The LHH and NHH circuit
breakers incorporate a higher
level of instantaneous pickup,
thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective
coordination. Standard
molded case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a
magnetic pickup or electronic
instantaneous adjustment or
instantaneous override set at
10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.
Features, Benefits and
Functions
Eaton’s new LHH and NHH
molded case circuit breakers
are furnished with a higher
level of magnetic pickup or
electronic instantaneous
settings as indicated in
table on Page V4-T2-103.
These higher levels of
magnetic pickup and
electronic instantaneous
values in turn allow the
system designer to obtain
selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these
higher ratings. Greater values
of selective coordination are
available based on
manufacturer tested
combinations using the LHH
and NHH as line-side
breakers and standard
breakers as load-side devices.
Refer to IA01200002E to
determine the maximum
fault values that selective
coordination achieves. When
the line-side and load-side
molded case circuit breaker
trip ratings are chosen to
coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be
selectively coordinated in
the fault range up to the
values listed in the table on
Page V4-T2-103
or
IA01200002E.
For
overcurrents protected
by circuit breakers on the
load-side of the LHH or NHH,
only the effected load-side
circuit breaker will open,
while the line-side LHH and/
or NHH circuit breakers
remain closed, thus providing
continuity of power to the
other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit
breakers.
Benefits of Using the LHH
and NHH Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
Customer expectations and
codes are driving product
development to protect
customers’ critical
operations. NEC® 2005 and
2008 requires circuits with
elevators, emergency
systems, legally required
standby systems, health care
essential systems and critical
operation power systems to
be selectively coordinated.
Simply stated, only the
closest protective device
directly protecting the
circuit having an overcurrent
(overload or fault) condition
should open.
All other overcurrent
protective devices within
these systems shall remain
closed. Similarly, backup
power system designs of
a critical nature that are not
code mandated may also
require overcurrent protective
devices to be selectively
coordinated as much as
practicable to provide a higher
level of uptime.
V4-T2-102 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Proven Technology
and Performance
The LHH is based on the
Series G L-Frame circuit
breaker, sharing the same
small footprint and field-fit
accessories as the L-Frame
breaker. The NHH is based
on the Series G N-Frame
circuit breaker and shares
the same footprint and
accessories as the N-Frame
breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
The LHH incorporates a
thermal-magnetic trip unit
with fixed thermal and
fixed magnetic settings.
The NHH has an OPTIM™
electronic trip unit with
LSI adjustment capabilities.
The instantaneous setting is
adjustable from 1000–4000 A
or may be turned off to
default to the frame override
of 14,000 A. A hand-held
OPTIMizer must be used
with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and
instantaneous, however,
the long delay pickup is fixed
and cannot be adjusted.
The LHH and NHH
breakers are available in
Eaton’s panelboards and
switchboards.
Standards and Certifications
●UL
●CSA
Product Selection
LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
LSI Electronic
Trip Unit
Ampere
Rating LHH Frame NHH Frame
125 LHH3125FFG —
150 LHH3150FFG NHH3150T52X15
175 LHH3175FFG NHH3175T52X15
200 LHH3200FFG NHH3200T52X15
225 LHH3225FFG NHH3225T52X15
250 LHH3250FFG NHH3250T52X15
300 LHH3300FFG NHH3300T52X15
350 LHH3350FFG NHH3350T52X15
400 LHH3400FFG —
LHH
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-103
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
●Three-pole
●65 kAIC at 480 Vac
●125–400 ampere LHH
●150–350 ampere NHH
●Trip units:
●LHH—thermal-magnetic
●NHH—LSI electronic trip unit
●No rating plugs required
●Factory-sealed breakers
●LHH uses same internal and external accessories
as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker
●NHH uses same internal and external accessories
as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
Continuous Current Ratings
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Dimensions
L-Frame
N-Frame
Breaker Type
Description LHH NHH
Max. rated current (amperes) 400 350
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac 100 100
480 Vac 65 65
600 Vac 35 35
250 Vac 42 —
IEC 60947-2
220 Vac 100 100
415 Vac 70 70
690 Vac 25 25
125/250 Vdc 22 —
Number of poles 3 3
Ampere range 125–400 A 150–350 A
Continuous
Current
Rating (Ir)
Magnetic
Trip Point
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Instantaneous
Trip Point
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Short Delay
Pickup
125 A 2500 A 20x — — —
150 A 2500 A 16x 14,000 A 93x 225–1200 A
175 A 4000 A 22x 14,000 A 80x 260–1400 A
200 A 4000 A 20x 14,000 A 70x 300–1600 A
225 A 6000 A 26x 14,000 A 62x 338–1800 A
250 A 6000 A 24x 14,000 A 56x 375–2000 A
300 A 6000 A 20x 14,000 A 47x 450–2400 A
350 A 6000 A 17x 14,000 A 40x 525–2800 A
400 A 6000 A 15x — — —
Description Height Width Depth
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
LHH 10.13 (257.3) 5.48 (139.2) 4.09 (103.9) 12.36 (5.6)
NHH 16.00 (406.4) 8.25 (209.5) 5.50 (139.7) 46.80 (21.2)
5.58
(141.7) 10.13
(257.3)
4.06
(103.1)
5.48
(139.2)
1.92
(48.8)
2.43 (61.7)
3.16
(80.3)
R 0.25
(6.4)
2.00
(50.8)
2.69
(68.3) 5.38
(136.7)
Breaker
Three-Pole
C
L
Front Cover Cutout
3.44
(87.4)
1.91
(48.5)
1.50
(38.1)
6.38
(162.1)
3.19
(81.0)
Breaker
R 0.25
(6.4)
3.68
(93.5)
9.25
(235.0)
Front View Three-Pole
8.25
(209.6)
C
L
16.00
(406.4)
Side View
5.50
(139.7)
V4-T2-104 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-106
External Accessories and Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-107
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-109
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Special Features and Accessories
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection for
low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA as, “... a device for
closing and interrupting a
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of
insulating material.” The
National Electrical Code
(NEC) describes them as, “A
device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-
automatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
So designed, Eaton circuit
breakers protect conductors
against overloads and
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against
short circuits.
In low voltage distribution
systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
case circuit breakers.
Eaton offers the most
comprehensive family of
molded case circuit breakers
in the industry.
This section of circuit
breakers includes:
●Thermal-magnetic trip
breakers
●Electronic rms trip
breakers
●Molded case switches
●Motor circuit protectors
●Current limiting breakers
●Special application
breakers
Modified Breakers
Eaton breakers can be ordered
with internal accessories
installed. These modified
breakers will be subject to an
addition charge.
Special Calibration
Special non-UL listed
calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
other than 40 °C and for
frequencies other than
50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced
interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications.
●Add suffix H01 to
breaker catalog number
for 400 Hz rating
50 ºC Calibration
Note: Breakers equipped with
electronic trip units can operate
reliably in ambient temperatures
of 50 °C. Add suffix “V3” to NG
MCCBs to remove standard
40 °C labeling.
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete thermal
magnetic breaker when
ordering listed ampere ratings
for breakers to be used in
50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC
ambient MCCBs are not
UL listed.
Contact Eaton for availability.
Calibrations and Treatment
Description
Frame
EG JG LG NG RG
Special
calibration
■■■■ ■
Moisture-
fungus
treatment
■■■■ ■
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-105
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
All Eaton circuit breaker cases
are molded from glass-
polyester, which does not
support the growth of fungus.
Any parts that are susceptible
to the growth of fungus will
require special treatment.
Order by description.
●Add suffix J01 to breaker
catalog number
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers may be
ordered with freeze testing.
This option uses special
lubrication and mechanical
operation is verified at –40 °C.
●Add suffix F01 to catalog
number –57 °F, F02 –30 °F
Marine Applications
E- to R-Framed circuit
breakers can be supplied to
meet the following marine
specifications:
●U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46;
ABS—American Bureau of
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV;
and Lloyds
These specifications
generally require molded
case circuit breakers to be
supplied with 50 °C ambient,
and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are
used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
applications).
Circuit breakers can also be
supplied to meet UL 489
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
(Naval Use).
UL 489 Supplement SA
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8m) in length.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or
terminals. (No 50 °C.)
●Add suffix H08
Or you can choose to add
50ºC ambient but then there
is no “UL” mark.
●Add suffix VH08
UL 489 Supplement SB
requires partial 50 °C ambient
calibration, vibration testing,
special nameplating and no
use of aluminum conductors
or terminals. Eaton chooses
to always fully calibrate to 50
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
per UL but no “UL” mark due
to 50 °C label.)
●Add suffix VH09
Certified Test Reports
Eaton breakers can be
ordered with certified test
reports at the time of order
entry. Test report documents
the thermal and magnetic or
electronic tripping
characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker
and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
on order for certified test
report.
Standards and Certifications
Molded case circuit breakers
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
●Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit
breaker enclosures
●National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Standards
Publication No. AB1-1993,
molded case circuit
breakers
●Australian Standard AS
2184, molded case circuit
breakers
●British Standards Institution
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control
gear Part 1: circuit breakers
●Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Standard
C22.2 No. 5, service
entrance and branch circuit
breakers
●International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
●Japanese T-Mark Standard
molded case circuit
breakers
●South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SABS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
●Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
●Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control gear
circuit breaker
requirements
●Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
Specification Classification
W-C-375b requirements for
the particular class associated
with the circuit breaker frame
being considered.
Open breakers do not have
service entrance ratings.
Service entrance rating is part
of the enclosure.
V4-T2-106 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Internal Accessories
Alarm Lockout
The alarm switches operate
when the circuit breaker is
tripped by a short circuit or
overcurrent, but also when it
is tripped by a shunt trip or
undervoltage release.
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary switches are used
for signaling and control
purposes. The various
functions of the auxiliary
switches (changeover) are
shown on Page V4-T2-108.
Shunt Trips
The shunt trip is used for
remote tripping.
The coil of the shunt trip is
rated only for short-time
operation.
It is not permissible with
the circuit breaker open to
apply a continuous opening
command to the shunt trip in
order to prevent the breaker
from closing. This means
that interlocking circuits with
continuous commands
may not be set up with
shunt trips.
Undervoltage Releases
The circuit breaker cannot be
closed until the undervoltage
release is energized. If the
release is not energized, the
circuit breaker can only
perform an idle switching
operation.
Frequent idle switching
actions should be avoided as
they shorten the endurance
of the circuit breaker.
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Cause of Trip Display/Remote
Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display
can be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
screen, such as cause of
trip, phrase current, ground
current and low loads.
The display is ideal for
troubleshooting common
trips such as ground
fault, long delay, and
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
that is contained inside the
enclosure.
The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA
3R rated.
Cause of Trip Display/
Remote Mount Cause of
Trip Display
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
Cause of Trip LED Module
Electronic Portable Test Kit
The electronic portable test
kit provides a means to
complete field tests using
secondary injection on all
310+ trip units. The same
test kit is also capable of
secondary injection testing on
Magnum and Series NRX low
voltage power circuit
breakers' 520 and 1150
trip units.
Electronic Portable Test Kit
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to
secure the cover of the trip
unit to prevent adjustments
after settings are confirmed.
Wire Seal
Catalog
Number
DIGIVIEW
DIGIVIEWR06
Catalog
Number
TRIP-LED
Catalog
Number
MTST230V
Catalog
Number
5108A03H01
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-107
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
External Accessories and Test Kit
External Accessories
Notes
1Provision only.
2See Page V4-T2-314 for bolt projection dimensions.
3Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm.
4Requires two breakers.
5Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004.
6D = Imperial threads UL, W = metric threads IEC, L = long studs, S = short studs.
Description
Fit
Type
Frame
EG JG LG NG RG
Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB — — LKD4 —
Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB — — — —
Padlockable handle block
off-only
Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF — —
Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPLK FJPHL LPHL PLK5 HLK6
Padlockable handle lock hasp
off-only
Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF PLK55OFF HLK6OFF
Kirk key interlock kit 12 Field — KYKJG KYKLG KYK4 KYK6
Castell key interlock kit 23 Field — CTKJG CTKLG CTK4 CTK6
Slide bar interlock 4Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI SBK5 —
Walking beam interlock 4Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI WBL5 WBL6
Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI WBL5 —
Electrical operator 5120 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T07 EOP6T08K
240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C EOP5T11 EOP6T11K
24 Vdc MOPEG48D MOPJG24D MOPLG24D EOP5T21 —
48 Vdc MOPEG48D — — EOP5T22 EOP6T21K
125 Vdc MOPEG120C MOPJG120C MOPLG120C EOP5T26 —
220 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — —
250 Vdc — MOPJG240C MOPLG240C — —
Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L PAD53 —
Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L — —
Rear connecting studs 6Field EFRCSDL FJRCSDL LRCS3WK (3P) — —
EFRCSDS FJRCSDS LRCS4WK (4P) — —
EFRCSWL FJRCSWL — — —
EFRCSWS FJRCSWS — — —
V4-T2-108 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessory Configurations
Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a
Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker
¨
≠
¡
¡
¡
¡
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¬= For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only
¬
¬
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-109
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers
Alarm Lockout
Auxiliary Switch
Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout
Shunt Trip—Standard
Notes
1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK.
3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK.
4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.
5 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module.
6 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
Make/Break Left — A1L5LPK —
Right ALM1M1BEPK 2A1L5RPK A1L6RPK
2 Make/2 Break Left — A2L5LPK —
Right ALM2M2BEPK 3A2L5RPK A2L6RPK
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
1A, 1B Left — A1X5PK —
Right AUX1A1BPK A1X5PK —
2A, 2B Left — A2X5PK —
Right AUX2A2BPK A2X5PK A2X6RPK
3A, 3B Left — A3X5LPK —
Right — A3X5RPK —
4A, 4B Left ———
Right — — A4X6RPK
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
—Left — AA115LPK —
Right AUXALRMEPK 4AA115RPK —
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG 5NG RG 1
48–60 Vac Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP05K —
Right — — SNT6P05K
110–240 Vac Left SNT120CPK SNT5LP11K —
Right — — SNT6P11K
380–600 Vac Left SNT480CPK 6——
Right ———
220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac —SNT5LP14K SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac —SNT5LP18K SNT6P18K
12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK — —
Right ———
24 Vac/dc Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP03K —
Right — — SNT6P03K
48–60 Vdc Left SNT060CPK SNT5LP23K —
Right —— SNT6P23K
110–125 Vdc Left SNT125DPK SNT5LP26K —
Right — — SNT6P26K
250 Vdc Left SNT250DPK — —
Right ———
Shunt Trip—Standard
ST
a
V4-T2-110 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Shunt Trip—Low Energy
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
224 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac.
3LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module.
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG NG RG 1
—Left — LST5LPK —
Right — — LST6RPK
Pole
Location
Frame
Description EG, JG and LG 3NG RG 1
110–127 Vac Left UVR120APK UVH5LP08K —
Right — — UVH6RP08K
208–240 Vac Left UVR240APK UVH5LP11K —
Right — — UVH6RP11K
24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK UVH5LP21K 2—
Right — — UVH6RP21K 2
24 Vac Left UVR024APK UVH5LP21K 2—
Right — — UVH6RP21K 2
48–60 Vdc Left UVR048DPK UVH5LP23K —
Right — — UVH6RP23K
48–60 Vac Left UVR048APK UVH5LP05K —
Right — — UVH6RP05K
120 Vdc Left UVR125DPK UVH5LP26K —
Right — — UVH6RP26K
220–250 Vdc Left UVR250DPK UVH5LP28K —
Right — — UVH6RP28K
380–500 Vac Left UVR480APK UVH5LP29K —
Right — — UVH6RP29K
525–600 Vac Left UVR600APK — —
Right ———
12 Vdc Left —UVH5LP20K —
Right — — UVH6RP20K
12 Vac Left —UVH5LP02K —
Right — — UVH6RP02K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-111
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Series G Motor Operators
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-112
Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Motor Operators
Product Description
Eaton’s motor operator
mechanism enables local and
remote ON, OFF and reset
switching of a circuit breaker.
The motor operator is
mounted on the circuit
breaker cover within
the dimensions of the
circuit breaker.
The robust motor operators
offer various voltages to
maximize customer flexibility.
Standard load transfer
switching can be
accomplished through the
use of two circuit breakers
fitted with motor operators
and a mechanical interlock.
V4-T2-112 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Features, Benefits and Functions
The motor operator provides
special features for ease of
customer use and status
indication.
●The motor operator allows
the circuit breaker to be
opened, closed or reset
remotely
●The motor operator
contains a motor
connected to a cam drive
mechanism. The cam
drives a slide mechanism
to operate the circuit
breaker handle
●Internal limit switches and
relays are used to control
motor operation to prevent
overdriving the circuit
breaker handle and motor
overload conditions
●A key is provided to
manually operate the
circuit breaker
●A special pull-out locking
mechanism provides a
method for padlocking the
circuit breaker handle in
the OFF position
●The locking device will
accept three padlock
shackles with a maximum
diameter of 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) each
●The cover provides visual
status of the circuit
breaker: ON, OFF or
TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP
button allows the user to
manually trip the breaker
Standards and Certifications
The motor operators are UL
and CSA listed, and CE
marked.
Turn the Key
(clockwise only)
Manual Operating Key
Circuit Breaker
Status Indication
Window
PUSH-TO-TRIP Button
Product Selection
Motor Operators
Frame Voltage Frequency Inrush Current Catalog Number
Series G E-Frame 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPEG240C
100–220 Vdc DC 1A MOPEG240C
24/48 Vdc DC 3A MOPEG48D
Series C F-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD240C
110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPFD120C
220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD240C
110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPFD120C
24 Vdc DC 3A MOPFD24D
Series G J-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG240C
110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 1A MOPJG120C
220–250 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG240C
110–125 Vdc DC 1A MOPJG120C
24 Vdc DC 3A MOPJG24D
Series G L-Frame 208–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG240C
110–127 Vac 50/60 Hz 2A MOPLG120C
220–250 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG240C
110–125 Vdc DC 2A MOPLG120C
24 Vdc DC 6A MOPLG24D
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-113
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG Breaker with Plug-In Block
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-114
Plug-In Blocks
Product Description
Plug-in adapters simplify
installation and front removal
of circuit breakers. Plug-ins
are available for rear
connection applications on
three- and four-pole circuit
breakers. Trip on drawout
interlock kits are included.
Stabs for EG, JG and LG plug-
ins rotate 90 ° for flexible
installation. Use terminal
shields for IP30 protection.
Product Selection
Plug-In Blocks
Note
1Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block.
Breaker
Frame
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks
EG 3 PAD3E
EG 4 PAD4E
JG 3 PAD3J
JG 4 PAD4J
LG 3 PAD3L
LG 4 PAD4L
Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1
EG 3, 4 PIILEG
JG 3, 4 PIILJG
LG 3, 4 PIILLG
Terminal Shields IP30
EG 3 EFTS3K
EG 4 EFTS4K
JG 3 FJTS3K
JG 4 FJTS4K
LG 3 LTS3K
LG 4 LTS4K
Position Switch
EG 3, 4 PADILE
JG 3, 4 PADILJ
LG 3, 4 PADILL
V4-T2-114 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Drawout Cassettes
Contents
Description Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-15
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-29
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-47
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-65
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-74
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-85
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-89
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . V4-T2-92
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . V4-T2-96
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-101
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-104
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-111
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-113
Drawout Cassette
Drawout Cassette
Product Description
The drawout cassette is
available for use with JG, LG
and NG, three- and four-pole
breakers. The cassettes
consist of two separate
components: the movable
mechanism, which attaches
to the breaker, and the
stationary mechanism, which
houses in the cassette. For
the JG, LG and NG drawout
cassettes, all necessary parts
for installation are included in
the one catalog number.
Features
Features of the drawout
cassettes for the JG, LG and
NG include:
●Trip on drawout—breaker
will trip if it is in the ON
position when withdrawn
from the cassette
●Secondary terminal block—
the drawout cassettes
include a secondary
terminal block for easier
access when wiring low
voltage accessories,
including shunts and
undervoltage releases
The drawout mechanism has
three primary positions:
●Connected—the breaker is
fully connected to the
primary stabs and
secondary contacts
●Disconnected—both the
primary stabs and the
secondary contacts are
disconnected
●Withdraw—the breaker
can be removed from the
cassette
Product Selection
JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes
Breaker Frame
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
JG 3 JG3DOM
4JG4DOM
LG 3 LG3DOM
4LG4DOM
NG 3 NG3DOM
4NG4DOM
JG Drawout Cassette
LG Drawout Cassette
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
Contents
Description Page
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
Product Overview
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection for
low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA as, “... a device for
closing and interrupting a
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of
insulating material.” The
National Electrical Code
(NEC) describes them as, “A
device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-
automatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
So designed, Eaton circuit
breakers protect conductors
against overloads and
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against
short circuits.
In low voltage distribution
systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
case circuit breakers.
Eaton offers the most
comprehensive family of
molded case circuit breakers
in the industry.
This section of circuit breakers
includes:
●Thermal-magnetic trip
breakers
●Electronic rms trip
breakers
●Molded case switches
●Motor circuit protectors
●Current limiting breakers
●Special application
breakers
Modified Breakers
Eaton breakers can be ordered
with internal accessories
installed. These modified
breakers will be subject to an
addition charge.
Special Calibration
Special non-UL-listed
calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
other than 40 °C and for
frequencies other than 50/60
Hz or DC. Reduced
interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications.
50 °C Calibration
Add suffix V to catalog
Number for complete
breaker, listed above, when
ordering listed ampere ratings
for breakers to be used in 50
°C ambients. (No price
adder.) (No UL label.)
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
All circuit breaker cases are
molded from glass-polyester
which does not support the
growth of fungus. Any parts
which are susceptible to the
growth of fungus will require
special treatment.
Freeze-Tested Circuit
Breakers
The circuit breakers may be
ordered with freeze testing.
This option uses special
lubrication and mechanical
operation is verified at –40 °C.
Marine Applications
E- to R-Framed circuit
breakers can be supplied to
meet the following marine
specifications:
●U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46;
ABS—American Bureau of
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV;
Lloyds; and ABS/NVR
These specifications
generally require molded
case circuit breakers to be
supplied with 50 °C ambient,
and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are
used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
applications).
Circuit breakers can also be
supplied to meet UL 489
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
(Naval Use).
UL 489 Supplement SA
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8 m) in length.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or
terminals. (No 50 °C.)
●Suffix H08
Or you can choose to add 50
°C ambient but then there is
no “UL” mark.
●Suffix VH08
UL 489 Supplement SB
requires partial 50 °C ambient
calibration, vibration testing,
special nameplating and no
use of aluminum conductors
or terminals. Eaton chooses
to always fully calibrate to 50
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
per UL, and UL now allows
50 °C label here.)
●Suffix VH09
V4-T2-116 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Certified Test Reports
Eaton breakers can be
ordered with certified test
reports at the time of order
entry. Test report documents
the thermal and magnetic or
electronic tripping
characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker
and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
on order for certified test
report.
Standards and Certifications
Molded case circuit breakers
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
●Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit
breaker enclosures
●National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Standards
Publication No. AB1-1993,
molded case circuit
breakers
●Australian Standard AS
2184, molded case circuit
breakers
●British Standards Institution
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control
gear Part 1: circuit breakers
●Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Standard
C22.2 No. 5, service
entrance and branch circuit
breakers
●International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
●Japanese T-Mark Standard
molded case circuit
breakers
●South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SABS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
●Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
●Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control gear
circuit breaker
requirements
●Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
Specification Classification
W-C-375b requirements for
the particular class associated
with the circuit breaker frame
being considered.
Open breakers do not have
service entrance ratings.
Service entrance rating is part
of the enclosure.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-117
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Quick Reference
Industrial Circuit Breakers
G-Frame
Notes
1N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3Maximum 70 A for 124 Vdc rating.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
GHB 15–100 31 120 125 N.I.T.U. 11a 65 — ————14—V4-T2-125
GHB 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b — — 65 ————14V4-T2-125
GHB 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12b, 14b — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-125
GHB 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 15b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-125
HGHB 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a, 13b 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-125
GHQ 15–20 1 277 — N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 14 ————V4-T2-125
GHBS 15–30 1, 2 480Y/277 — — — 65 65 —14 ————V4-T1-34
GBHS 15–20 1, 2 600Y/347 — N.I.T.U. — — — ———10——V4-T1-34
GDB 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-123
GDB 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. — — — — — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-123
GD 15–50 2 480 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-122
GD 15–100 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 — 22 — — 10 V4-T2-122
GHC 15–100 1 120 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a 65 — ————14 —V4-T2-130
GHC 15–100 2, 3 240 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 65 ———1 V4-T2-130
GHC 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 12c, 13a — — — 14 — — 14 — V4-T2-130
GHC 15–100 2, 3 480Y/277 125/250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — — 14 14 — — 14 V4-T2-130
HGHC 15–30 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. — 65 — — 25 — — 14 — V4-T2-130
V4-T2-118 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame
Notes
1N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3Not defined in W-C-375b.
4Current limiting.
5Check with Eaton for availability.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
EDB 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 22 ———10—V4-T2-134
EDS 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. — — — 42 ———10—V4-T2-134
ED 15–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 12b — — 65 ———10—V4-T2-134
EDH 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 100 ———10 —V4-T2-134
EDC 100–225 2, 3 240 125 N.I.T.U. 1 — — 200 ———10 —V4-T2-134
EHD 15–100 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 14 — — 10 — V4-T2-134
EHD 15–100 2, 3 480 250 N.I.T.U. 13b — — 18 — 14 — — 10 V4-T2-134
FDB 15–150 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 18a — — 18 — 14 14 — 10 V4-T2-134
FDB 15–150 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3—— 18—1414—10V4-T2-134
FD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 35 — — 10 — V4-T2-134
FD 15–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-134
FD 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3—— 65—3518—10V4-T2-134
FDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 65 — 35 18 — — V4-T2-134
HFD 15–150 1 277 125 N.I.T.U. 13a — — — 65 — — 10 — V4-T2-134
HFD 15–225 2,3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-134
HFD 15–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3— — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-134
HFDE 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 100 — 65 25 — — V4-T2-134
FDC 415–225 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 24a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-134
FDC 415–225 4 600 250 N.I.T.U. 3— — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-134
FDCE 45 15–225 3 600 — N.I.T.U. — — — 200 — 100 25 — — V4-T2-134
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-119
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame
K-Frame
L-Frame
M-Frame
Notes
1N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3Current limiting.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of
Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
JDB 70–250 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-154
JD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 65 — 35 18 — 10 V4-T2-153
HJD 70–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 100 — 65 25 — 22 V4-T2-153
JDC 370–250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 22a — — 200 — 100 35 — 22 V4-T2-153
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of
Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
DK 250–400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T.U. 14b — — 65 — — — — 10 V4-T2-165
KDB 100–400 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-165
KD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 10 V4-T2-162, V4-T2-163,
V4-T2-167, V4-T2-170
CKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-164, V4-T2-173,
V4-T2-175
HKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 22 V4-T2-162, V4-T2-163,
V4-T2-167, V4-T2-170
CHKD 100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-164, V4-T2-173,
V4-T2-175
KDC 3100–400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 65 — 22 V4-T2-162, V4-T2-163,
V4-T2-167, V4-T2-170
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of
Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
LDB 300–600 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-188
LD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — 22 V4-T2-186, V4-T2-187,
V4-T2-192
CLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 35 25 — — V4-T2-188, V4-T2-198
HLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-186, V4-T2-187,
V4-T2-192
CHLD 300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-188, V4-T2-198
LDC 3300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-186, V4-T2-187,
V4-T2-194
CLDC 3300–600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 200 — 100 50 — 30 V4-T2-188, V4-T2-200
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
Volts
Type
of
Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Page
NumberAC DC
AC (kA) DC (kA) 2
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250
MDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — 22 V4-T2-211, V4-T2-213
CMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 65 — 50 25 — — V4-T2-213
HMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — 25 V4-T2-211, V4-T2-213
CHMDL 300–800 2, 3 600 250 I.T.U. 23a — — 100 — 65 35 — — V4-T2-213
V4-T2-120 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-121
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
Product Description
●All two- and three-pole
circuit breakers are of the
common trip type. On all
three-phase delta (240 V)
Grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
●Single-pole circuit
breakers, 15 and 20
amperes. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for
fluorescent lighting
applications
●All G-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
●HACR rated
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-121
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Terminal Types
For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below.
Terminal Types
Notes
1HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20 A circuit breakers.
2Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
3Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
4Not UL listed sizes.
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
120 240 277 480 480Y/277 125 250 23
GDB 2, 3 — — — 14 — — 10
GD 2 — 65 — 14 — — 10
GD 3 — 65 — 22 — — 10
GHQ — 65 — 14 — — — —
GHB 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
GHB2, 3—65 ——1414—
HGHB 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —
GHC 1 65 — 14 — — 14 —
GHC2, 3—65 ——1414—
HGHC 1 65 — 25 — — 14 —
Number of Poles
1 = 1 pole
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
Circuit Breaker Type
GD
GDB
GHB
GHC
GHQ
HGHB
HGHC
GHBGFEP
GHCGFEP
Suffix
K= Molded case switch
D= Ring type terminals
C= Steel collars
V= 122 °F (50 °C)
J01= Fungus proofed
R01= Shock tested
F01= Freeze tester
HID= High intensity discharge 1
Trip Amperes
015
020
024
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
GD 3100 K
Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) 4
Standard
15–20 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al 14–10 2.5–4
25–100 Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10–1/0 4–50
Optional—GD Only
15–100 Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu 14–3 —
V4-T2-122 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes)
Product Description
●Cable in, cable out
●Includes mounting
hardware and BMHE
Standards and Certifications
●UL/CSA
Product Selection
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Includes Binding
Head Screws and Clamps
10–32 x 0.312
14 kAIC at 480 Vac 22 kAIC at 480 Vac
Includes Line and Load Terminals
Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 GD2015 GD3015 GD3015D
20 GD2020 GD3020 GD3020D
25 GD2025 GD3025 GD3025D
30 GD2030 GD3030 GD3030D
35 GD2035 GD3035 GD3035D
40 GD2040 GD3040 GD3040D
45 GD2045 GD3045 GD3045D
50 GD2050 GD3050 GD3050D
60 — GD3060 GD3060D
70 — GD3070 GD3070D
80 — GD3080 GD3080D
90 — GD3090 GD3090D
100 — GD3100 GD3100D
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-123
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Type GD Molded Case Switches
Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole
Notes
1Includes line and load steel terminals.
2Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312.
Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Includes Line and Load Terminals
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 GDB2015 GDB3015
20 GDB2020 GDB3020
25 GDB2025 GDB3025
30 GDB2030 GDB3030
35 GDB2035 GDB3035
40 GDB2040 GDB3040
45 GDB2045 GDB3045
50 GDB2050 GDB3050
60 — GDB3060
70 — GDB3070
80 — GDB3080
90 — GDB3090
100 — GDB3100
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalog Number
(Includes Line and Load Terminals)
60 GD3060K
60 GD3060KC 1
100 GD3100K
100 GD3100KD 2
V4-T2-124 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GD-Frame, Three-Pole
Off
3.00
(76.2)
4.88
(123.8)
2.63
(66.7)
Front View Side View
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-125
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical GHB
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
Standards and Certifications
These breakers meet the
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-375b as
follows:
●Type GHB, 120 and 240 V:
●Single-pole: Class 11a
●Two-, three-pole:
Classes 10b, 11b, 12b,
14b, 15b
●UL/CSA
●Type GHB, 277 and
480Y/277V:
●Single-pole:
Classes 12c, 13a
●Two-, three-pole:
Class 13b
●Type HGHB 277V
●Type GHQ 277V
V4-T2-126 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Type GHQ Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Notes
1 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V).
2 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
3 Use two outside poles.
4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals.
5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
7 Includes 4A33462H01 load clip.
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 2
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 3
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 GHB1015 45 GHB2015 4GHB3015 4
20 GHB1020 45 GHB2020 4GHB3020 4
25 GHB1025 GHB2025 GHB3025
30 GHB1030 GHB2030 GHB3030
35 GHB1035 GHB2035 GHB3035
40 GHB1040 GHB2040 GHB3040
45 GHB1045 GHB2045 GHB3045
50 GHB1050 GHB2050 GHB3050
60 GHB1060 GHB2060 GHB3060
70 GHB1070 GHB2070 GHB3070
80 GHB1080 GHB2080 GHB3080
90 GHB1090 GHB2090 GHB3090
100 GHB1100 GHB2100 GHB3100
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
Single-Pole
Catalog
Number
15 HGHB1015 6
20 HGHB1020 6
25 HGHB1025
30 HGHB1030
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum 14 kAIC, No DC Rating
(HID and SWD)
Single-Pole
Catalog
Number
15 GHQ1015 7
20 GHQ1020 7
Typical GHB
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-127
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GDB-Frame, Three-Pole
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
2.63
(66.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Front View
Side View
V4-T2-128 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Single-Phase (requires two poles)
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
Product Description
●15–60 amperes, 277 V,
50/60 Hz
●Operational voltage
240 V to 305 V
Standards and Certifications
These circuit breakers meet
the requirements of UL 489
and UL 1053.
Product Selection
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground
Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Technical Data and Specifications
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles)
277 Vac, 30 mA
Catalog
Number
15 GHBGFEP1015
20 GHBGFEP1020
30 GHBGFEP1030
40 GHBGFEP1040
50 GHBGFEP1050
60 GHBGFEP1060
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
GHBGFEP 1 14,000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-129
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GHB-Frame, Three-Pole
3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Front View
Side View
V4-T2-130 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical GHC
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
Product Description
●15–100 amperes
●120, 240, 277, 480Y/277V,
50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc
●Single-, two- and
three-pole
●Cable in, cable out
●Does not include mounting
hardware
Standards and Certifications
These breakers meet the
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-37b as
follows:
●Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/
277V:
●Single-pole:
Classes 12c, 13a
●Two-, three-pole:
Class 13b
●UL/CSA
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-131
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Notes
115 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
2Use two outside poles.
3Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals.
4Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
515 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 1
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 GHC1015 34 GHC2015 3GHC3015 3
20 GHC1020 34 GHC2020 3GHC3020 3
25 GHC1025 GHC2025 GHC3025
30 GHC1030 GHC2030 GHC3030
35 GHC1035 GHC2035 GHC3035
40 GHC1040 GHC2040 GHC3040
45 GHC1045 GHC2045 GHC3045
50 GHC1050 GHC2050 GHC3050
60 GHC1060 GHC2060 GHC3060
70 GHC1070 GHC2070 GHC3070
80 GHC1080 GHC2080 GHC3080
90 GHC1090 GHC2090 GHC3090
100 GHC1100 GHC2100 GHC3100
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
Single-Pole
Catalog
Number
15 HGHC1015 5
20 HGHC1020 5
25 HGHC1025
30 HGHC1030
V4-T2-132 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces)
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
Product Description
●15–60 amperes, 277 V,
50/60 Hz
●Operational voltage
240–305 V
Standards and Certifications
These circuit breakers meet
the requirements of UL 489
and UL 1053.
Product Selection
Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit
Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Technical Data and Specifications
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277V, 30 mA
Catalog
Number
15 GHCGFEP1015
20 GHCGFEP1020
30 GHCGFEP1030
40 GHCGFEP1040
50 GHCGFEP1050
60 GHCGFEP1060
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
GHCGFEP 1 14,000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-133
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Special Purpose Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Product Description
Eaton’s Type GHC circuit
breakers have binding head
screw-type terminals on line
and load side. These circuit
breakers with screw-type
terminals (0.190–32) will be
marked “Special purpose
breaker not for general use.”
To order this special breaker,
use the catalog number from
the tables on this page.
Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
Product Selection
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications
Note
1Use two outside poles.
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 1
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25 GHC1025D GHC2025D GHC3025D
30 GHC1030D GHC2030D GHC3030D
35 GHC1035D GHC2035D GHC3035D
40 GHC1040D GHC2040D GHC3040D
45 GHC1045D GHC2045D GHC3045D
50 GHC1050D GHC2050D GHC3050D
60 GHC1060D GHC2060D GHC3060D
70 GHC1070D GHC2070D GHC3070D
80 GHC1080D GHC2080D GHC3080D
90 GHC1090D GHC2090D GHC3090D
100 GHC1100D GHC2100D GHC3100D
Type
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum
Single-Pole
Catalog
Number
Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID
20 GHC1020HID
Bolt-on 15 GHB1015HID
20 GHB1020HID
V4-T2-134 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical F-Frame Breaker
F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-135
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-136
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-147
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-148
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-150
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
●All circuit breakers 10
through 30 amperes are
suitable for HID (high
intensity discharge) use
●All F-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-135
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
Trip Amperes
010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
Circuit Breaker
Type
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC
Number of
Poles
1 = 1 pole
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Suffix
E= 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole
EH = 50% protected (four-pole only)
K= High magnetic molded case switch
L= Line and load terminals
S= Stainless steel terminals
V= 50 °C calibration
W= Without terminals
Y= Line terminals only
Z= Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Type
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
Number of
Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
Trip
Amperes
100
125
150
175
200
225
Suffix
L= Line and load terminals
W= Without terminals
Y= Line terminals only
Z= Aluminum terminals (100 amperes)
FDC 3100 L
EDC 3200 L
Circuit Breaker
Type
FDE
HFDE
FDCE
Number of
Poles
3 = 3 poles
Suffix
ZG = Zone
selective
interlocking
Blank = No option
Trip Unit
33 = LS
32 = LSI
35 = LSG
36 = LSIG
Suffix
W= Without terminals
L= Line and load terminals
—= Load side terminals only
Blank = Load side terminals only
Trip
Amperes
80
160
225
FDE 3225 32 W
V4-T2-136 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
65 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 ED2015 ED3015
20 ED2020 ED3020
25 ED2025 ED3025
30 ED2030 ED3030
35 ED2035 ED3035
40 ED2040 ED3040
50 ED2050 ED3050
60 ED2060 ED3060
100 ED2100 ED3100
125 ED2125 ED3125
150 ED2150 ED3150
175 ED2175 ED3175
200 ED2200 ED3200
225 ED2225 ED3225
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
100 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 ——
20 ——
25 ——
30 ——
35 ——
40 ——
50 ——
60 ——
100 EDH2100 EDH3100
125 EDH2125 EDH3125
150 EDH2150 EDH3150
175 EDH2175 EDH3175
200 EDH2200 EDH3200
225 EDH2225 EDH3225
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-137
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
200 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 ——
20 ——
25 ——
30 ——
35 ——
40 ——
50 ——
60 ——
100 EDC2100 EDC3100
125 EDC2125 EDC3125
150 EDC2150 EDC3150
175 EDC2175 EDC3175
200 EDC2200 EDC3200
225 EDC2225 EDC3225
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
22 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100 EDB2100 EDB3100
110 EDB2110 EDB3110
125 EDB2125 EDB3125
150 EDB2150 EDB3150
175 EDB2175 EDB3175
200 EDB2200 EDB3200
225 EDB2225 EDB3225
V4-T2-138 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
Notes
1Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
42 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100 EDS2100 EDS3100
110 EDS2110 EDS3110
125 EDS2125 EDS3125
150 EDS2150 EDS3150
175 EDS2175 EDS3175
200 EDS2200 EDS3200
225 EDS2225 EDS3225
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 277 Vac 14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10 1EHD1010 EHD2010 EHD3010
15 EHD1015 2EHD2015 EHD3015
20 EHD1020 2EHD2020 EHD3020
25 EHD1025 EHD2025 EHD3025
30 EHD1030 EHD2030 EHD3030
35 EHD1035 EHD2035 EHD3035
40 EHD1040 EHD2040 EHD3040
45 EHD1045 EHD2045 EHD3045
50 EHD1050 EHD2050 EHD3050
60 EHD1060 EHD2060 EHD3060
70 EHD1070 EHD2070 EHD3070
80 EHD1080 EHD2080 EHD3080
90 EHD1090 EHD2090 EHD3090
100 EHD1100 EHD2100 EHD3100
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-139
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
Notes
1Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 600 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10 1FDB2010 FDB3010 FDB4010
15 FDB2015 FDB3015 FDB4015
20 FDB2020 FDB3020 FDB4020
25 FDB2025 FDB3025 FDB4025
30 FDB2030 FDB3030 FDB4030
35 FDB2035 FDB3035 FDB4035
40 FDB2040 FDB3040 FDB4040
45 FDB2045 FDB3045 FDB4045
50 FDB2050 FDB3050 FDB4050
60 FDB2060 FDB3060 FDB4060
70 FDB2070 FDB3070 FDB4070
80 FDB2080 FDB3080 FDB4080
90 FDB2090 FDB3090 FDB4090
100 FDB2100 FDB3100 FDB4100
110 FDB2110 FDB3110 FDB4110
125 FDB2125 FDB3125 FDB4125
150 FDB2150 FDB3150 FDB4150
V4-T2-140 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
Notes
1Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
35 kAIC at 277 Vac 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10 1FD1010 — — —
15 FD1015 2FD2015 FD3015 FD4015
20 FD1020 2FD2020 FD3020 FD4020
25 FD1025 FD2025 FD3025 FD4025
30 FD1030 FD2030 FD3030 FD4030
35 FD1035 FD2035 FD3035 FD4035
40 FD1040 FD2040 FD3040 FD4040
45 FD1045 FD2045 FD3045 FD4045
50 FD1050 FD2050 FD3050 FD4050
60 FD1060 FD2060 FD3060 FD4060
70 FD1070 FD2070 FD3070 FD4070
80 FD1080 FD2080 FD3080 FD4080
90 FD1090 FD2090 FD3090 FD4090
100 FD1100 FD2100 FD3100 FD4100
110 FD1110 FD2110 FD3110 FD4110
125 FD1125 FD2125 FD3125 FD4125
150 FD1150 FD2150 FD3150 FD4150
175 — FD2175 FD3175 FD4175
200 — FD2200 FD3200 FD4200
225 — FD2225 FD3225 FD4225
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-141
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
Note
1UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
65 kAIC at 277 Vac 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 HFD1015 1HFD2015 HFD3015 HFD4015
20 HFD1020 1HFD2020 HFD3020 HFD4020
25 HFD1025 HFD2025 HFD3025 HFD4025
30 HFD1030 HFD2030 HFD3030 HFD4030
35 HFD1035 HFD2035 HFD3035 HFD4035
40 HFD1040 HFD2040 HFD3040 HFD4040
45 HFD1045 HFD2045 HFD3045 HFD4045
50 HFD1050 HFD2050 HFD3050 HFD4050
60 HFD1060 HFD2060 HFD3060 HFD4060
70 HFD1070 HFD2070 HFD3070 HFD4070
80 HFD1080 HFD2080 HFD3080 HFD4080
90 HFD1090 HFD2090 HFD3090 HFD4090
100 HFD1100 HFD2100 HFD3100 HFD4100
110 HFD1110 HFD2110 HFD3110 HFD4110
125 HFD1125 HFD2125 HFD3125 HFD4125
150 HFD1150 HFD2150 HFD3150 HFD4150
175 — HFD2175 HFD3175 HFD4175
200 — HFD2200 HFD3200 HFD4200
225 — HFD2225 HFD3225 HFD4225
V4-T2-142 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 FDC2015 FDC3015 FDC4015
20 FDC2020 FDC3020 FDC4020
25 FDC2025 FDC3025 FDC4025
30 FDC2030 FDC3030 FDC4030
35 FDC2035 FDC3035 FDC4035
40 FDC2040 FDC3040 FDC4040
45 FDC2045 FDC3045 FDC4045
50 FDC2050 FDC3050 FDC4050
60 FDC2060 FDC3060 FDC4060
70 FDC2070 FDC3070 FDC4070
80 FDC2080 FDC3080 FDC4080
90 FDC2090 FDC3090 FDC4090
100 FDC2100 FDC3100 FDC4100
110 FDC2110 FDC3110 FDC4110
125 FDC2125 FDC3125 FDC4125
150 FDC215 FDC3150 FDC4150
175 FDC2175 FDC3175 FDC4175
200 FDC2200 FDC3200 FDC4200
225 FDC2225 FDC3225 FDC4225
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-143
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-149.
FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective
Interlocking
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Neutral
CT for LSG
and LSIG
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup and Delay
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
IC Rating 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 FDE308033 FDE308032 FDE308035 FDE308036 CTF080
160 FDE316033 FDE316032 FDE316035 FDE316036 CTF160
225 FDE322533 FDE322532 FDE322535 FDE322536 CTF225
IC Rating 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 HFDE308033 HFDE308032 HFDE308035 HFDE308036 CTF080
160 HFDE316033 HFDE316032 HFDE316035 HFDE316036 CTF160
225 HFDE322533 HFDE322532 HFDE322535 HFDE322536 CTF225
IC Rating 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 FDCE308033 FDCE308032 FDCE308035 FDCE308036 CTF080
160 FDCE316033 FDCE316032 FDCE316035 FDCE316036 CTF160
225 FDCE322533 FDCE322532 FDCE322535 FDCE322536 CTF225
Ampere
Rating
LSI w/ZSI LSIG w/ZSI
Catalog Number Catalog Number
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 FDE308032ZG FDE308036ZG
160 FDE316032ZG FDE316036ZG
225 FDE322532ZG FDE322536ZG
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 HFDE308032ZG HFDE308036ZG
160 HFDE316032ZG HFDE316036ZG
225 HFDE322532ZG HFDE322536ZG
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
80 FDCE308032ZG FDCE308036ZG
160 FDCE316032ZG FDCE316036ZG
225 FDCE322532ZG FDCE322536ZG
Circuit
Breaker
Type Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
V4-T2-144 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
Note
Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes.
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side
Terminals Only
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
100 EHD2100K FD2100K HFD2100K
150 — FD2150K HFD2150K
225 — FD2225K HFD2225K
Three-Pole
100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K
150 — FD3150K HFD3150K
225 — FD3225K HFD3225K
Four-Pole
100 — FD4100K HFD4100K
150 — FD4150K HFD4150K
225 — FD4225K HFD4225K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-145
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide
wire connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire types.
Except as noted, terminals
comply with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B. Unless
otherwise specified, F-Frame
circuit breakers are factory
equipped with load
terminals only.
Ordering Information
F-Frame circuit breakers and
molded case switches have
load terminals only as
standard equipment. When
standard line-end terminals
(same as standard load-end
terminals) are required, add
Suffix L to the circuit breaker
catalog number. When non-
standard or optional line and/
or load terminals are required,
order by style number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only.
2Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
3Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Package of Three
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI 14–10 2.5–4 3T20FB 2
100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD
Optional Pressure Terminals
50 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–4 2.5–25 3TA50FB 2
100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3TA100FD
200 Stainless steel Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T150FB
225 Copper Cu 4–4/0 25–95 3T225FD
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 6–300 kcmil 16–150 3TA225FDK 3
V4-T2-146 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Line and Load Terminals
3T20FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA225FD
Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of
conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer.
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar.
Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around
bottom of collar.
3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK (Up to 150 mm2)
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
with screw and washer.
Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw
and lockwasher.
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with
this collar.
Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1.
Screw
Wire Clamp
Conductor
Screw
Washer
Collar
Conductor
Nut
Conductor
Extrusion
Clip
Collar
Collar
Screw
Washer
Conductor
Conductor
Collar
Washer
Screw
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-147
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
Allowable Accessory Combinations
FD Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Note
1Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation.
They are not listed with UL for field installation.
Description
Reference
Page
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1Four-Pole
Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T2-273 ■
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-273 ■❏ ❏■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-273 ■❏ ❏■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-275 ■■ ■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-275 ■■ ■■ ■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-277 ■❏ ❏■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-279 ■■ ■■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-283 ■■ ■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-285 ■■ ■■
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-306 ●● ●● ● ●● ● ●
Keeper nut V4-T2-306 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-307 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-308 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-308 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-308 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Terminal shields V4-T2-310 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Terminal end covers V4-T2-311 ●● ●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●● ●● ● ●● ● ●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■ ■ ■
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-312 ■■ ■ ■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ■❏ ❏❏ ❏
Cylinder lock V4-T2-313 ■
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ■❏ ❏❏ ❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●● ●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●● ● ●● ● ●
Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators V4-T2-316 ●● ● ●● ● ●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-317 ●● ●● ● ●● ● ●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●● ●
LFD current limiter V4-T2-322 ●● ●
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-322 ●● ●● ●
Cause of trip display V4-T2-323 ●●
Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T2-323 ●●
Cause of trip LED V4-T2-323 ●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
Marine/naval application — ● ●●●● ●●● ●●
V4-T2-148 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1)
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Notes
1DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
4Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE.
5Current limiting.
6Check with Eaton for availability.
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
240 277 480 600 125 250 23
EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 —
EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 —
ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 —
EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 —
EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 —
EHD 1 —4 ——10 —
2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10
FDB 2, 3, 4 18 — 14 14 — 10
FD 1 — 35 — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 65 — 35 18 — 10
FDE 43 65 — 35 18 — —
HFD 1 —65——10—
2, 3, 4 100 — 65 25 — 22
HFDE 43 100 — 65 25 — —
FDC 52, 3, 4 200 — 100 35 — 22
FDCE 456 3 200 — 100 25 — —
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1
220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125 250 23
EDB 2, 3 22 — — — 10 —
EDS 2, 3 42 — — — 10 —
ED 2, 3 65 — — — 10 —
EDH 2, 3 100 — — — 10 —
EDC 2, 3 200 — — — 10 —
EHD 1 —14——10—
2, 3 18 — 14 — — 10
FDB 2, 3, 418141414—10
FD 1 35 — — — 10 —
2, 3, 465353518—10
HFD 1 65 — — — 10 —
2, 3, 4 100 65 65 25 — 22
FDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 — 22
Circuit Breaker
Type Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (225 A) CTF225
External neutral sensor (160 A) CTF160
External neutral sensor (80 A) CTF080
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-149
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
FDE 310+ Specifications
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation FD
Frames available 80 A, 160 A 225 A
Continuous current range (A) 15–225 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 16–225A
Interrupting capacities at 480Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100
100% rated No
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode) No
Interchangeable trip unit No
High load alarm (suffix B20) No
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) No
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) No
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes
Thru-cover accessories No
FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
1Not available for FD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and
RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG
and RG.
FD Frame
310+ Settings 80 A 160 A 225 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 1560100
B 2070110
C 3080125
D 4090150
E 50 100 160
F 60 125 175
G 70 150 200
H (= In) 80 160 225
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Position 1 2 2 2
Position 2 4 4 4
Position 3 7 7 7
Position 4 10 10 10
Position 5 12 12 12
Position 6 15 15 15
Position 7 20 20 20
Position 8 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x 2x 2x
Position 2 3x 3x 3x
Position 3 4x 4x 4x
Position 4 5x 5x 5x
Position 5 6x 6x 6x
Position 6 7x 7x 7x
Position 7 8x 8x 8x
Position 8 10x 10x 10x
Position 9 12x 12x 12x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed 67
at10x
67
at10x
67
at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 1 16 32 45
Position 2 24 48 67
Position 3 32 64 90
Position 4 48 96 135
Position 5 64 128 180
Position 6 80 160 225
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 1 Inst Inst Inst
Position 2 120 120 120
Position 3 300 300 300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2
V4-T2-150 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FD Frame
FD Frame, Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
FD Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3.38
(85.7)
6.00
(152.4)
4.13
(104.9)
On
Off
Front View Side View
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
12 3 4
ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC — 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) —
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC 2 (0.9) 3 (1.4) 4.5 (2.0) 6 (2.7)
FDE, HFDE, FDCE — — 4.5 (2.0) —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-151
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical J-Frame Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-152
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-153
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-156
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-157
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-158
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
●J-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
●J-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
V4-T2-152 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Trip Unit
JD 3250 F
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
Number of
Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
070
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Suffix
C= Non-aluminum terminals
F= Frame only
K= High magnetic molded case switch
V= 50 °C calibration
W= Without terminals
X= Load side terminals only
Y= Line side terminals only
Trip Unit Type
JT = Thermal-magnetic Number
of Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Suffix
T=Trip unit
thermal-magnetic
fixed thermal
adj. magnetic
V= 50 °C calibration
(thermal-magnetic
trip units only)
Trip Unit Rating/
Plug Ampere Rating
070
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
JT 3250 T
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-153
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Notes
1Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2Individually packed.
3Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.
4Neutral is in right pole.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only 1
For Use with Standard or
High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Standard
Terminals Only
See Page
V4-T2-155
for Optional
Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
70 JD2070 HJD2070 JDC2070 JT2070T TA250KB 2
90 JD2090 HJD2090 JDC2090 JT2090T
100 JD2100 HJD2100 JDC2100 JT2100T
125 JD2125 HJD2125 JDC2125 JT2125T
150 JD2150 HJD2150 JDC2150 JT2150T
175 JD2175 HJD2175 JDC2175 JT2175T
200 JD2200 HJD2200 JDC2200 JT2200T
225 JD2225 HJD2225 JDC2225 JT2225T
250 JD2250 HJD2250 JDC2250 JT2250T
Three-Pole
70 JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T TA250KB 2
90 JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T
100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T
125 JD3125 HJD3125 JDC3125 JT3125T
150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T
175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T
200 JD3200 HJD3200 JDC3200 JT3200T
225 JD3225 HJD3225 JDC3225 JT3225T
250 JD3250 HJD3250 JDC3250 JT3250T
Four-Pole 34
125 JD4125 HJD4125 JDC4125 JT3125T TA250KB 2
150 JD4150 HJD4150 JDC4150 JT3150T
175 JD4175 HJD4175 JDC4175 JT3175T
200 JD4200 HJD4200 JDC4200 JT3200T
225 JD4225 HJD4225 JDC4225 JT3225T
250 JD4250 HJD4250 JDC4250 JT3250T
V4-T2-154 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—
Frame Only
Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-
Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for
Reverse Feed Application
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
JD2250F HJD2250F JDC2250F
Three-Pole
JD3250F HJD3250F JDC3250F
Four-Pole
JD4250F HJD4250F JDC4250F
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
70 JDB2070W JDB2070
90 JDB2090W JDB2090
100 JDB2100W JDB2100
125 JDB2125W JDB2125
150 JDB2150W JDB2150
175 JDB2175W JDB2175
200 JDB2200W JDB2200
225 JDB2225W JDB2225
250 JDB2250W JDB2250
Three-Pole
70 JDB3070W JDB3070
90 JDB3090W JDB3090
100 JDB3100W JDB3100
125 JDB3125W JDB3125
150 JDB3150W JDB3150
175 JDB3175W JDB3175
200 JDB3200W JDB3200
225 JDB3225W JDB3225
250 JDB3250W JDB3250
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
Notes
1Individually packed.
Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard
Terminals Only
See PageV4-T2-155
for Optional Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without
Line and Load Terminals
Suitable for
Reverse Feed Use
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - P o l e
250 JD2250KW JDB2250KW TA250KB 1
HJD2250KW HJDB2250KW —
Three-Pole
250 JD3250KW JDB3250KW TA250KB 1
HJD3250KW HJDB3250KW —
Four-Pole
250 JD4250KW JDB4250KW TA250KB 1
HJD4250KW HJDB4250KW —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-155
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load terminals
provide wire connecting
capabilities for specific ranges
of continuous current ratings
and wire types. All terminals
comply with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 65, or
Electrical Bulletin 1165.
Unless otherwise specified, J-
Frame circuit breaker line and
load terminals are shipped
separately for field installation.
The bottom of the standard
TA250KB terminal contains a
recess that is positioned over
the J-Frame circuit breaker
terminal conductor.
Ordering Information
J-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper-only
terminals are required, order
by catalog number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
T250KB Terminal TA250KB Terminal (Standard)
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
250 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB
Optional Cu Pressure Terminals
250 Stainless Steel Cu 4–350 kcmil 25–185 T250KB
Nut
Slotted
Screw
Collar
Collar
Slotted
Screw
V4-T2-156 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
JD Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Description
Reference
Page
Two-, Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-273 ❏❏❏❏
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-275 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-275 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-277 ❏❏❏❏
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-280 ■■■■
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-283 ■■■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-287 ■■■■
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-306 ●●●●●●●
Plug nut V4-T2-307 ●●●●●●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-307 ●●●●●●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-308 ●●●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309 ●●●●●●●
Terminal shields V4-T2-310 ●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ❏❏❏❏
Cylinder lock V4-T2-313 ❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●
Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-317 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-317 ●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ●●●●●●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-440 ●●●●●●●
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-322 ●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-157
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Notes
1Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
2Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
3Current limiting.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 480 600 125 250 12
JDB2, 3653518—10
JD2, 3, 4653518—10
HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 25 — 22
JDC 32, 3, 4 200 100 35 — 22
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 380 415 600 125 250 12
JD 2, 3, 4 65 35 35 — — 10
HJD 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — 22
JDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — 22
V4-T2-158 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
JD Frame
JD-Frame, Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
JD Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1)
4 5.50 (139.7) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (104.1)
4.13
(104.8)
10.00
(254.0)
ON
OFF
4.06
(103.2)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
1.56
(39.7) 0.78
(19.8)
3.94
(100.0)
2.92
(74.2)
0.88
(22.2)
3.33
(84.5)
0.72
(18.2)
1.38
(34.9)
1.75
(44.5)
2.75
(69.9)
3.50
(88.9)
C
LHandle
BreakerC
L
Front View
Side View
0.19 R
(4.8) R
0.50 (12.7)
Diameter
3 Megger Holes
if Required
Front View Cutout
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
JDB 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) — — — — — — —
JD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
HJD 11.25 (5.1) 12.50 (5.7) 13.25 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) 10.00 (4.5) 10.50 (4.8) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
JDC 12.25 (5.6) 13.50 (6.1) 14.25 (6.5) 10.00 (4.5) 11.00 (5.0) 11.50 (5.2) 2.00 (0.9) 2.00 (0.9) 2.25 (1.0)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-159
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-160
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-162
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-178
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-179
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-182
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton K-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
●K-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
●K-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
V4-T2-160 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
Notes
1Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F.
Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only.
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
KD 3400 F
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
DK
KD
KDB
HKD
KDC
Suffix
C= Copper terminals
E= 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic
trip unit circuit breaker only)
F= Frame only (400 A only)
K= High-magnetic molded-case switch
V= 50 ° calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
W= Without terminals
X= Load terminals only
Y= Line side terminals only
Blank = Standard load and line side terminals
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
KT 3400 F
Trip Unit Type
KT = Thermal-magnetic
Suffix
T= Trip unit only
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-161
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 1
310+ Circuit Breakers 2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 3
K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Cannot combine ‘B2X’ suffixes with ‘B2X’ suffixes.
2Not available in four-pole configurations.
3Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc.
Performance at
480 Vac
KDB = 35 kAIC
HKDB = 65 kAIC
CKDB = 35 kAIC
100% rated
CHKDB = 65 kAIC
100% rated
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
Trip Unit
T33 = 310+ Electronic LS
T32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG
T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
T38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode
T39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Terminals
W = No terminals
L = Line and load
Frame Designation
F
KDB 3400 FT36 ZG W
Trip Unit Type
KES Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
Trip Unit
LS = 310+ Electronic LS
LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI
LSG= 310+ Electronic LSG 2
LSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG 2
ALSI= 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 2
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
KES 3400 LSIG ZG
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
Trip Model
T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050
KD 3125 T5 7 W
Trip Type
2 = LSI
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
Suffix
W = Without terminals
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
KD
HKD
KDC
CKD
CHKD
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
V4-T2-162 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Notes
1Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2Individually packed.
32TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only 1
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Standard Terminals Only
See Page V4-T2-177 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
100 KD2100 HKD2100 KDC2100 KT2100T TA300K 2
125 KD2125 HKD2125 KDC2125 KT2125T TA300K 2
150 KD2150 HKD2150 KDC2150 KT2150T TA300K 2
175 KD2175 HKD2175 KDC2175 KT2175T TA300K 2
200 KD2200 HKD2200 KDC2200 KT2200T TA300K 2
225 KD2225 HKD2225 KDC2225 KT2225T TA300K 2
250 KD2250 HKD2250 KDC2250 KT2250T TA350K 2
300 KD2300 HKD2300 KDC2300 KT2300T TA350K 2
350 KD2350 HKD2350 KDC2350 KT2350T TA350K 2
400 KD2400 HKD2400 KDC2400 KT2400T 2TA400K 3
Three-Pole
100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 2
125 KD3125 HKD3125 KDC3125 KT3125T TA300K 2
150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 2
175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 2
200 KD3200 HKD3200 KDC3200 KT3200T TA300K 2
225 KD3225 HKD3225 KDC3225 KT3225T TA300K 2
250 KD3250 HKD3250 KDC3250 KT3250T TA350K 2
300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 2
350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 2
400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3
Four-Pole
100 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 2
125 KD4125 HKD4125 KDC4125 KT3125T TA300K 2
175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 2
200 KD4200 HKD4200 KDC4200 KT3200T TA300K 2
225 KD4225 HKD4225 KDC4225 KT3225T TA300K 2
250 KD4250 HKD4250 KDC4250 KT3250T TA350K 2
300 KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 2
350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 2
400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-163
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Four-Pole 45
Notes
1For AC use only.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
4Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required.
5Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number.
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
KD2400F HKD2400F KDC2400F
Three-Pole
KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F
Four-Pole
KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F
Max.
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
100 kAIC
at 480 Vac
Standard Options
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-177
250 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
400 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400
Max.
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
100 kAIC
at 480 Vac
Standard Options
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4125LS KES4125LSI — — — See Page
V4-T2-177
250 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4250LS KES4250LSI — — —
400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI — — —
V4-T2-164 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three-Pole
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
Notes
1For AC use only.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Information
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 3 KDB3125FT33W KDB3125FT32W KDB3125FT35W KDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-178
250 3 KDB3250FT33W KDB3250FT32W KDB3250FT35W KDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
400 3 KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT32W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W LGFCT400
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Information
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 3 HKDB3125FT33W HKDB3125FT32W HKDB3125FT35W HKDB3125FT36W LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-178
250 3 HKDB3250FT33W HKDB3250FT32W HKDB3250FT35W HKDB3250FT36W LGFCT250
400 3 HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT32W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W LGFCT400
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Standard Options
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG LGFCT125 See Page
V4-T2-177
250 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG LGFCT250
400 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-165
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Suitable for reverse feed application.
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Line
Terminals Only
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line
and Load Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
100 — — — KDB2100W KDB2100
125 — — — KDB2125W KDB2125
150 — — — KDB2150W KDB2150
175 — — — KDB2175W KDB2175
200 — — — KDB2200W KDB2200
225 — — — KDB2225W KDB2225
250 DK2250W DK2250Y DK2250 KDB2250W KDB2250
300 DK2300W DK2300Y DK2300 KDB2300W KDB2300
350 DK2350W DK2350Y DK2350 KDB2350W KDB2350
400 DK2400W DK2400Y DK2400 KDB2400W KDB2400
Three-Pole
100 — — — KDB3100W KDB3100
125 — — — KDB3125W KDB3125
150 — — — KDB3150W KDB3150
175 — — — KDB3175W KDB3175
200 — — — KDB3200W KDB3200
225 — — — KDB3225W KDB3225
250 DK3250W DK3250Y DK3250 KDB3250W KDB3250
300 DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB3300
350 DK3350W DK3350Y DK3350 KDB3350W KDB3350
400 DK3400W DK3400Y DK3400 KDB3400W KDB3400
V4-T2-166 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
Note
Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals. Suitable for
Reverse Feed Use
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
400 DK2400K KD2400K KDB2400K
— HKD2400K HKDB2400K
Three-Pole
400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K
— HKD3400K HKDB3400K
Four-Pole
400 — KD4400K KDB4400K
— HKD4400K HKDB4400K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-167
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KD3125T52W KD3125T56W KD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T52W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
V4-T2-168 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HKD3125T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T52W HKD3250T56W HKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T52W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-169
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KDC3125T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T52W KDC3250T56W KDC3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
V4-T2-170 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KD3125T106W KD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T106W KD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A22
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-171
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HKD3125T106W HKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T106W HKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
V4-T2-172 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 KDC3125T106W KDC3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T106W KDC3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-173
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number
(refer to Page V4-T2-291).
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W CKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
V4-T2-174 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3125T57W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T52W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3250T57W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T52W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-175
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CKD3125T106W CKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T106W CKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
V4-T2-176 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHKD3125T106W CHKD3125T107W 70 ORPK125A70
90 ORPK125A90
100 ORPK125A100
110 ORPK125A110
125 ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T106W CHKD3250T107W 125 ORPK025A125
150 ORPK025A150
175 ORPK025A175
200 ORPK025A200
225 ORPK025A225
250 ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 200 ORPK40A200
225 ORPK40A225
250 ORPK40A250
300 ORPK40A300
350 ORPK40A350
400 ORPK40A400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-177
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load
terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards
UL 486A and UL 486B and
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65,
or Electrical Bulletin 1165.
Unless otherwise specified,
K-Frame circuit breaker line
and load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
Ordering Information
K-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/
AI terminals are required,
order by catalog number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1Individually packed.
2Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
3Two-pole kit.
4Three-pole kit.
5Four-pole kit.
6Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW,
TA401KCW
TA402K, T402K
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/No.
Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Terminal
Terminals with
Control Wire Termination
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 3–350 (1) 35–185 TA300K 1—
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 250–500 (1) 120–240 TA350K 1—
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 2TA400K 23 2TA400KCW 23
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 3TA400K 24 3TA400KCW 24
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 4TA400K 56 4TA400KCW 56
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
225 Copper Cu 3–350 (1) 35–185 T300K1—
400 Copper Cu 250–500 (1) 120–240 T350K 1—
400 Copper Cu 3/0–250 (2) 95–120 2T400K 32T400KCW 23
3T400K 43T400KCW 24
4T400K 54T400KCW 56
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 2/0–250 (2)
or
2/0–500 (1)
70–120 2TA401K 23 2TA401KCW 23
70–240 3TA401K 24 3TA401KCW 24
70–240 4TA401K 56 4TA401KCW 56
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 300–400 2TA402K 23 —
3TA402K 24 —
4TA402K 56 —
400 Copper Cu 500–750 (1) — 2T402K 23 —
3T402K 24 —
4T402K 56 —
Tab is 1/4 x.032
V4-T2-178 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
KD Frame Accessories
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Notes
1Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM
ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory
installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole.
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-274 ■❏ ❏■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-274 ❏❏■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-276 ■■ ■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T2-277 ❏❏❏❏
Shunt trip—standard 2V4-T2-280 ■■ ■■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy 2V4-T2-283 ■■■
Undervoltage release mechanism 2V4-T2-288 ■■ ■■
PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-291 ■
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-306 ●●●●●●●●●
Keeper nut V4-T2-306 ●●●●●●●●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-307 ●●●●●●●●●
Terminal adapter V4-T2-307 ●●●●●●●●●
Multiwire connectors V4-T2-308 ●●●●●●●●●
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-308 ●●●●●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309 ●●●●●●●●●
Terminal shields V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●●●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■■
Padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ■❏ ❏❏ ❏
Cylinder lock V4-T2-313 ❏❏❏ ❏
Key Interlock kit V4-T2-314 ■❏❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●●●●●
Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T2-316 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-317 ●●●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ●●●●●●●●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ●●●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●●●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-440 ●●●●●●●●●
IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T2-322 ●●●●●●●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-322 ●●●●●●●●●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-323
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-323
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-323
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-179
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
KD Frame Accessories, continued
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Technical Data and Specifications
NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Notes
1Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
3Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
4Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
5Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
6Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
7Current limiting.
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●●●●●
Description Catalog Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 2
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor, 400 A LGFCT400 3
External neutral sensor, 250 A LGFCT250 3
External neutral sensor, 125 A LGFCT125 3
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 4
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 277 480 600 250 56
DK 2, 365 ———10
KDB 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10
KD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 10
HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 22
KDC 72, 3, 4 200 — 100 65 22
CKD 3 65 — 35 25 —
CHKD 3 100 — 65 35 —
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 380 415 440 500 600 250 56
DK 2, 3 65—————10
KDB 2, 3, 4 654040———10
KD 2, 3, 4 654040———10
HKD, HKDB 2, 3, 4 100 65 65 — — — 22
KDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 — — — 22
V4-T2-180 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame K
Frames available 125 A, 250 A, 400 A
Continuous current range (A) 55–400 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 50–400 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm, trip (suffix B20) 1Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
Thru-cover accessories No
310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
1B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2Not available for KD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and
ALSIG trip units.
K-Frame
310+ Settings 125A 250 A 400 A
Ir = continuous current or
long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir \ In
A (=Ir) 55 100 160
B (=Ir) 60 125 200
C (=Ir) 70 150 225
D (=Ir) 80 160 250
E (=Ir) 90 175 300
F (=Ir) 100 200 315
G (=Ir) 110 225 350
H (=Ir=In) 125 250 400
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
2222
4444
7777
10 10 10 10
12 12 12 12
15 15 15 15
20 20 20 20
24 24 24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Position 1 2 2x 2x
Position 2 3 3x 3x
Position 3 4 4x 4x
Position 4 5 5x 5x
Position 5 6 6x 6x
Position 6 7 7x 7x
Position 7 8 8x 8x
Position 8 10 10x 10x
Position 9 12 12x 12x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1255080
Position 2 37.5 75 120
Position 3 50 100 160
Position 4 75 150 240
Position 5 100 200 320
Position 6 125 250 400
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed 312 625 1000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-181
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Specifications
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes
1Zone interlock kit.
2By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame K K
Ampere range 125–400 A 125–400 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed rated plug (In)YesYes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating plug (In)NoNo
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm 0.5–1.0 x Ir0.5–1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 2Yes 2
Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
Power factor No Yes
Communications
PowerNet Yes 3Yes
Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
V4-T2-182 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
KD Frame
KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
KD Frame
Note
1Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg).
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 5.50 (149.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
5.49
(139.4)
ON
OFF
10.13
(257.2)
4.31
(109.6)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
3.75
(95.3)
0.83
(21.0) 1.64
(41.7)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
2.63
(66.7)2.39
(60.7)
4.78
(121.5)
C
LHandle
Front View Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1
Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
DK10.0 (4.5)11.5 (5.2)————
KDB10.0 (4.5)11.5 (5.2)————
KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.2) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-183
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-184
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-186
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-202
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-204
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-208
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton L-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
●L-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
●L-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
Standards and Certifications
●CE marked
V4-T2-184 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
Note
1Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
LD 3600 F
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
LDB
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Suffix
C= Copper terminals
F= Frame only (600 A only)
K= High magnetic molded case switch
V= 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
W= Without terminals
X= Load side terminals only
Y= Line side terminals only
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Trip Unit Rating/Plug
Ampere Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Trip Unit Type
LT = Thermal-magnetic
Suffix
T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal
adjustable magnetic
V = 50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
LT 3400 T
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-185
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
310+ Circuit Breakers
310+ Electronic Trip Units 2
LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Not available in four-pole configurations.
2Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
LDB 3600 FT36 B22ZG W
Performance at 480 Vac
LDB = 35 kAIC
HLDB = 65 kAIC
LDCB = 100 kAIC
CLDB = 35 kAIC, 100% rated
CHLDB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated
CLDCB = 100 kAIC, 100% rated
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Terminals
W = No terminals
Amperes
600
Designation
F
Features
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Trip Unit
T33 = 310+ Electronic LS
T32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 1
T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1
T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
LES 3600 LSIG B22ZG
Trip Unit Type
LES Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Amperes
600
Features
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Trip Unit
LS = 310+ Electronic LS
LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI
LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG 1
LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1
ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
Trip Type
2 = LSI (550 only)
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
Suffix
W = Without terminals
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere Rating
125 (Available on Model 1050 only)
250 (Available on Model 1050 only)
400
600
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Trip Model
T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050
LD 3125 T5 7 W
V4-T2-186 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
Notes
1Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2Individually packed.
3Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
4Neutral is in right pole.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Standard Terminals Only
See Page V4-T2-201 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting of
Frame, Trip Unit and
Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting of Frame,
Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit
Consisting of Frame,
Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
300 LD2300 HLD2300 LDC2300 LT2300T TA602LD 2
350 LD2350 HLD2350 LDC2350 LT2350T TA602LD 2
400 LD2400 HLD2400 LDC2400 LT2400T TA602LD 2
450 LD2450 HLD2450 LDC2450 LT2450T TA602LD 2
500 LD2500 HLD2500 LDC2500 LT2500T TA602LD 2
600 LD2600 HLD2600 LDC2600 LT2600T 2TA603LDK 3
Three-Pole
300 LD3300 HLD3300 LDC3300 LT3300T TA602LD 2
350 LD3350 HLD3350 LDC3350 LT3350T TA602LD 2
400 LD3400 HLD3400 LDC3400 LT3400T TA602LD 2
450 LD3450 HLD3450 LDC3450 LT3450T TA602LD 2
500 LD3500 HLD3500 LDC3500 LT3500T TA602LD 2
600 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3
Four-Pole 4
300 LD4300 HLD4300 LDC4300 LT4300T TA602LD 2
350 LD4350 HLD4350 LDC4350 LT4350T TA602LD 2
400 LD4400 HLD4400 LDC4400 LT4400T TA602LD 2
450 LD4450 HLD4450 LDC4450 LT4450T TA602LD 2
500 LD4500 HLD4500 LDC4500 LT4500T TA602LD 2
600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3
Standard Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
LD2600F HLD2600F LDC2600F
Three-Pole
LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F
Four-Pole
LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-187
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-180.
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units
Notes
1For AC use only.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
4Neutral is in right pole.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at
480 Vac
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with I2t
Short Delay
Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with
I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole
600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-178
Four-Pole 4
600 LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI — — — See Page
V4-T2-178
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Terminal
Information
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number Catalog Number
600 3 LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT32W LDB3600FT35W LDB3600FT35W LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-178
600 3 HLDB3600FT33W HLDB3600FT32W HLDB3600FT35W HLDB3600FT36W
600 3 LDCB3600FT33W LDCB3600FT32W LDCB3600FT35W LDCB3600FT36W
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity Current
Limiting 600 Vac
Rated 100 kAIC
at 480 Vac
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with
I2t Short Delay
Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with
I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole
600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-178
V4-T2-188 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
300 LDB2300W LDB2300
350 LDB2350W LDB2350
400 LDB2400W LDB2400
450 LDB2450W LDB2450
500 LDB2500W LDB2500
600 LDB2600W LDB2600
Three-Pole
300 LDB3300W LDB3300
350 LDB3350W LDB3350
400 LDB3400W LDB3400
450 LDB3450W LDB3450
500 LDB3500W LDB3500
600 LDB3600W LDB3600
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
Notes
1Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application.
Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals Only
See Page V4-T2-201 for
Optional Terminals
Circuit Breaker Only
without Line and Load
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Tw o - P o l e
600 LD2600WK 2TA603LDK
600 LDB2600WK 12TA603LDK
600 HLD2600WK 2TA603LDK
Three-Pole
600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK
600 LDB3600WK 13TA603LDK
600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK
Four-Pole
600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK
600 LDB4600WK 14TA603LDK
600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-189
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LD3125T52W LD3125T56W LD3125T57W —ORPL125A070
—ORPL125A090
—ORPL125A100
—ORPL125A110
—ORPL125A125
250 LD3250T52W LD3250T56W LD3250T57W —ORPL025A125
—ORPL025A150
—ORPL025A175
—ORPL025A200
—ORPL025A225
—ORPL025A250
400 LD3400T52W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 LD3600T52W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-190 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HLD3125T52W HLD3125T56W HLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 HLD3250T52W HLD3250T56W HLD3250T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 HLD3400T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 HLD3600T52W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-191
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LDC3125T52W LDC3125T56W LDC3125T57W —ORPL125A070
—ORPL125A090
—ORPL125A100
—ORPL125A110
—ORPL125A125
250 LDC3250T52W LDC3250T56W LDC3250T57W —ORPL025A125
—ORPL025A150
—ORPL025A175
—ORPL025A200
—ORPL025A225
—ORPL025A250
400 LDC3400T52W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 LDC3600T52W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-192 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LD3125T106W LD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 LD3250T106W LD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-193
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 HLD3125T106W HLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 HLD3250T106W HLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-194 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 LDC3125T106W LDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 LDC3250T106W LDC3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-195
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLD3125T52W CLD3125T56W CLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLD3250T52W CLD3250T56W CLD3125T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CLD3400T52W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLD3600T52W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-196 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHLD3125T52W CHLD3125T56W CHLD3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A125
125 ORPL125A125
250 CHLD3250T52W CHLD3250T56W CHLD3125T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CHLD3600T52W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-197
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLDC3125T52W CLDC3125T56W CLDC3125T57W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLDC3250T52W CLDC3250T56W CLDC3125T57W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CLDC3400T52W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLDC3600T52W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-198 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLD3125T106W CLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLD3250T106W CLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-199
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CHLD3125T106W CHLD3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 CHLD3250T106W CHLD3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
V4-T2-200 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125 CLDC3125T106W CLDC3125T107W 70 ORPL125A070
90 ORPL125A090
100 ORPL125A100
110 ORPL125A110
125 ORPL125A125
250 CLDC3250T106W CLDC3250T107W 125 ORPL025A125
150 ORPL025A150
175 ORPL025A175
200 ORPL025A200
225 ORPL025A225
250 ORPL025A250
400 CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 200 ORPL40A200
225 ORPL40A225
250 ORPL40A250
300 ORPL40A300
350 ORPL40A350
400 ORPL40A400
600 CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A300
350 ORPL60A350
400 ORPL60A400
500 ORPL60A500
600 ORPL60A600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-201
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load
terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 65M.
Unless otherwise specified,
L-Frame circuit breaker line
and load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
The wire connecting terminal
is secured with two pan-
head, slotted screws and
lockwashers that can be
checked for the correct
torque loading or retightened
from the front of the circuit
breaker before installation of
the conductors. (Applies to all
styles.) The circuit breaker
line/load terminal conductors
are positioned in the
conducting holes in the wire
connecting terminal and are
secured with recessed socket
screws that are tightened to
the correct torque loading
from the front of the circuit
breaker.
Ordering Information
L-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper
terminals are required, order
by catalog Number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
Te rm i n a l s
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2Individually packed.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Terminal
Terminals with
Control Wire Termination
Poles
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Two-pole kit 12TA401LDK —
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Three-pole kit 13TA401LDK —
400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 120–300 Four-pole kit 14TA401LDK —
450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 (2) 25–95 2TA450LD —
500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–350 (2) 95–150 2TA602LD TA602LDCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Two-pole kit 12TA603LDK 2TA603LDKCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Three-pole kit 13TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW
600 Aluminum Cu/AI 400–500 (2) 185–240 Four-pole kit 14TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600 Copper Cu 250–350 (2) 120–250 2T602LD T602LDCW
TA450LD or TA602LD or
T602LD Terminal
Pan-Head Screws and
Lockwashers (Installed
before Cable Clamping
Screws)
Terminal Cover
Screws
Retainer
TA401LD or TA603LD
Terminal (Step-Type
Terminal Requires
Terminal Cover and
Warning Label.
See Inset.)
Pan-Head Screws
and Lockwashers
Warning Label
Circuit Breaker
Line Terminal Cover
V4-T2-202 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
LD Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Notes
1Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories.
4Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units.
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■■
Shunt trip—standard 4V4-T2-280 ■■■■
Shunt trip—low energy 4V4-T2-283 ■■■■
Undervoltage release mechanism 4V4-T2-289 ■■■■
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-291 ■
External Accessories
End cap kit V4-T2-306 ●●●●●●●
Control wire terminal kit V4-T2-307 ●●●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309 ●●●●●●●
Terminal shields V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ❏❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●●●●●
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-316 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-318 ●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ●●●●●●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-440 ●●●●●●●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-322 ●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-203
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
LD Frame Accessories, continued
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Notes
1Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
4Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
5Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral 2
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-322
Potential transformer module V4-T2-322
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-323
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-323
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-323
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●●●
Description Catalog Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 3
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor LGFCT600 4
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 5
V4-T2-204 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Notes
1Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
3Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
4100% rated breakers.
5Current limiting.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 277 480 600 125 250 23
LDB 2, 3 65—3525—22
LD 2, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — 22
CLD 42, 3, 4 65 — 35 25 — —
HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — 25
CHLD 42, 3, 4 100 — 65 35 — —
LDC, LDCB 52, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — 30
CLDC 45 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 50 — —
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 415 690 250 23
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
LDB 2, 3 8585454520102010
LD 2, 3, 48585454520102010
CLD 42, 3, 4858545452010——
HLD, HLDB 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 25 13 20 10
CHLD 42, 3, 410010070702513——
LDC, LDCB 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 20 10
CLDC 42, 3, 4 200 100 100 75 35 18 — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-205
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
1B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and
ALSIG trip units.
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation LD
Frames available 600 A
Continuous current range (A) 250–600 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 120–600 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 35, 65, 100
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
(or Maintenance Mode)
Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
Thru-cover accessories No
Description
LD Frame
Specification
310+ settings 600 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 250
B 300
C 315
D 350
E 400
F 450
G 500
H (= In) 600
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
22
44
77
10 10
12 12
15 15
20 20
24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x
Position 2 3x
Position 3 4x
Position 4 5x
Position 5 6x
Position 6 7x
Position 7 8x
Position 8 8x
Position 9 8x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 120
Position 2 180
Position 3 240
Position 4 360
Position 5 480
Position 6 600
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed 1500
V4-T2-206 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Note
1Zone interlock kit.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame L L
Ampere range 200–600 A 200–600 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed rated plug (In)YesYes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating plug (In)NoNo
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm 0.5–1.0 x Ir0.5–1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-207
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes
1Zone interlock kit.
2By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 2Yes 2
Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
Power factor No Yes
Communications
PowerNet Yes 3Yes
Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
V4-T2-208 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
LD Frame
LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
LD Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
10.75
(273.1)
8.25
(209.6)
3.81
(96.8)
8.21
(208.6)
Handle
7.28
(184.9)
0.19 R
(4.8) R
3.64
(92.5)
1.50
(38.1)
2.29
(58.2)
1.33
(33.7)
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.3)
3.28
(83.3)
0.25 (6.4) R
Breaker
C
L
C
L
Front View
Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
Breaker
Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 20 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (2.3)
LDB 18 (8.2) 20 (9.1) 25 (11.3) — — — — — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-209
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-210
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-211
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-216
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-217
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-219
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton M-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
●MDL-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
individual components
(frame, trip unit, terminals),
or factory assembled
complete breakers
●MDLB, HMDLB-Frame
circuit breakers with non-
interchangeable trip units
are suitable for reverse
feed use
Standards and Certifications
●CE marked
V4-T2-210 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
310+ Circuit Breaker
310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1
Note
1Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc.
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere Rating
300 1
350 1
400
450
500
600
700
800
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
MDL, MDLB
HMDL, HMDLB
Suffix
F= Frame only (800 A only)
K= High magnetic molded case switch
V= 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
W= Without terminals
X= Load side terminals only
Y= Line side terminals only
MDL 3800 F
Trip Unit Type
MT Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
Trip Unit Rating/
Plug Ampere Rating
300 1
350 1
400
450
500
600
700
800
Suffix
T= Thermal-magnetic
V= 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
MT 3800 T
MDLB 3800 FT36 B21 W
Performance at 480 Vac
MDLB = 50 kAIC
HMDLB = 65 kAIC
CMDLB = 50 kAIC, 100% rated
CHMDLB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Terminals
W = No terminals
Amperes
800
Designation
F
Features
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Trip Unit
T33 = 310+ Electronic LS
T32 = 310+ Electronic LSI
T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG
T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
MES 3800 ALSIG B21
Trip Unit Type
MES Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole Amperes
800
Features
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Trip Unit
LS = 310+ Electronic LS
LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI
LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG
LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG
ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-211
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole
Note
1Two terminals are required per pole.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Magnetic Trip Range
is 5–10 Up Through
600 A; 4–8 on 700 and
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
Standard
Terminals
Only 1
See Page
V4-T2-215 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 MDL2300 MDL2800F HMDL2300 HMDL2800F MT2300T TA700MA1
350 MDL2350 HMDL2350 MT2350T TA700MA1
400 MDL2400 HMDL2400 MT2400T TA700MA1
450 MDL2450 HMDL2450 MT2450T TA700MA1
500 MDL2500 HMDL2500 MT2500T TA700MA1
600 MDL2600 HMDL2600 MT2600T TA700MA1
700 MDL2700 HMDL2700 MT2700T TA700MA1
800 MDL2800 HMDL2800 MT2800T TA800MA2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Magnetic Trip Range
is 5–10 Up Through
600 A; 4–8 on 700 and
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
Standard
Terminals
Only 1
See Page
V4-T2-215 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals Frame Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 MDL3300 MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1
400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1
450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1
500 MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1
600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1
700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1
800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA2
V4-T2-212 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1
Notes
1Factory sealed for reverse feed application.
2Two terminals are required per pole.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Terminals Only 2
See Page V4-T2-215 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 MDLB2300 HMDLB2300 TA700MA1
350 MDLB2350 HMDLB2350 TA700MA1
400 MDLB2400 HMDLB2400 TA700MA1
450 MDLB2450 HMDLB2450 TA700MA1
500 MDLB2500 HMDLB2500 TA700MA1
600 MDLB2600 HMDLB2600 TA700MA1
700 MDLB2700 HMDLB2700 TA700MA1
800 MDLB2800 HMDLB2800 TA800MA2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Standard Terminals Only 2
See Page V4-T2-215 for
Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 MDLB3300 HMDLB3300 TA700MA1
350 MDLB3350 HMDLB3350 TA700MA1
400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1
450 MDLB3450 HMDLB3450 TA700MA1
500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1
600 MDLB3600 HMDLB3600 TA700MA1
700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1
800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-213
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-218.
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 4
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-218.
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Notes
1For AC use only.
2Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers.
4Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 50 kAIC at
480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
600 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page
V4-T2-216
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short Time Pickup
with I2t Short Delay Ramp
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and Delay
Adjustable Short Time Pickup
with I2t Short Delay and
Ground Fault Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and Ground
Fault Protection
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 MDLB3800FT33W MDLB3800FT32W MDLB3800FT35W MDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 HMDLB3800FT33W HMDLB3800FT32W HMDLB3800FT35W HMDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Terminal
Information
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
50 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Standard
LS
Options
LSI LSG LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number Catalog Number
800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T2-216
V4-T2-214 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
Notes
1MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Circuit Breaker Only without
Line and Load Terminals
Catalog
Number
Tw o - Po l e
800 MDL2800WK
MDLB2800WK 1
HMDL2800WK
Three-Pole
800 MDL3800WK
MDLB3800WK 1
HMDL3800WK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-215
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
M-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/
AI terminals are required,
order by catalog number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
Line and Load Terminals
TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/No.
Conductors
Terminal
Terminals with Control
Wire Termination
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) TA700MA1 TA700MA1CWT
800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT
800 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (2) TA801MA TA801MACWT
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) T600MA1 —
800 Copper Cu 3/0–300 kcmil (3) T800MA1 —
V4-T2-216 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
MD Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Notes
1Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1Three-Pole
Left Right Left Center Right
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■ ■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-276 ■■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-276 ■■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-276 ■■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■ ■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■ ■
Shunt trip—standard 2V4-T2-281 ■■■ ■
Shunt trip—low energy 2V4-T2-283 ■■■ ■
Undervoltage release mechanism 2V4-T2-289 ■■■ ■
External Accessories
Rear fed terminals V4-T2-308 ●●●●●
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309 ●
Terminal shields V4-T2-311 ●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●●●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●●●
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-316 ●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-318 ●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ●●●●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-440 ●●●●●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-322 ●●●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-217
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
Notes
1MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
2Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
3Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
4Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
5Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
6Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.
Description Catalog Number
Electronic portable test kit MTST230V 1
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01
External neutral sensor LGFCT600 2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 3
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 56
240 480 600 250
MDL, MDLB2, 365502522
CMDL2, 3655025—
HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100 65 35 25
CHMDL
2, 3 100 65 35 —
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) ICU
≠ ICS
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 56
240 415 690 250
MDL, MDLB 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 20/10
CMDL 2, 3 65/65 50/50 20/10 —
HMDL, HMDLB 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 20/10
CHMDL 2, 3 100/100 70/50 25/13 —
V4-T2-218 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Notes
1B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI
and ALSIG trip units.
Description Specification
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation MDL
Frames available 800 A
Continuous current range (A) 320–800 A
Ground fault pickup (A) 160–800 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC) 50, 65
100% rated Yes
Protection
Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
(or Maintenance Mode)
Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
Interchangeable trip unit Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
Thru-cover accessories No
Description
MDL Frame
Specification
310+ settings 800 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Ir
A 320
B 400
C 450
D 500
E 600
F 630
G 700
H (= In) 800
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
22
44
77
10 10
12 12
15 15
20 20
24 24
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Position 1 2x
Position 2 3x
Position 3 4x
Position 4 5x
Position 5 6x
Position 6 7x
Position 7 8x
Position 8 8x
Position 9 8x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed 67 @10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(310+ w/ ground fault)
Position 1 160
Position 2 240
Position 3 320
Position 4 480
Position 5 640
Position 6 800
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1 Inst
Position 2 120
Position 3 300
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed 2000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-219
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
MD Frame
MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
MD Frame
Note
1Thermal-magnetic only.
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
16.00
(406.4)
8.25
(209.6)
4.06
(103.2)
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.7)
C
LBreaker R 0.25
(6.4)
R 0.19
(4.8)
1.50
(38.1)
3.64
(92.5)
7.28
(184.9)
0.97
(24.6)
3.28
(83.3)
1.33
(33.7)
Handle
C
L
Front View Side View
Drilling Plan
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1
Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole
MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 26.5 (12.0) 29.0 (13.2) 24.5 (11.1) 26.0 (11.8) 2.5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4)
MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) — 30.0 (13.6) — 26.0 (11.8) — 4.0 (1.8)
V4-T2-220 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical N-Frame Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-221
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-222
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-230
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-231
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-234
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
Product Description
●All Eaton N-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
●All N-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-221
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
ND
HND
NDC
NDU
CND
CHND
CNDC
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
800 = 800 amperes
12 = 1200 amperes
Trip Model
T3 = Model 310
T5 = Model 550
T7 = Model 750
T10 = Model 1050
Trip Type
2 = LSI
3 = LS
5 = LSG
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
Suffix
E= 100% R.P. protected (four-pole)
EH = 50% R.P. protected (four-pole)
K= High magnetic molded case switch
W= Without terminals
X= Load only terminals
Y= Line only terminals
ND 312 T3 2 W
V4-T2-222 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 ND3800T52W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 ND312T52W ND312T56W ND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 HND3800T52W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 HND312T52W HND312T56W HND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-223
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 NDC3800T52W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 NDC312T52W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
V4-T2-224 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 ND312T106W ND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 HND312T106W HND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 NDC312T106W NDC312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
3Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CND3800T52W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 3CND312T52W CND312T56W CND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CHND3800T52W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 3CHND312T52W CHND312T56W CHND312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
V4-T2-226 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
3Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 2
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CNDC3800T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 3CNDC312T52W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-227
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 CND312T106W CND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 CHND312T106W CHND312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
V4-T2-228 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Type ND Molded Case Switches
Type ND High Instantaneous (K)
Notes
1Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3Factory sealed.
4Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
5Neutral is in right pole.
Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.
For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A400
450 ORPN80A450
500 ORPN80A500
550 ORPN80A550
600 ORPN80A600
700 ORPN80A700
800 ORPN80A800
1200 CNDC312T106W 4CNDC312T107W 600 ORPN12A600
700 ORPN12A700
800 ORPN12A800
1000 ORPN12A100
1200 ORPN12A120
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Three-Pole Four-Pole 5
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
800 ND3800WK ND4800WK
HND3800WK HND4800WK
1200 ND312WK ND412WK
HND312WK HND412WK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-229
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information
N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog
number. Specify if factory installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1Terminal rating is AL9CU.
2Terminal rating is AL7CU.
TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1
Maximum Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700 Aluminum Cu/AI 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–240 TA700NB1
1000 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1 1
1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 TA1200NB1 1
1200 Aluminum Cu/AI 500–750 kcmil (3) 300–400 TA1201NB1 2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
700 Copper Cu 2/0–500 kcmil (2) 70–240 T700NB1
1000 Copper Cu 3/0–500 kcmil (3) 95–240 T1000NB1
1200 Copper Cu 3/0–400 kcmil (4) 95–185 T1200NB3
V4-T2-230 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
ND Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
❏May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
●Accessory available/modification available
Note
1OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories.
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-274 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T2-276 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination V4-T2-278 ■■■■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-282 ■■
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-283 ■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-290 ■■
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T2-291 ■
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309 ●●●●●●●
Interphase barriers V4-T2-311 ●●●●●●●
Terminal shield V4-T2-311 ■■■
Non-padlockable handle block V4-T2-312 ■■
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-313 ❏❏❏❏
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers V4-T2-315 ●●●●●●●
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-317 ●●●●●●●
Plug-in adapters V4-T2-318 ●●●●●●●
Rear connecting studs V4-T2-319 ●●●●●●●
Panelboard connecting straps V4-T2-320 ●●●●●●●
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ●●●●●●●
Handle extension V4-T2-440 ●●●●●●●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T2-323 ●●●●●●●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Ground fault alarm unit V4-T2-322
Potential transformer module V4-T2-322
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-323
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-323
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-323
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●●●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-231
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Notes
1Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2100% rated breakers.
3800 amperes maximum rating.
4Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
5Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
ND 2, 3, 4 65 — 50 25
CND 22, 3, 4 65 — 50 25
HND 2, 3, 4 100 — 65 35
CHND 22, 3, 4 100 — 65 35
NDC 2, 3, 4 200 — 100 65
CNDC 22, 3, 4 200 — 100 65
NDU 33 300 4—15075
5
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 415 690
ND
Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10
CND 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 85 50 20
Ics 2, 3, 4 85 50 10
HND
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13
CHND 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 100 70 25
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 13
NDC
Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18
CNDC 2
Icu 2, 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 2, 3, 4 100 50 18
V4-T2-232 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Digitrip
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is= Sensor Rating
In= Rating Plug
Ir= Long Delay Pickup Setting
Note
1Zone interlock kit.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame N N
Ampere range 400–1200 A 400–1200 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG
Fixed rated plug (In)YesYes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating plug (In)NoNo
Long delay pickup 0.4–1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t 1–5 seconds 1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes
High load alarm No 0.5–1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup 150–800% x (Ir) 150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup 200–800% x (In) 200–800% x (In)
Discriminator Yes Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault pickup 20–100% x (Is) 20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm Yes 1Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-233
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Digitrip, continued
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is= Sensor Rating
In= Rating Plug
Ir= Long Delay Pickup Setting
Notes
1By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
System Monitoring
Digital display Yes 1Yes 1
Current Yes Yes
Power and energy No Yes
Power quality—harmonics No Yes
Power factor No Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No 2Yes
Testing
Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
V4-T2-234 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ND Frame
ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
ND Frame
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
16.00
(406.4) ON/I
OFF/O
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.6)
1.91
(48.4)
3.68
(93.2)
1.50
(38.1)
3.19
(80.9) 6.38
(161.9)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
0.25 R
(6.4 R)
C
LHandle
C
LHandle
Front View Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (20.4) 58 (26.3)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-235
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical R-Frame Breaker
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-236
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-237
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-249
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-250
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-253
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Product Description
●Eaton R-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
terminals
●All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
V4-T2-236 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Notes
1For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-237 to V4-T2-246.
2No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
RD
RDC
CRD 2
CRDC 2
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
16 = 1600 amperes
20 = 2000 amperes
25 = 2500 amperes
Trip Type 1
T53 = Digitrip RMS 510 LS
T65 = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG
T86 = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG
T96 = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG
T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG
T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA
Suffix
W= Without terminals
P= 100% protected neutral pole
R= Ground fault remote (310 only)
K= Molded case switch
RD 316 T53 W
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-237
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T51W RD320T53W RD320T52W RD320T54W RD320T55W RD320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T51W RD325T53W RD325T52W RD325T54W RD325T55W RD325T56W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T51W RDC325T53W RDC325T52W RDC325T54W RDC325T55W RDC325T56W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
V4-T2-238 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
Note
1Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T52W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRD320T51W CRD320T53W CRD320T52W CRD320T54W CRD320T55W CRD320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 — CRDC316T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRDC320T51W CRDC320T53W CRDC320T52W CRDC320T54W CRDC320T55W CRDC320T56W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-239
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T62W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T61W RD320T63W RD320T62W RD320T64W RD320T65W RD320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T61W RD325T63W RD325T62W RD325T64W RD325T65W RD325T66W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T62W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T61W RDC320T63W RDC320T62W RDC320T64W RDC320T65W RDC320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T61W RDC325T63W RDC325T62W RDC325T64W RDC325T65W RDC325T66W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
V4-T2-240 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
Note
1Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T62W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRD320T61W CRD320T63W CRD320T62W CRD320T64W CRD320T65W CRD320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRDC320T61W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T64W CRDC320T65W CRDC320T66W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-241
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T82W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T81W RD320T83W RD320T82W RD320T84W RD320T85W RD320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T81W RD325T83W RD325T82W RD325T84W RD325T85W RD325T86W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T82W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T81W RDC320T83W RDC320T82W RDC320T84W RDC320T85W RDC320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T81W RDC325T83W RDC325T82W RDC325T84W RDC325T85W RDC325T86W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
V4-T2-242 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
Note
1Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T82W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRD320T81W CRD320T83W CRD320T82W CRD320T84W CRD320T85W CRD320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRDC320T81W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T84W CRDC320T85W CRDC320T86W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-243
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T92W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T91W RD320T93W RD320T92W RD320T94W RD320T95W RD320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T91W RD325T93W RD325T92W RD325T94W RD325T95W RD325T96W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T92W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T91W RDC320T93W RDC320T92W RDC320T94W RDC320T95W RDC320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T91W RDC325T93W RDC325T92W RDC325T94W RDC325T95W RDC325T96W 1600 RP6R25A160
2000 RP6R25A200
2500 RP6R25A250
V4-T2-244 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
Note
1Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response) Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating PlugLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T92W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
1600 RP6R16A160
2000 1CRD320T91W CRD320T93W CRD320T92W CRD320T94W CRD320T95W CRD320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A080
1000 RP6R16A100
1000 RP6R16A100
1200 RP6R16A120
2000 1CRDC320T91W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T94W CRDC320T95W CRDC320T96W 1000 RP6R20A100
1200 RP6R20A120
1600 RP6R20A160
2000 RP6R20A200
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-245
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating PlugLSIA 1050 LSIG 1050
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 RD320T107W RD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200
2500 RD325T107W RD325T106W 1600 ORPR25A160
2000 ORPR25A200
2500 ORPR25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 RDC320T107W RDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200
2500 RDC325T107W RDC325T106W 1600 ORPR25A160
2000 ORPR25A200
2500 ORPR25A250
V4-T2-246 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Molded Case Switches
Refer to Eaton for UL listed,
series tested Molded Case
Switch application data.
Type RD—High Instantaneous (K)
Notes
1Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating PlugLSIA 1050 LSIG 1050
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 1CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A080
1000 ORPR16A100
1200 ORPR16A120
1600 ORPR16A160
2000 1CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 1000 ORPR20A100
1200 ORPR20A120
1600 ORPR20A160
2000 ORPR20A200
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Complete without Terminals
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1600 RD316WK RD416WK
2000 RD320WK RD420WK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-247
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals
provide wire connecting
capabilities for specific
ranges of continuous current
ratings and wire types. All
terminals comply with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standards UL 486A and UL
486B and CSA C22.2 No.
65M. Unless otherwise
specified, R-Frame circuit
breaker line load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
Ordering Information
R-Frame circuit breakers have
Cu/AI terminals as standard
and Cu only terminals as an
option. Specify if factory
installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Notes
1Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker.
2For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when
100% rated device is ordered.
3For use with 2500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A breaker is ordered.
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Wire Terminals
1600 Aluminum Cu/AI English 500–1000 (4) 300–500 TA1600RD
1600 Copper Cu English 1–600 (4) 50–300 T1600RD
2000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 2–600 (6) 35–300 TA2000RD 1
Rear Connectors
2000 Copper — English — — B2016RD
2000 Copper — English — — B2016RDL 2
2500 Copper — English — — B2500RD 3
V4-T2-248 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Mounting Hardware
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
TA2000RD
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-249
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
RD Frame Accessories
Legend
■Applicable in indicated pole position
●Accessory available/modification available
Notes
1All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2Mounts outside breaker.
3Included with breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole Four-Pole
Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.
Internal Accessories 1
Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T2-274 ■■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break) V4-T2-274 ■■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) V4-T2-274 ■■
Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T2-274 ■■
Shunt trip—standard V4-T2-282 ■■
Shunt trip—low energy V4-T2-283 ■■
Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T2-290 ■■
Accessory terminal block 2V4-T2-291 ■■
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware V4-T2-309
Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T2-312 ●●
Key interlock kit V4-T2-314 ■■■ ■
Walking beam interlock V4-T2-315
Electrical (motor) operator V4-T2-317 ■■■ ■
Handle mechanisms V4-T2-425 ■■■ ■
Handle extension 3V4-T2-440 ■■
OPTIM System Components
Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T2-323 ●●●
Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T2-323 ●●●
Auxiliary power module V4-T2-323 ●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration — ●●●●●●●
Moisture fungus treatment V4-T2-115 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers — ●●●●●●●
Marine/naval application — ●●●●●●●
V4-T2-250 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Notes
1Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2100% rated breakers.
See Page V4-T2-251 for Trip Unit Specifications.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600
RD 3, 4 125 — 65 50
CRD 2 3125—6550
RDC 3, 4 200 — 100 65
CRDC 23 200 — 100 65
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240 415 690
RD
Icu 3, 4 135 70 25
Ics 3, 4 100 50 13
RDC
Icu 3, 4 200 100 35
Ics 3, 4 100 50 18
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-251
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Specifications
R-Frame Digitrip
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is= Sensor Rating
In= Rating Plug
Ir= Long Delay Pickup Setting x In
Notes
1Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%.
2Varies by frame.
3LS/LSG only.
4Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame R R R R R
Ampere range 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A 800–2500 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA)
Protection
Ordering options LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LSI(A), LISG
Fixed rated plug (In) YesYesYes YesYes
Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating plug (In) NoNoNo NoNo
Long delay pickup 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5–1.0 x (In) 0.5 –1.0 x (In) 0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds 2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4tNo No No No 1–5 Seconds
Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
High load alarm No 0.85 x Ir0.85 x Ir0.85 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay pickup 200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150-800% x (Ir) 12
Short delay time I2t 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup 200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–800% x (In) 2
Discriminator Yes 3Yes 3Yes 3Yes 3Yes
Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 4No No No No 25–100% x (In)
Ground fault pickup 425–100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (Is) 25–100% x (In)
Ground fault delay I2t100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat 100–500 ms 100–500 ms 100 –500 ms 100–500 ms 100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
V4-T2-252 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
R-Frame Digitrip, continued
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is= Sensor Rating
In= Rating Plug
Ir= Long Delay Pickup Setting x In
Note
1By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Monitoring
Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1
Current No YesYes YesYes
Voltage No No No Yes No
Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes
Power quality—harmonics No No No Yes Yes
Power factor No No Yes (over
Eaton PowerNet only)
Yes Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No Yes Yes Yes
Testing
Testing method Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-253
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RD Frame
RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
RD Frame
Note
1No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
Push
To
Tri p
9.69
(246.1)
5.09
(129.4)
7.25
(184.2)
14.50
(368.3)
C
LBreaker
Handle
C
L
11.13 (0.4) Dia.
(4 Holes) Use 4,
0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts
for Mounting Breaker
7.75
(196.9)
15.00
(381.0)
0.16
(4.0)
R Typ.
6.65
(166.7) 12.91
(327.8)
Front View
Side View
15.50
(393.7)
9.00
(228.6)
16.00
(406.4)
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole
1600 Amperes
RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
2000 Amperes
RD, RDC 102 (46.3) 135 (61.2)
CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4)
2500 Amperes
RD, RDC 135 (61.2) 182 (82.6)
V4-T2-254 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Motor Circuit Protectors
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-255
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-256
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-257
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Product Description
Designated as Eaton’s Types
GMCP and HMCP, the
instantaneous-only motor
circuit protector (MCP) is
available in ratings from 3 A
to 1200 A for motor starter
sizes 0 through 8.
An innovative design of
internal components allows
higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting
ratings. The MCP is marked
to permit proper electrical
application within the
assigned equipment ratings.
Standards and Certifications
The MCP is designed to
comply with the applicable
requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL
489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2
No. 5.1, and International
Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
The MCP is a recognized
component (UL File E7819)
and complies with the
applicable requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the
applicable requirements of
Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2
No. 5.1, International
Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations IEC 157-1,
and nameplates bear the CE
marking.
Note: Interrupting ratings are
dependent on starter it is used
with.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-255
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Motor Circuit Protector
Motor Circuit Protector
Note
1On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.
HMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protective Type
HMCP = Three-pole
HM2P = Two-pole 1
HMCPS = Three-pole
Suffix
C= Non-aluminum terminals
W= Without terminals
X= Load terminals only
Y= Line terminals only
S= Stainless steel terminals
(150A frame only)
No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load
Magnetic Trip Range/
NEMA Starter Size
A0 = 9–30/0
C0 = 21–70/0
E0 = 45–150/0
D0 = 40–60/0
H1 = 90–300/1
G2 = 80–120/2
K2 = 50–500/2
J2 = 115–170/2
M2 = 210–700/2
L3 = 160–240/3
R3 = 300–1000/3
T4 = 450–1500/4
U4 = 750–2500/4
A5 = 350–700/5
C5 = 450–900/5
D5 = 500–1000/5
F5 = 625–1250/5
G5 = 750–1500/5
J5 = 875–1750/5
K5 = 1000–2000/5
L5 = 1125–2250/5
W5 = 1250–2500/5
N5 = 1500–3000/5
R5 = 1750–3500/5
X5 = 2000–4000/5
Y5 = 2250–4500/5
L6 = 1800–6000/6 (electronic)
X6 = 500–2500/6 (electronic)
Y6 = 1000–4000/6 (electronic)
X7 = 1600–6400/7 (electronic)
Y8 = 2400–9600/8 (electronic)
Continuous Ampere
Rating
003
007
015
025
030
050
070
100
150
250
400
600
800
1200
Motor Circuit
Protective Device
GMCP = Three-pole
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
003
007
015
030
050
060
063
Magnetic Trip
Range/NEMA
Starter Size
A0 = 15–30/0
C0 = 35–70/0
E0 = 75–150/0
H1 = 150–300/1
K2 = 250–500/2
J2 = 300–600/2
M2 = 320–630/2
GMCP 003 A0 C
V4-T2-256 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
G-Frame
480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.
All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-121 under Optional Terminal Types.
UL recognized and CSA approved.
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes Cam Setting
Motor Full Load
Current Amperes (FLA) 1
MCP
Trip Setting
MCP
Catalog Number
0 3 A 1.1–1.2 15 GMCP003A0C
B 1.3–1.5 18
C 1.6–1.7 21
D 1.8–1.9 24
E 2.0–2.2 27
F 2.3–2.5 30
0 7 A 2.6–3.1 35 GMCP007C0C
B 3.2–3.6 42
C 3.7–3.9 49
D 4.3–4.7 56
E 4.8–5.2 63
F 5.3–5.7 70
0 15 A 5.7–6.8 75 GMCP015E0C
B 6.9–7.9 90
C 8.0–9.1 105
D 9.2–10.3 120
E 10.4–11.4 135
F 11.5–12.6 150
1 30 A 11.5–13.7 150 GMCP030H1C
B 13.8–16.0 180
C 16.1–18.3 210
D 18.4–20.6 240
E 20.7–22.9 270
F 23.0–25.2 300
2 50 A 19.3–22.9 250 GMCP050K2C
B 23.0–26.8 300
C 26.9–30.6 350
D 30.7–34.5 400
E 34.6–38.3 450
F 38.4–42.1 500
3 60 A 23.1–27.5 300 GMCP060J2C
B 27.7–32.2 360
C 32.3–36.7 420
D 36.9–41.4 480
E 41.5–46.0 540
F 46.2–50.5 600
3 63 A 24.2–32.1 320 GMCP063M2C
B 29.1–34.8 380
D 38.8–46.4 500
E 43.6–48.9 570
F 48.5–53.7 630
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-257
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Modifications for GMCP
Internal accessories must be factory installed.
Internal Accessories 1
External Mounted Accessories
Modifications for HMCP
See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-271.
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GMCP-Frame
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
G Direct 5
Notes
1Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP.
2LH only.
3RH only.
4For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.
5Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
No UVR available on GMCP.
Type Accessory
Electrical Ratings Contact
Arrangement
Factory
Suffix
Style
NumberVolts Frequency Amperes
Shunt trip 2120 50/60 Hz 1.1 — S5 1373D62G18
Shunt trip 2240 50/60 Hz 2.1 — S6 1373D62G19
Auxiliary switch 3240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 1288C74G03
Auxiliary switch 3240 50/60 Hz 6.0 2A/2B A6 1288C73G03
Alarm switch 3240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3 1288C75G03
Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 1288C76G09
Description
Number Units
in Package
Style
Number
Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 1294C01H01
Mounting hardware 1 624B375G23
DIN rail adapter 410 1225C79G02
Rating Type GMCP-Frame
Description NEMA IP
Catalog
Number
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05
4/4X 65 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
4/4X 65 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
Frame
Black Handle Yellow Handle
With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30
S01 Blue Handle
S01 Red Handle
V4-T2-258 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
HMCP 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with
line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCP003A0C
B 0.92–1.0 12
C 1.1–1.2 15
D 1.3–1.5 18
E 1.6–1.7 21
F 1.8–1.9 24
G 2.0–2.2 27
H 2.3–2.5 30
0 7 A 1.5–2.0 21 HMCP007C0C
B 2.1–2.5 28
C 2.6–3.1 35
D 3.2–3.6 42
E 3.7–3.9 49
F 4.3–4.7 56
G 4.8–5.2 63
H 5.3–5.7 70
0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCP015E0C
B 4.6–5.6 60
C 5.7–6.8 75
D 6.9–7.9 90
E 8.0–9.1 105
F 9.2–10.3 120
G 10.4–11.4 135
H 11.5 –12.6 150
1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCP030H1C
B 9.2–11.4 120
C 11.5–13.7 150
D 13.8–16.0 180
E 16.1–18.3 210
F 18.4–20.6 240
G 20.7–22.9 270
H 23.0–25.2 300
2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCP050K2C
B 15.3–19.1 200
C 19.2–22.9 250
D 23.0–26.8 300
E 26.9–30.6 350
F 30.7–4.5 400
G 34.6–38.3 450
H 38.4–42.1 500
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
2 70 A 16.1–21.4 210 HMCP070M2C
B 21.5 –26.8 280
C 26.9 –32.2 350
D 32.3–37.5 420
E 37.6–42.9 490
F 43.0–48.3 560
G 48.4–53.7 630
H 53.8–59.1 700
3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCP100R3C
B 30.7–38.3 400
C 38.4–46.0 500
D 46.1–53.7 600
E 53.8 –61.4 700
F 61.5 –69.1 800
G 69.2–76.8 900
H 76.9–84.5 1000
4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCP150T4C
B 46.1–57.5 600
C 57.6–69.1 750
D 69.2–80.6 900
D 69.2–80.6 900
E 80.7–92.2 1050
F 92.3–103.7 1200
G 103.8–115.2 1350
H 115.3–126.7 1500
4 150 A 57.0 –75.0 750 HMCP150U4C
B 76.0–95.0 1000
C 96.0–114.0 1250
D 115.0–130.7 1500
E31750
F32000
G32250
H32500
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-259
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
Notes
1For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
MCP
Trip
Setting 1
MCP
Catalog
Number
25 A 40 HMCP025D0C
B43
D49
E52
F55
G58
H60
50 A 80 HMCP050G2C
B87
C93
D98
E103
F109
G115
H120
70 A 115 HMCP070J2C
B122
C130
D139
E145
F153
G160
H170
100 A 160 HMCP100L3C
B174
C185
D196
E207
F218
G229
H240
V4-T2-260 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
HMCPS 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come
with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
0 3 A 0.69–0.91 9 HMCPS003A0C
B 0.92–1.0 12
C1.1–1.2 15
D1.3–1.5 18
E1.6–1.7 21
F1.8–1.9 24
G2.0–2.2 27
H2.3–2.5 30
07A1.5–2.0 21 HMCPS007C0C
B2.1–2.5 28
C2.6–3.1 35
D3.2–3.6 42
E3.7–3.9 49
F4.3–4.7 56
G4.8–5.2 63
H5.3–5.7 70
0 15 A 3.4–4.5 45 HMCPS015E0C
B4.6–5.6 60
C5.7–6.8 75
D6.9–7.9 90
E 8.0–9.1 105
F 9.2–10.3 120
G 10.4–11.4 135
H 11.5–12.6 150
1 30 A 6.9–9.1 90 HMCPS030H1C
B 9.2–11.4 120
C 11.5–13.7 150
D 13.8–16.0 180
E 16.1–18.3 210
F 18.4–20.6 240
G 20.7–22.9 270
H 23.0–25.2 300
2 50 A 11.5–15.2 150 HMCPS050K2C
B 15.3–19.1 200
C 19.2–22.9 250
D 23.0–26.8 300
E 26.9–30.6 350
F 30.7–34.5 400
G 34.6–38.3 450
H 38.4–42.1 500
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
3 100 A 23.0–30.6 300 HMCPS100R3C
B 30.7–38.3 400
C 38.4–46.0 500
D 46.1–53.7 600
E 53.8–61.4 700
F 61.5–69.1 800
G 69.2–76.8 900
H 76.9–84.5 1000
4 150 A 34.6–46.0 450 HMCPS150T4C
B 46.1–57.5 600
C 57.6–69.1 750
D 69.2–80.6 900
E 80.7–92.2 1050
F 92.3–103.7 1200
G 103.8–115.2 1350
H 115.3–126.7 1500
4 150 A 57.0–75.0 750 HMCPS150U4C
B 76.0–95.0 1000
C 96.0–114.0 1250
D 115.0–130.7 1500
E31750
F32000
G32250
H32500
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-261
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
All HMCP and HM2P 250A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix
“C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.)
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
4 250 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP250A5C
B 30.8–33.8 400
C 33.9–36.9 440
5 250 D 37.0–40.3 480
E 40.4–43.8 525
F 43.9–46.9 570
G 47.0–50.7 610
H 47.0–50.7 660
I 47.0–50.7 700
5 250 A 34.7–38.8 450 HMCP250C5C
B 38.9–43.4 505
C 43.5–47.6 565
D 47.7–52.2 620
E 52.3–56.5 680
F 56.6–60.7 735
G 60.8–64.9 790
H 65.0–69.2 845
I 69.3–73.5 900
5 250 A 38.5–43.4 500 HMCP250D5C
B 43.5–48.0 565
C 48.1–53.0 625
D 53.1–57.6 690
E 57.7–62.3 750
F 62.4–67.3 810
G 67.4–71.9 875
H 72.0–76.9 935
I 77.0–81.6 1000
5 250 A 48.1–53.8 625 HMCP250F5C
B 53.9–59.9 700
C 60.0–66.1 780
D 66.2–72.3 860
E 72.4–78.4 940
F 78.5–83.8 1020
G 83.9–89.9 1090
H 90.0–96.1 1170
I 96.2–102.0 1250
5 250 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP250G5C
B 64.7–71.9 840
C 72.0–79.2 935
D 79.3–86.5 1030
E 86.6–93.8 1125
F 93.9–101.1 1220
G 101.2–108.4 1315
H 108.5–115.3 1410
I 115.4–122.4 1500
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
5 250 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP250J5C
B 75.4–83.8 980
C 83.9–92.3 1090
D 92.4–100.7 1200
E 100.8–109.2 1310
F 109.3–117.6 1420
G 117.7–126.1 1530
H 126.2–134.6 1640
I 134.7–142.8 1750
5 250 A 77.0–86.6 1000 HMCP250K5C
B 86.6–96.1 1125
C 96.2–105.7 1250
D 105.8–115.3 1375
E 115.4–124.9 1500
F 125.0–134.6 1625
G 134.7–144.2 1750
H 144.3–153.8 1875
I 153.9–163.3 2000
5 250 A 86.6–97.3 1125 HMCP250L5C
B 97.4–108.4 1265
C 108.5–118.8 1410
D 118.9–129.9 1545
E 130.0–140.7 1690
F 140.8–151.5 1830
G 151.6–162.3 1970
H 162.4–173.0 2110
I 173.1–183.6 2250
5 250 A 96.2–108.0 1250 HMCP250W5C
B 108.1–119.9 1405
C 120.0–132.3 1560
D 132.4–144.2 1720
E 144.3–156.1 1875
F 156.2–168.0 2030
G 168.1–179.9 2185
H 180.0–192.3 2340
I 192.4–204.0 2500
V4-T2-262 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
4 400 A 27.0–30.7 350 HMCP400A5C
B 30.8–33.8 400
C 33.9–36.9 440
5 400 D 37.0–40.3 480 HMCP400A5C
E 40.4–43.8 525
F 43.9–46.9 570
G 47.0–50.7 610
H 50.8–53.8 660
I 53.9–57.2 700
5 400 A 38.5–43.4 500 HMCP400D5C
B 43.5–48.0 565
C 48.1–53.0 626
D 53.1–57.6 690
E 57.7–62.3 750
F 62.4–67.3 810
G 67.4–71.9 875
H 72.0–76.9 935
I 77.0–81.6 1000
5 400 A 48.1–53.8 625 HMCP400F5C
B 53.9–59.9 700
C 60.0–66.1 780
D 66.2–72.3 860
E 72.4–78.4 940
F 78.5–83.8 1020
G 83.9–89.9 1090
H 90.0–96.1 1170
I 96.2–102.0 1250
5 400 A 57.7–64.6 750 HMCP400G5C
B 64.7–71.9 840
C 72.0–79.2 935
D 79.3–86.5 1030
E 86.6–93.8 1125
F 93.9–101.1 1220
G 101.2–108.4 1315
H 108.5–115.3 1410
I 115.4–122.4 1500
5 400 A 67.4–75.3 875 HMCP400J5C
B 75.4–83.8 980
C 83.9–92.3 1090
D 92.4–100.7 1200
E 100.8–109.2 1310
F 109.3–117.6 1420
G 117.7–126.1 1530
H 126.2–134.6 1640
I 134.7–142.8 1750
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
5 400 A 77.0–86.5 1000 HMCP400K5C
B 86.6–96.1 1125
C 96.2–105.7 1250
D 105.8–115.3 1375
E 115.4–124.9 1500
F 125.0–134.6 1625
G 134.7–144.2 1750
H 144.3–153.8 1875
I 153.9–163.3 2000
5 400 A 86.6–97.3 1125 HMCP400L5C
B 97.4–108.4 1265
C 108.5–118.8 1410
D 118.9–129.9 1545
E 130.0–140.7 1690
F 140.8–151.5 1830
G 151.6–162.3 1970
H 162.4–173.0 2110
I 173.1–183.6 2250
5 400 A 96.2–108.0 1250 HMCP400W5C
B 108.1–119.9 1405
C 120.0–132.3 1560
D 132.4–144.2 1720
E 144.3–156.1 1875
F 156.2–168.0 2030
G 168.1–179.9 2185
H 180.0–192.3 2340
I 192.4–204.0 2500
5 400 A 115.4–129.9 1500 HMCP400N5C
B 130.0–144.2 1690
C 144.3–158.4 1875
D 158.5–173.0 2060
E 173.1–187.6 2250
F 187.7–201.9 2440
G 202.0–216.1 2625
H 216.2–230.7 2810
I 230.8–244.9 3000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-263
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
L-Frame
600 Vac Maximum 4
Notes
1Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
4Equipped with electronic trip device.
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-215.
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
5 400 A 134.7–151.5 1750 HMCP400R5C
B 151.6–168.4 1970
C 168.5–185.3 2190
D 185.4–201.9 2410
E 202.0–218.8 2625
F 218.9–235.7 2845
G 235.8–252.6 3065
H 252.7–269.2 3285
I 269.3–285.7 3500
5 400 A 153.9–173.0 2000 HMCP400X5C
B 173.1–192.3 2250
C 192.4–211.5 2500
D 211.6–230.7 2750
E 230.8–249.9 3000
F 250.0–269.2 3250
G 269.3–288.4 3500
H 288.5–307.6 3750
I 307.7–326.9 4000
5 400 A 173.1–194.5 2250 HMCP400Y5C
B 194.6–216.1 2530
C 216.2–237.6 2810
D 237.7–259.5 3090
E 259.6–281.1 3375
F 281.2–302.6 3655
G 302.7–324.1 3935
H 324.2–346.1 4215
I 346.2–368.1 4500
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Number
6 600 A 138.5–184.5 1800 HMCP600L6W
B 184.6–230.7 2400
C 230.8–276.8 3000
D 276.9–323.0 3600
E 323.1–369.1 4200
F 369.2–415.3 4800
G 415.4–461.4 5400
H 461.5–507.7 6000
6 600 A 38.5–46.1 500 HMCP600X6W
B 46.2–61.4 600
C 61.5–76.8 800
D 76.9–96.1 1000
E 96.2–115.3 1250
F 115.4–153.7 1500
G 153.8–192.2 2000
H 192.3–230.7 2500
6 600 A 76.9–96.1 1000 HMCP600Y6W
B 96.2–115.3 1250
C 115.4–153.7 1500
D 153.8–192.2 2000
E 192.3–230.7 2500
F 230.8–269.1 3000
G 269.2–307.6 3500
H 307.7–346.1 4000
V4-T2-264 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame
600 Vac Maximum 1
Notes
1Equipped with electronic trip device.
2Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value
shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings
and/or MCP ratings should be used.
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes (FLA) 2
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Number
7 800 A 123.1–184.5 1600 HMCP800X7W
B 184.6–246.1 2400
C 246.2–307.6 3200
D 307.7–369.1 4000
E 369.2–430.7 4800
F 430.8–492.2 5600
G 492.3–553.7 6400
8 1200 A 184.6–276.8 2400 HMCP12Y8W
B 276.9–369.1 3600
C 369.2–461.4 4800
D 461.5–553.7 6000
E 553.8–646.1 7200
F 646.2–738.4 8400
G 738.5–830.7 9600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-265
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-266
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-266
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Description
Motor protection circuit
breakers (MPCBs) provide
UL 489 branch circuit
protection, UL 508 and
CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor
protection, and meet IEC
60947-2 and 50947-4
requirements. Typical branch
motor loads are protected by
three-component starters,
consisting of breaker,
contactor and overload
relay, or fuse, contactor and
overload relay. The MPCB
application-specific protection
eliminates the need for motor
overload relay found in the
traditional three-component
starter assembly. The branch
motor load protection is
simplified to an MPCB and
contactor, reducing both
space requirements and
heat generation in customer
panels. Protection is provided
by application-specific
electronic trip units.
The electronic trip unit
provides typical motor
overload relay functionality
and short-circuit protection
against potential phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground
faults.
●Disconnecting means
●Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
●Overload protection
●Class 5, 10, 15 and 20
●Phase unbalance
protection
●FDMP breaker trips
when there is a 40%
difference between any
phase compared to the
calculated three-phase
average
●Phase loss protection
●Active when the
maximum phase current
is greater than 50% of
FLA setting
●Breaker will trip when
minimum phase current
is 25% or less than the
maximum phase current
●Time delay of 1 or
2 seconds before
breaker trips
●Thermal memory to
prevent immediate restart
after overload trip to allow
motor to cool down
The MPCB is based on
the Series C F-Frame.
Accessories for standard
Series C breakers apply to the
MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit
Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs
are UL 489 listed with 35 kA
and 65 kA interruption
ratings.
V4-T2-266 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
FDMP and HFDMP
FLA le Dial Setting
Technical Data and Specifications
Specifications
Notes
1IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP.
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-89.
Continuous Amperes
35 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
35 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
65 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
65 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
80 FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL
100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL
160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL
205 FDMP3205L FDMP3205JL HFDMP3205L HFDMP3205JL
Continuous Amperes A B C D E F G H
80 40 50 60 70 80 — — —
100 80 — 90 — 100 — — —
160 100 115 130 145 160 — — —
205 160 170 180 195 205 — — —
Feature FDMP HFDMP
Interruption rating at 240 V 65 kA 100 kA
Interruption rating at 480 V 35 kA 65 kA
Interruption rating at 600 V 18 kA 25 kA
Icu/Ics at 240 V 65 kA/33 kA 1100 kA/50 kA 1
Icu/Ics at 415 V 35 kA/18 kA 165 kA/33 kA 1
100% rated No No
FLA range (A) 40–205 40–205
Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20
Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second
Thermal memory protection Yes Yes
High load indicator — —
Pre-detection relays — —
Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed
Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-267
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
Product Description
Eaton’s Type ELC current
limiter attachment for the
MCP is designed to provide
increased interrupting
capacity. The combination
may be used for the
application up to 200,000 A
symmetrical at 600 Vac,
making the MCP suitable for
use in network distribution
systems or other applications
where unusually high fault
currents are available. The
current limiter connects to
the load end of the MCP and
is provided with terminals
suitable for copper or
aluminum conductors.
(See table at right.)
Limiters are coordinated with
the MCP so that normal fault
currents are interrupted
automatically by the MCP
without any damage to the
limiter. Only the rare very
high fault is opened by
the limiter. Faults that are
interrupted by the limiter
also magnetically trip the
MCP, open
ing all three
poles, preventing single-
phase operation.
Each of the three poles of the
Type ELC limiter is equipped
with an indicator that extends
when a fault is interrupted by
the limiter.
Product Selection
ELC Current Limiter Attachment
Technical Data and Specifications
Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1
Notes
1Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in
UL 486A or UL 486B.
2Optional on special order for copper cable only.
All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-215.
MCP Rating
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number
3ELC3003R
7ELC3007R
15 ELC3015R
30 ELC3030R
50 ELC3050R
100 ELC3100R
150 ELC3150R
Type ELC Current
Limiter Maximum Amperes
Wire Range
AWG
Metric
(mm2)
Standard Aluminum Terminals
50 14–2 2.5–35
100 1–4/0 50–95
150 1–4/0 50–95
Non-Standard Terminals (Steel)
50 14–2 22.5–35
100 — —
150 — —
Type ELC Current
Limiter Attachment
V4-T2-268 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-269
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-270
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Overview
Power demand continues to
grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and
large facility transformers are
installed. The increased
capacity of the electrical
source results in increased
fault currents in excess of
100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
manufactures non-fused
current limiting modules with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike
fused current limiters with a
one-time use, a current
limiter module provides an
automatic reset of the
module after a short-circuit
event. Resetting the molded-
case circuit breaker is the
only action required to restore
critical power to the system;
there is no time wasted
with sourcing the correct
replacement fuses or
module to bring the system
back online.
Product Description
The current limiting breaker
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
system protection similar to
that of the circuit breaker.
When high short-circuit
current is flowing through the
contacts of these modules,
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
improved current limiting
characteristics.
Application Description
High-performance breakers
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
are available and with
applications where the
current limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
load to limit current. Typical
loads include lighting, power
distribution, and motor
control applications.
Features and Benefits
Superior system protection:
●Auto reset improves
system uptime and
eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
●No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
ownership and the waste
created by fuses
●Overloads, by using inverse
time current tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
●Low-level short circuits, by
using instantaneous and/or
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
●High-level short circuits, by
using ultra-high-speed,
blow-apart contacts of the
current limiting module in
series with the circuit
breaker contacts
●Let-through currents, by
improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
the system
Standards and Certifications
●UL 489
●CSA C22.2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-269
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Series C High Performance Ratings
FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1
Limiter Terminals
Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only)
Notes
1 Line and load terminal included.
2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK.
3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters.
Type Product Amperes 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL)
FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only 15–225 100 35
With limiter 40–200 200 200
Ampere
Rating
Breaker with Line Side
Mounted Current Limiter 2
Breaker with Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter 3
Thermal-Magnetic
40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040Q02
45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045Q02
50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050Q02
60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060Q02
70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070Q02
80 FDC3080Q01 FDC3080Q02
90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090Q02
100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100Q02
110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110Q02
125 FDC3125Q01 FDC3125Q02
150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150Q02
175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175Q02
200 FDC3200Q01 FDC3200Q02
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 10–185 #8–350 (1) TA250FJ 4
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Package of
Three Terminals
Catalog Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
100 Steel Cu/AI 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/AI 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD
FD Frame
V4-T2-270 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module
Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg)
FD + limiter 12.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86)
12.06
(306.3)
3.34
(84.8) 3.39
(86.1)
3.96
(100.5)
4.12
(104.6)
4.13
(104.9)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-271
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Series C Internal Accessories
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-273
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-292
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-302
Internal Accessories
Product Overview
Alarm Switch
For remote indication of
automatic trip operation.
Does not function with
manual switching; however,
it will operate when either a
shunt trip or undervoltage
release is operated. A
“make” contact closes and a
“break” contact opens when
the alarm/lockout switch
operates. The switch
automatically resets when
the circuit breaker is reset.
Auxiliary Switch
The auxiliary switch provides
circuit breaker contact status
information by monitoring the
position of the molded cross
bar that contains the moving
contact arms. The auxiliary
switch is used for remote
indication and interlock
system verification, and
consists of one or two SPDT
switches housed in a plug-in
module. Each SPDT switch
has one “a” and one “b”
contact. When the circuit
breaker contacts are open,
the “a” contact is open and
the “b” contact is closed.
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm
Switch Combination
Each catalog number listed in
tables on Pages V4-T2-276
and V4-T2-277 includes one
auxiliary switch and one alarm
switch. In an auxiliary switch
ASL switch combination, the
auxiliary switch is always
mounted on the side of the
plug-in module next to the
center pole of the circuit
breaker.
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides
remote controlled tripping of
the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent
rated solenoid with a tripping
plunger and a cutoff switch
assembled to a plug-in
module. When required
for ground fault protection
applications, certain AC rated
shunt trips, as noted in the
electrical rating table, are
suitable for operation at
55 percent of rated voltage.
Select shunt trip catalog
number for the voltage within
the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed
to be applied at specific AC or
DC voltages within the voltage
range shown. Electrical ratings
are also shown on applicable
circuit breaker accessory
nameplates.
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Low energy shunt trip
devices are designed to
operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated
current sensors typically
applied in ground fault
protection schemes.
However, with a proper
control voltage source, they
may be applied in place of
conventional trip devices for
special applications. Flux
paths surrounding permanent
magnets used in the shunt
trip assembly hold a charged
spring poised in readiness to
operate the circuit breaker
trip mechanism.
When a 100 microfarad
capacitor charged to 28 Vdc
is discharged through the
shunt trip coil, the resultant
flux opposes the permanent
magnet flux field, which
releases the stored energy
in the spring to trip the
circuit breaker. As the circuit
breaker resets, the shunt
trip reset arm is actuated by
the circuit breaker handle,
resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted
in retaining slots in the
top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only.
Cutoff provisions required
in control circuit.
V4-T2-272 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
The undervoltage release
mechanism monitors a
voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit
breaker when the voltage
falls to between 70 and 35
percent of the solenoid coil
rating.
The undervoltage release
mechanism consists of a
continuous rated solenoid
with a plunger and tripping
lever mounted in a plug-in
module. The tab on the
tripping lever resets the
undervoltage release
mechanism when normal
voltage has been restored
and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (or OFF)
position. With less than
pickup voltage applied to the
undervoltage release
mechanism, the circuit
breaker contacts will not
touch when a closing
operation is attempted.
Note: Undervoltage release
mechanism accessories are not
designed for, and should not be
used as, circuit interlocks.
Accessory Terminal Block
(R-Frame)
(For fixed-mounted
configuration.)
Internal accessory wiring
leads are normally supplied
with pigtail leads (18 AWG)
that exit from the right side of
the circuit breaker. Where
specified, fixed-mounted
accessory terminal blocks are
available. A maximum of one
24-point terminal block can be
installed on the right side of
the circuit breaker for the
internal accessories.
For convenience in
determining the appropriate
number of terminal block
points required, refer
to Page V4-T2-272.
PowerNet and Zone Interlock
Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and
N-Frames
Eaton’s PowerNet
Communications Kit can be
ordered to add PowerNet
communications to an
existing OPTIM 550 breaker
in the field. An 18-inch (457.2
mm) wiring pigtail is routed to
the rear of the breaker: two
wires for PowerNet and two
wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA
load). It is recommended that
the power supply be an
“isolated high quality” unit.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-273
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Alarm Switch
G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1
F-Frame Alarm Switch 1
F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch
Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for
factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation
should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010).
3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
6 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
7 Standard mounting location.
8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker.
9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
jStandard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
Electrical Ratings Contact
Arrangement
Factory
Suffix
Catalog
Number 234
Volts Frequency Amperes
Alarm Switch
240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 1288C75G03
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination
240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B13 1288C76G09
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 6Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left 7B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK
2Left 7B09 B10 — B11 A2L1LPK A2L1LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L1RPK A2L1RTK
1 (Make only) Single-pole B15 8———— —
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 6Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left 7B01 B02 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK
2Left 7B09 B10 — B11 MA2L1LPK MA2L1LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 MA2L1RPK MA2L1RTK
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 7Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left jB01 B02 B03 B04 A1L2LPK A1L2LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L2RPK A1L2RTK 6
Alarm Switch
Make
Break
V4-T2-274 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch
R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only)
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
2Standard mounting location.
3Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
4Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
5Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
6A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left
3B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK
Right 4B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L3RPK A1L3RTK
2Left
3B09 B10 — B11 A2L3LPK A2L3LTK
Right 4B12 B13 — B14 A2L3RPK A2L3RTK
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left
3B01 B02 B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK
Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK
2Left
3B09 B10 — B11 A2L4LPK A2L4LTK
Right B12 B13 — B14 A2L4RPK A2L4RTK
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftB01 B02 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK
Right 3B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK
2LeftB09 B10 — B11 A2L5LPK A2L5LTK
Right 3B12 B13 — B14 A2L5RPK A2L5RTK
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Number of Contacts
(Make and Break)
Suffix
Number 6
Catalog
Number 6
1B05 A1L6RPK
2B12 A2L6RPK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-275
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch
G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch
F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch
Notes
1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit.
7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit.
jListed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
kStandard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
Electrical Ratings Contact
Arrangement
Factory
Suffix
Catalog
Number 12
Volts Frequency Amperes
240 50/60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 1288C74G03
240 50/60 Hz 6 2a/2b A6 1288C73G03
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 3Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left
5A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X1PK A1X1LTK
Left 5A15 7A16 7A17 7— E1X1PK —
Right or Neutral 6A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8
Right or Neutral 6A18 7A19 7A20 7—— —
2Left
5A09 A10 — A11 A2X1LPK A2X1LTK
Left 5A21 7A22 7— — E2X1LPK —
Right or Neutral 6A12 A13 — A14 A2X1RPK A2X1RTK 8
Right or Neutral 6A23 7A24 7— — E2X1RPK —
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Right A30 A31 A32 — A1X1RPKFDE —
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 3Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Left A01 A02 A03 A04 A1X2PK A1X2LTK
Right kA05 A06 A07 A08 A1X2PK A1X2RTK 4
2Left A09 A10 — A11 A2X2PK A2X2LTK
Right kA12 A13 — A14 A2X2PK A2X2RTK 4
Auxiliary Switch
a
b
V4-T2-276 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch
R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
4Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
5A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
6This option is not field installable.
7Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftA01 A02 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK
Right 23 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4
2LeftA09 A10 — A11 A2X3PK A2X3LTK
Right 23 A12 A13 — A14 A2X3PK A2X3RTK 4
Right A21 A22 — — 1482D28G10 67 —
3LeftA18 — — A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK
Right 3A17 — — A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftA01 A02 A03 A04 A1X4PK A1X4LTK
Right 2A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4
2LeftA09 A10 — A11 A2X4PK A2X4LTK
Right 2A12 A13 — A14 A2X4PK A2X4RTK 4
3LeftA18 — — A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK
Right 2A17 — — A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftA01 A02 A03 A04 A1X5PK A1X5LTK
Right 2A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X5PK A1X5RTK 4
2LeftA09 A10 — A11 A2X5PK A2X5LTK
Right 2A12 A13 — A14 A2X5PK A2X5RTK 4
3LeftA18 — — A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK
Right 2A17 — — A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix
Number 5
Catalog
Number 5
2A12 A2X6RPK
4A19 A4X6RPK
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-277
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation.
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers
4 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
5 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
7 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH).
8 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.
9 This option is not field installable.
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left 2C01 C02 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK
Right C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 3
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left 3C01 C02 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK
Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1A and 1B)
(1M–1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 4
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 5Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftC01 C02 — C03 AAL2LPK AAL2LTK
Right 3C04 C05 — C06 AAL2RPK AAL2RTK 3
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1A and 1B)
(1M–1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 4
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 5Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1LeftC01 C02 — C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK
Right 56 C04 C05 — C06 AAL3RPK 7AAL3RTK
Right C07 C08 — — 1482D28G09 89 —
Auxiliary Switch and
Alarm Switch
Combination
a
b
V4-T2-278 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker.
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1A, 1B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left C01 C02 — C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK
Right 2C04 C05 — C06 AA114RPK AA114RTK 3
2A, 2B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left C07 C08 — C12 AA214LPK AA214LTK
Right 2C10 C11 — C13 AA214RPK AA214RTK 3
3A, 3B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left C14 — — — AA314LPK —
Right 2C15 — — — AA314RPK —
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1A, 1B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left C01 C02 — C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK
Right 2C04 C05 — C06 AA115RPK AA115RTK 3
2A, 2B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left C07 C08 — C12 AA215LPK AA215LTK
Right 2C10 C11 — C13 AA215RPK AA215RTK 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-279
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Shunt Trip
G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only)
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip
Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices.
5 Standard mounting location.
6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed.
Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
Electrical Ratings Suffix
Number
Catalog
NumberVolts Frequency Amperes
120 50/60 Hz 1.1 S1 1373D62G01
240 50/60 Hz 2.1 S2 1373D62G02
12 DC 2.8 S3 1373D62G15
24 DC 5.7 S4 1373D62G16
24 60 Hz — S7 1373D62G20
Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 3Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
12–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT1LP12K SNT1LT12K
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT1LP18K SNT1LT18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5
12–24 Vac or Vdc S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K 6
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K 6
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT1RP12K SNT1RT12K 6
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT1RP18K SNT1RT18K 6
Shunt Trip
ST
a
V4-T2-280 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element.
4Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
5For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
6Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K
48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT2P04K SNT2T04K 4
48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT2P06K SNT2T06K 4
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT2P11K SNT2T11K 4
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT2P14K SNT2T14K 4
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT2P18K SNT2T18K 4
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K
48–60 Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S52 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56
12–24 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K 4
48–60 Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K 4
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K 4
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K 4
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-281
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only.
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
12–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT4LP03K SNT4LT03K
48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT4LP05K SNT4LT05K
48–60 Vdc S85 S86 S87 — SNT4LP23K SNT4LT23K
110–240 Vac S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT4LP11K SNT4LT11K
110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT4LP26K SNT4LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT4LP14K SNT4LT14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT4LP18K SNT4LT18K
Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3
12–24 Vac or Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K
48–60 Vac S25 S26 S27 S28 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K
48–60 Vdc S88 S89 S90 — SNT4RP23K SNT4RT23K
110–240 Vac S29 S30 S31 S32 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K
110–125 Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP26K SNT4RT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K
480–600 Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K
V4-T2-282 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip
R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only)
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
4A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
9–24 Vac or Vdc S01 S02 S03 S04 SNT5LP03K SNT5LT03K
48–60 Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K
110–240 Vac 3S09 S10 S11 S12 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K
110–125 Vdc S41 S42 S43 S44 SNT5LP26K SNT5LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K
480–600 Vac S17 S18 S19 S20 SNT5LP18K SNT5LT18K
48–60 Vdc S21 S22 S23 S24 SNT5LP23K SNT5LT23K
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix
Number 4
Catalog
Number 4
24 Vac or Vdc S21 SNT6P03K
48–60 Vac S25 SNT6P05K
110–240 Vac S29 SNT6P11K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac S37 SNT6P18K
48–60 Vdc S88 SNT6P23K
110–125 Vdc S45 SNT6P26K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-283
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Ordering Information
Select shunt trip catalog
number for the voltage within
the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed
to be applied at specific AC or
DC voltages within the
voltage range shown.
Electrical ratings are also
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
nameplates.
F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1
Notes
1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.
2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only,
not UL listed for field installation.
5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
Mounting
Positions
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 3
Opposite
Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 NO4 LST1LPK 4LST1LTK 4
Right 3NO5 NO6 NO7 NO8 LST1RPK 4LST1RTK 4
J-Frame
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST2LPK —
Right 3NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST2RPK —
K-Frame
Left 3NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST3LPK —
Right 56 NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST3RPK —
L- and M-Frames
Left NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST4LPK —
Right NO5 NO6 NO7 — LST4RPK —
N-Frame
Left 3NO1 NO2 NO3 — LST5LPK —
R-Frame
Right NO1 — — — LST6RPK —
Low Energy Shunt Trip
UV
V4-T2-284 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Ordering Information
Select handle reset
undervoltage release
mechanism catalog number
for the voltage within the
indicated voltage range.
Undervoltage release
mechanism coils are
designed to be applied at
specific AC or DC voltages
within the voltage range
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
nameplates.
G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only)
Notes
1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker.
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation
should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
Electrical Ratings
Style Numbers 123
Factory
SuffixVolts (AC Only) Frequency (Hz) Amperes
120 50/60 0.05 1373D62G03 T1
24 50/60 0.22 1373D62G04 T2
48 50/60 0.11 1373D62G05 T3
60 50/60 0.10 1373D62G06 T4
110 50 0.049 1373D62G07 T5
208 60 0.026 1373D62G08 T6
220 50 0.025 1373D62G09 T7
240 50/60 0.024 1373D62G10 T8
380 50 0.015 1373D62G11 T9
415 50 0.013 1373D62G12 T10
440 50 0.012 1373D62G13 T11
480 60 0.01 1373D62G14 T12
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
UV
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-285
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP)
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1Standard pigtail lead exit location.
2Standard mounting location.
3Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Same Side Rear 1Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
12 Vac U01 U02 U03 U04
24 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08
48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40
60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U100
110–127 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16
208–240 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20
380–480 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24
525–600 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
12 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52
24 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56
48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88
60 Vac U101 U102 U103 U104
110–127 Vac U61 U62 U63 U64
208–240 Vac U65 U66 U67 U68
380–480 Vac U69 U70 U71 U72
525–600 Vac U73 U74 U75 U76
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
12 Vdc U29 U30 U31 U32
24 Vdc U33 U34 U35 U36
48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40
60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U100
110–127 Vdc U41 U42 U43 U44
220–250 Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80
24 Vdc U81 U82 U83 U84
48 Vdc U85 U86 U87 U88
60 Vdc U101 U102 U103 U104
110–127 Vdc U89 U90 U91 U92
220–250 Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96
V4-T2-286 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2Standard mounting location.
3Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP
Factory Installation Kits 1
Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
12 Vac UVH1LP02K UVH1LT02K MUVH1LP02K MUVH1LT02K
24 Vac UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K
48 Vac UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K
60 Vac UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K
110–127 Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K
208–240 Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K
380–480 Vac UVH1LP15K UVH1LT15K MUVH1LP15K MUVH1LT15K
525–600 Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
12 Vac UVH1RP02K UVH1RT02K MUVH1RP02K MUVH1RT02K
24 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K
48 Vac UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
60 Vac UVH1RP24K UVH1RT24K MUVH1RP24K MUVH1RT24K
110–127 Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K
208–240 Vac UVH1RP11K UVH1RT11K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RT11K
380–480 Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K
525–600 Vac UVH1RP18K UVH1RT18K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1RT18K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
12 Vdc UVH1LP20K UVH1LT20K MUVH1LP20K MUVH1LT20K
24 Vdc UVH1LP21K UVH1LT21K MUVH1LP21K MUVH1LT21K
48 Vdc UVH1LP22K UVH1LT22K MUVH1LP22K MUVH1LT22K
60 Vdc UVH1LP24K UVH1LT24K MUVH1LP24K MUVH1LT24K
110–127 Vdc UVH1LP26K UVH1LT26K MUVH1LP26K MUVH1LT26K
220–250 Vdc UVH1LP28K UVH1LT28K MUVH1LP28K MUVH1LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc UVH1RP20K UVH1RT20K MUVH1RP20K MUVH1RT20K
24 Vdc UVH1RP21K UVH1RT21K MUVH1RP21K MUVH1RT21K
48 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
60 Vdc UVH1RP22K UVH1RT22K MUVH1RP22K MUVH1RT22K
110–127 Vdc UVH1RP26K UVH1RT26K MUVH1RP26K MUVH1RT26K
220–250 Vdc UVH1RP28K UVH1RT28K MUVH1RP28K MUVH1RT28K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-287
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
2Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
3Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers.
4Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block 1
Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3
Same Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH2LP02K UVH2LT02K
24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH2LP03K UVH2LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH2LP05K UVH2LT05K
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH2LP08K UVH2LT08K
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH2LP11K UVH2LT11K
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH2LP15K UVH2LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH2RP02K UVH2RT02K
24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH2RP03K UVH2RT03K
48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH2RP05K UVH2RT05K
110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH2RP08K UVH2RT08K
208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH2RP11K UVH2RT11K
380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH2RP15K UVH2RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4
12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH2LP20K UVH2LT20K
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH2LP21K UVH2LT21K
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH2LP23K UVH2LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH2LP26K UVH2LT26K
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH2LP28K UVH2LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3
12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH2RP20K UVH2RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH2RP21K UVH2RT21K
48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH2RP23K UVH2RT23K
110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH2RP26K UVH2RT26K
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH2RP28K UVH2RT28K
V4-T2-288 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
4Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
5Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP02K UVH3LT02K
24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH3LP03K UVH3LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH3LP08K UVH3LT08K
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH3LP11K UVH3LT11K
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH3LP15K UVH3LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 345
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP02K UVH3RT02K
24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH3RP03K UVH3RT03K
48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH3RP05K UVH3RT05K
110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH3RP08K UVH3RT08K
208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH3RP11K UVH3RT11K
380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH3RP15K UVH3RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH3LP20K UVH3LT20K
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH3LP21K UVH3LT21K
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH3LP23K UVH3LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP26K UVH3LT26K
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH3LP28K UVH3LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345
12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH3RP20K UVH3RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH3RP21K UVH3RT21K
48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH3RP23K UVH3RT23K
110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH3RP26K UVH3RT26K
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP28K UVH3RT28K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-289
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
4Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP02K UVH4LT02K
24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH4LP03K UVH4LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH4LP05K UVH4LT05K
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH4LP08K UVH4LT08K
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH4LP11K UVH4LT11K
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34
12 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP02K UVH4RT02K
24 Vac U41 U42 U43 U44 UVH4RP03K UVH4RT03K
48–60 Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH4RP05K UVH4RT05K
110–127 Vac U49 U50 U51 U52 UVH4RP08K UVH4RT08K
208–240 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH4RP11K UVH4RT11K
380–480 Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH4RP15K UVH4RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH4LP20K UVH4LT20K
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH4LP21K UVH4LT21K
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH4LP23K UVH4LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP26K UVH4LT26K
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH4LP28K UVH4LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34
12 Vdc T21 T22 T23 T24 UVH4RP20K UVH4RT20K
24 Vdc T25 T26 T27 T28 UVH4RP21K UVH4RT21K
48–60 Vdc T29 T30 T31 T32 UVH4RP23K UVH4RT23K
110–127 Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH4RP26K UVH4RT26K
220–250 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP28K UVH4RT28K
V4-T2-290 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)
Notes
1Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
4Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear 2Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH5LP02K UVH5LT02K
24 Vac U09 U10 U11 U12 UVH5LP03K UVH5LT03K
48–60 Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH5LP05K UVH5LT05K
110–127 Vac U17 U18 U19 U20 UVH5LP08K UVH5LT08K
208–240 Vac U21 U22 U23 U24 UVH5LP11K UVH5LT11K
380–480 Vac U25 U26 U27 U28 UVH5LP29K UVH5LT29K
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc T01 T02 T03 T04 UVH5LP20K UVH5LT20K
24 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH5LP21K UVH5LT21K
48–60 Vdc T09 T10 T11 T12 UVH5LP23K UVH5LT23K
110–127 Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH5LP26K UVH5LT26K
220–250 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T20 UVH5LP28K UVH5LT28K
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 3
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix
Number 4
Catalog
Number 4
12 Vac U37 UVH6RP02K
24 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K
48–60 Vac U45 UVH6RP05K
110–127 Vac U49 UVH6RP08K
208–240 Vac U53 UVH6RP11K
380–500 Vac U57 UVH6RP29K
12 Vdc T21 UVH6RP20K
24 Vdc T25 UVH6RP21K
48–60 Vdc T29 UVH6RP23K
110–125 Vdc T33 UVH6RP26K
220–250 Vdc T37 UVH6RP28K
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-291
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame)
R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1
Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory
PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)
K-, L- and N-Frames
PowerNet Interlock Kit 2
Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
Notes
1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped
from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram
(IL 29C714).
2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole.
3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU).
Factory Installed Field Mounted
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Q01 TBRDK
Type of Accessory
Number of Contacts
per Single Accessory
Required Number
of Wires
Auxiliary switch 2a/2b
4a/4b
6
12
Alarm (Signal)/
Lockout switch
1m/1b
2m/2b
6
12
Shunt trip N/A 2
Low energy shunt N/A 2
Undervoltage release mechanism N/A 2
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
K-Frame PN ICK550K
L-Frame PN ICK550L
N-Frame PN ICK550N
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
K-Frame ZG ZGK550K
L-Frame ZG ZGK550L
N-Frame ZG ZGK550N
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K
L-Frame ZGP ZGPK550L
N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N
Accessory Terminal
Block (R-Frame)
PowerNet and Zone
Interlock Kits
V4-T2-292 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
Alarm Switch
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data
12
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data
56
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data
67
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 8
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data
9j
Notes
1Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
3Non-inductive load.
4Inductive (L/R = 0.026).
5Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
6Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
7Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
8Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
iEndurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
jPigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Single-Pole Circuit Breakers
125/250 50/60 Hz 6 32000
28 DC 3 32000
28 DC 5 42000
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-293
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78
Notes
1Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
4Non-inductive load.
5Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
6Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
7Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
8Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
125 350/60 Hz 1 2500
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 42500
250 DC 0.25 42500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 42500
250 DC 0.25 42500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 42500
250 DC 0.25 42500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 42500
250 DC 0.25 42500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 42500
250 DC 0.25 42500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6
125 DC 0.50 4
250 DC 0.25 4
V4-T2-294 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 25
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
Notes
1Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3Non-inductive load.
4Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
5Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
6Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32200
250 DC 0.25 32200
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600 50/60 Hz 6 2500
125 DC 0.50 32500
250 DC 0.25 32500
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-295
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Shunt Trip
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 124
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 678
Notes
1Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds.
3Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
4Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
5Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with
accessory kits.
6Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
7Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds.
8Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
12 6.75 75 12 9 100
24 6.75 300 24 9 400
48 36 92 48 36 100
60 36 140 60 36 160
110 156 480 110 77 55
120 156 570 120 77 66
127 156 640 125 77 71
208 156 180 — — —
220 156 200 — — —
240 156 240 — — —
380 300 610 127 — 72
415 300 130 220 — 110
440 300 330 250 — 140
480 300 380 — — —
525 300 450 — — —
550 300 530 — — —
600 300 590 — — —
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
12 9 31 12 8.4 50
24 9 173 24 8.4 247
48 36 686 48 33.6 1094
60 36 1014 60 33.6 1698
110 560.5 66 110 77 112
120 560.5 84 120 77 138
127 560.5 102 125 77 150
208 560.5 354 — 77 —
220 560.5 396 — — —
240 560.5 432 — — —
380 285 180 110 154 40
400 285 200 120 154 58
415 285 240 125 154 —
440 285 610 127 154 —
480 360 34 — — —
525 360 42 — — —
550 360 50 — — —
600 360 60 — — —
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
12 9 45 12 8.4 35
24 9 200 24 8.4 170
48 — 830 48 — 710
60 — 1280 60 — 1105
110 560 100 110 77 110
120 560 120 120 77 130
127 560 140 125 77 140
208 560 420 — — —
220 560 470 — — —
240 560 550 — — —
380 285 95 220 154 41
400 285 108 250 154 54
415 285 120 — 154 —
440 285 136 — 154 —
480 360 40 — — —
525 360 50 — — —
550 360 50 — — —
600 360 70 — — —
V4-T2-296 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L- and M-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123 N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 125
Notes
1Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds.
3Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
4Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with
accessory kits.
5Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
12 9 45 12 9 35
24 9 200 24 9 170
48 34 830 48 34 710
60 34 1280 60 34 1105
110 460 100 110 77 110
120 460 120 120 77 130
127 460 140 125 77 140
208 460 420 — 77 —
220 460 470 — — —
240 460 550 — — —
380 266 95 220 154 41
400 266 108 250 — 54
415 266 120 — — —
440 266 136 — — —
480 336 40 — — —
525 336 50 — — —
550 336 50 — — —
600 336 70 — — —
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage VA
24 16.8 200 24 16.8 170
48 33.6 830 48 33.6 710
60 33.6 1280 60 33.6 1150
110 460 100 110 77 110
120 460 120 120 77 130
127 460 140 125 77 140
208 460 420 — — —
220 460 470 — — —
240 460 550 — — —
380 266 95 220 154 41
400 266 108 250 — 54
415 266 120 — — —
440 266 136 — — —
480 336 40 — — —
525 336 50 — — —
550 336 50 — — —
600 336 70 — — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-297
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123456
Notes
1Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.
2Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage.
3Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations.
4Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute.
5Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating.
6Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white.
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
Suffix
Number Voltage (V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply
Voltage (V)
Minimum
Operating Voltage (V) Ip (A) Irms at 0.250s (A) Irms at 0.033s (A) VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)
03/03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 36.1 — 25.5 612 1050
24 DC 24 16.8 36.1 16.5 — 396 1050
05/05K 48–60 50/60 48 34.0 13.1 — 9.2 450 1120
48–60 50/60 60 34.0 17.2 — 12.2 740 1120
11/11K 3110–240 50/60 110 60.5 4.2 — 3.0 330 1480
110–240 50/60 120 60.5 4.5 — 3.2 390 1480
110–240 50/60 127 60.5 4.6 — 3.3 430 1480
110–240 50/60 208 60.5 7.9 — 5.6 1170 1480
110–240 50/60 220 60.5 8.5 — 6.0 1370 1480
110–240 50/60 240 60.5 8.7 — 6.1 1470 1480
14/14K 380–440 50/60 380 266.0 4.5 — 3.2 1220 1880
380–440 50/60 415 266.0 5.0 — 3.6 1500 1880
380–440 50/60 440 266.0 5.3 — 3.7 1640 1880
220–250 DC 220 154.0 — 2.4 — 530 1500
220–250 DC 250 154.0 — 2.7 — 680 1500
18/18K 480–600 50/60 480 336.0 0.6 — 0.4 200 2200
480–600 50/60 525 336.0 0.7 — 0.5 270 2200
480–600 50/60 550 336.0 0.7 — 0.5 280 2200
480–600 50/60 600 336.0 0.8 — 0.6 360 2200
23/23K 48–60 DC 48 34.0 — 9.8 — 470 1120
48–60 DC 60 34.0 — 11.6 — 700 1120
26/26K 110–125 DC 110 77.0 — 3.3 — 370 1250
110–125 DC 120 77.0 — 3.6 — 440 1250
110–125 DC 125 77.0 — 3.8 — 480 1250
V4-T2-298 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23
Notes
1Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
3For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8
12 4.2 6.3 7.6 2.5 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 1.9 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.3 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.7 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 2.6
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.4 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.4
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.9 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.5 — — — — —
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.9 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
525 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3 — — — — —
550 210.0 367.0 446.0 4.8 — — — — —
600 210.0 367.0 446.0 5.8 — — — — —
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-299
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1
Note
1Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 250 87.5 154.0 187.0 4.0
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 — — — — —
380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
V4-T2-300 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
Note
1Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
50/60 Hz DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5 48 21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.8 60 21.0 33.6 40.8 3.1
110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.1 120 44.5 77.0 93.5 1.9
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.4 125 44.5 77.0 93.5 2.2
208 84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 3.1
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.1 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 —
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 3.8 250 — — — 4.0
380 175.0 266.0 323.0 3.4 — — — — —
415 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.0 — — — — —
480 175.0 266.0 323.0 4.6 — — — — —
500 175.0 266.0 323.0 5.4 — — — — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-301
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
Notes
1Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
2Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
3UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown.
4Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.
5For 1 minute.
Catalog
Suffix
Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max. VA
Minimum
UVR
Response 3
Initiation
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Maximum Circuit
Breaker
Contact Opening
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5
Minimum Maximum
02/02K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024
03/03K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048
05/05K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 3.4 5 46 77 1120
60 21.0 33.5 40.8 6.0 5 46 77 1120
08/08K 110–127 110 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1254
120 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1254
127 44.5 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1254
11/11K 208–240 208 84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2 5 46 77 1480
220 84.0 145.6 176.8 6.6 5 46 77 1480
240 84.0 145.6 176.8 7.2 5 46 77 1480
29/29K 380–500 380 168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8 5 46 77 2000
415 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.3 5 46 77 2000
440 168.0 266.0 323.0 8.8 5 46 77 2000
480 168.0 266.0 323.0 9.6 5 46 77 2000
500 168.0 266.0 323.0 10.0 5 46 77 2000
Catalog
Suffix
Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max. VA
Minimum
UVR
Response 3
Initiation
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Maximum Circuit
Breaker
Contact Opening
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5
Minimum Maximum
20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024
21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048
23/23K 48–60 48 21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8 5 46 77 1120
60 21.0 33.5 40.8 7.2 5 46 77 1120
26/26K 110–127 110 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3 5 46 77 1250
120 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.6 5 46 77 1250
125 43.8 77.0 93.5 3.8 5 46 77 1250
28/28K 220–250 220 87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6 5 46 77 1500
250 87.5 154.0 187.0 7.5 5 46 77 1500
V4-T2-302 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Series C External Accessories
Contents
Description Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-115
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-116
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-117
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-120
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-134
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-151
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-159
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-183
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-209
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-220
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-235
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-254
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . V4-T2-265
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
. . . . . V4-T2-267
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
. . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-268
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-271
External Accessories
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-306
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-324
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-325
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-326
External Accessories
Product Overview
End Cap Kit
The end cap kit slides onto
the line or load conductor of
the circuit breaker and acts as
a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
connector. The end cap kit
is available with English and
metric thread sizes. (Field
installation only.) Listed per
UL File E7819.
Keeper Nut
The keeper nut slides onto
the line or load conductor of
the circuit breaker and acts as
a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
connector. The keeper nut
is available with English and
metric thread sizes. Screws
and washers are supplied by
customer. (Field installation
only.) Listed per UL File
E7819.
L-, M-, N-Frames
Not required. Terminals are
threaded.
J-Frame Plug Nut
The plug nut is used in
applications where screw-
connected ring-type terminals
are preferred to connect
cables to circuit breaker
conductors. The plug nut is
press-fit into the opening in
the circuit breaker terminal
conductor. Screws and
washers are supplied by
customer.
Terminal Adapter
Control Wire Terminal Kit
The control wire terminal kit
provides a means to tap off
control power from a main
disconnect, using the
provided male end of a quick
disconnect.
For use with steel or stainless
steel terminals only.
Note: Terminal Kits contain one
terminal for each pole and one
terminal cover.
Multiwire Connectors
Eaton’s field-installed
multiwire connectors for the
load side (OFF) end terminals
are used to distribute the load
from the circuit breaker to
multiple devices without the
use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include
mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated
aluminum connectors to
replace three mechanical
load lugs. UL listed as used
on the load side (OFF) end.
Terminal Shields
Terminal shields provide
protection against accidental
contact with live line side
terminations. Terminal
shields are fabricated from
high dielectric insulating
material and fasten over
the front terminal access
openings. Small openings in
the shields provide limited
access to the terminals for
tightening connectors.
(Field installation only.)
Rear Fed Terminals.
Rear fed terminals allow
the cable to connect to the
breaker from the back instead
of the top. Terminal shields or
interphase barriers are
included with each rear fed
terminal kit (depending on
frame size). When catalog
number starts with a 3, it
indicates a kit with three
terminals in each kit. Catalog
number beginning with a TA
indicates one terminal.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-303
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Terminal End Covers
The terminal end covers are
designed for use in motor
control center applications
where, because of confined
spaces, line side conductors
are normally custom fitted.
The molded end covers are
made of high dielectric glass-
polyester and slide over the
line ends of the circuit
breaker. Close fitting
conductor openings are
molded into the end covers.
The end cover and circuit
breaker case fit together to
form terminal compartments
that isolate discharged
ionizing gases during circuit
breaker tripping. Terminal end
covers are available with two
conductor opening diameters,
0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41-
inch (10.4 mm), and are listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers
provide additional electrical
clearance between circuit
breaker poles for special
termination applications. The
barriers are high dielectric
insulating plates that are
installed in the molded slots
between the terminals. (Field
installation only.) Two per
package.
Base Mounting Plate
Suitable for mounting six
single-pole circuit breakers.
DIN Rail Adapter
For use with standard 35 mm
DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or
35 x 15 mm per DIN
EN50022.
Adapter mounting screws
included are for use with two-
and three-pole circuit
breakers. Adapters for single-
pole circuit breakers clip into
the base molding.
Key Operated Attachment
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
The non-padlockable handle
block secures the circuit
breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free
operation allows the circuit
breaker to trip when the
handle block holds the circuit
breaker handle in the ON
position.) The device is
positioned over the circuit
breaker handle and secured
by a setscrew to deter
accidental operation of the
circuit breaker handle. Listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Padlockable Handle
Padlockable Handle Lock
The device is positioned in
the cover opening to prevent
handle movement. Will
accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8 mm) padlock.
Snap-on Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
The snap-on padlockable
handle lock allows the handle
to be locked in the OFF or ON
position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to
trip when the handle lock
holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.)
This device was designed
for use on the single-pole
circuit breaker, but may be
used on one-, two-, three-
and four-pole styles. The
handle lock snaps onto the
escutcheon area of the
handle with an optional
retaining screw for added
secureness. The handle
lock will accommodate
one padlock with a 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per
UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
The padlockable handle lock
hasp allows the handle to
be locked in the ON or OFF
position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to
trip when the handle lock
holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.)
The hasp mounts on the
circuit breaker cover within
the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
operating handle so that the
hasp can be mounted on
either side of the handle.
The hasp will accommodate
up to three padlocks with
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles,
one per circuit breaker.
Listed per UL File E7819.
(Field installation only.)
Cylinder Lock
The cylinder lock internally
blocks the trip bar in the
tripped position to prevent
the circuit breaker from
being switched to ON.
The cylinder lock is factory
installed in the left pole only
of the circuit breaker cover.
Other internally mounted
accessories cannot be
installed in the same
pole as the cylinder lock.
(Factory installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit
(Lock Not Included)
The key interlock is used to
externally lock the circuit
breaker handle in the OFF
position. When the key
interlock is locked, an
extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit
breaker handle. Uniquely
coded keys are removable
only with the deadbolt
extended. Each coded key
controls a group of circuit
breakers for a given specific
customer installation.
The key interlock assembly is
Underwriters Laboratories
listed for field installation
under UL File E7819 and
consists of a mounting kit
and a purchaser supplied
deadbolt lock. The mounting
kit comprises a mounting
plate, which is secured to the
circuit breaker cover in either
the left- or right-pole position,
key interlock mounting
screws, and a wire seal.
Specific mounting kits are
required for individual key
interlock types.
Sliding Bar Interlock
The sliding bar interlock
provides mechanical
interlocking between two
adjacent three-pole circuit
breakers. It is installed on the
enclosure cover between the
circuit breakers. When the
sliding bar interlock handle
is moved from one side to the
other, a bar extends to
alternately block movement
of the circuit breaker handles
and prevents both circuit
breakers from being switched
to ON at the same time.
Sliding bar interlocks are
not UL listed. (Field
installation only.)
Walking Beam Interlock
The walking beam Interlock
provides mechanical
interlocking between two
adjacent circuit breakers of
the same pole configuration.
The walking beam interlock
mounts on a bracket behind
and between the circuit
breakers. A plunger on each
end of the beam is inserted
through an access hole in the
back plate and base of each
circuit breaker. The walking
beam interlock prevents both
circuit breakers from being
switched ON at the same
time. If a walking beam
interlock is installed, the
wiring troughs in the back
of the circuit breaker case
are blocked by the plungers
and cannot be used for cross
wiring. Factory modified
circuit breakers are required
for this application. UL
File E38116.
Electrical Operator
The electrical (solenoid)
operator is a single solenoid
mechanism that enables local
and remote circuit breaker
ON, OFF, and reset
switching. The electrical
operator is mounted on the
circuit breaker cover within
the trimline of the circuit
breaker. The electrical
operator uses a unique
bi-stable latch that allows
the device to operate using
one solenoid. The accessory
provides high-speed
switching with a maximum
operating time of 5 cycles
(80 mS), making it suitable
for generator synchronizing
applications.
Means are provided for
remote electrical operation
and for local manual
operation. A special slide
includes provisions for
padlocking the circuit breaker
handle in the OFF position.
The slide will accept three
padlock shackles with a
maximum diameter of
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each.
An interlock electrically
disconnects the solenoid
when the electrical operator
cover is removed. The rating
data tables provide electrical
rating data for the electrical
(solenoid) operator.
V4-T2-304 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
The electrical (motor) operator
allows the circuit’s breaker to
be opened, closed or reset
remotely. It also has a lock-off
capability and provisions for
manual operation.
The electrical (motor)
operator contains a reversible
motor connected to a ball
screw. The ball screw drives
the circuit breaker handle.
Limit switches and relays are
used to control the motor.
Plug-In Adapters
Plug-in adapters simplify
installation and front removal
of circuit breakers. Individual
line and load plug-in
adapters are available for
rear connection applications
on two-, three-, and four-pole
circuit breakers. Common
mounting plates for line-
and load-end adapters
are available.
One plug-in adapter kit is
required for line-end and
one for load-end.
Plug-in adapters are
UL approved unless
otherwise noted.
Rear Connecting Studs
Rear connecting studs are
available in several sizes to
accommodate specific fixed-
mounted circuit breaker
applications.
Each rear connecting stud
assembly consists of one stud
and one tube. To maintain
proper clearances between
poles, select alternate long
and short stud assemblies for
circuit breakers with more
than one pole. One assembly
is required for line-end and
one for load-end of each pole.
Tubes must be ordered
separately. Connecting studs
are available only with English
thread sizes.
Note: Not UL listed.
Panelboard Connecting Straps
Panelboard connecting straps
are used to connect the
circuit breaker terminals to
the panelboard bus. The
panelboard connecting straps
are available with various
ratings for outside and center
poles. (Field installation only.)
Panelboard connecting straps
are available to meet the
needs of most standard
panelboard applications.
Style numbers for mounting
brackets for CDP panelboard
installations are also included.
Note: Not UL listed. Refer to
panelboard manufacturer for
compatibility.
Type LFD Current Limiter
The LFD current limiter is an
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
FD thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker, providing 200,000 A
interrupting capacity at up to
600 Vac. LFD current limiters
for thermal-magnetic and
electronic circuit breakers
are listed with Underwriters
Laboratories under File
E47239.
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The ground fault alarm unit is
a remotely mounted device
with a combination indicating
light/test button that will light
when the breaker trips or
alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
requires a separate 120 Vac
power source to power the
light and the internal relay,
which has 1NO and 1NC
contacts for remote indication.
The ground fault alarm unit
can be panel mounted for
ordering with an optional face
mounting bracket. For use on
Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-
Frame.
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel
is a highly accurate,
microprocessor-based,
breaker-mounted device
designed to monitor power
and energy readings. It
represents an alternative to
watt meters, watt-hour
meters, and watt demand
meters. Key advantages
include savings in space,
lower installation costs, and
remote monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel
mounts on the load side
of a Series C F-Frame
(150 ampere) circuit breaker.
It can be applied on three-
phase, four-wire systems,
or single-phase, three-wire
systems with voltage
connected through
Phases A and C.
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
Potential Transformer Module
The potential transformer
module is required for the
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to
provide a voltage input to
allow the trip unit to monitor
power and energy as well as
power factor. The potential
transformer module is a 6 VA
transformer with a primary
voltage input of up to 600 volt
line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
fuses are provided on the
primary of the transformer
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
testing. The device is
normally panel mounted
and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
trip units.
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable
Test Kit
The solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit provides
verification of performance
of all ratings of Digitrip 310
electronic trip units installed
in circuit breakers while in
service under varying load
and/or phase imbalance. The
test kit operates on 120-volt,
50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and test
times for testing long time,
short time/instantaneous
operation and optional
ground fault operation of
the circuit breaker.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-305
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) is a panel mounted
user interface device that is
mounted on the front of an
electrical assembly or at a
remote location. The BIM is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
for OPTIM trip units and other
devices. The BIM consists of
four display windows, eight
function buttons, 18 LEDs,
and a graphical time/current
curve to provide breaker
status, operational
information, protection
status and energy monitoring.
A 24 Vdc power supply is
required to provide power
to the BIM. This is supplied
by the switchboard builder
to Eaton’s specifications.
The BIM is a member of
Eaton’s PowerNet family of
communicating devices that
connects OPTIM trip units,
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip
units and energy sentinels
as a subnetwork system.
The BIM can also be
connected to a main
network via a PONI module
to PowerNet software.
Digitrip OPTIMizer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a
hand-held programmer that
is used to access, configure,
test and display information
from OPTIM trip units. The
OPTIMizer plugs into the
front of an OPTIM trip unit via
an eight-pin telephone jack
and is powered by a nine-volt
battery or the auxiliary power
module. One highlighted
feature is the “Copy” and
“Download” commands.
Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in
minutes and with no errors.
An Auxiliary Power Module
connection provides a trip test
when control power is not
present at the breaker. The
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
standard package to include
the programmer, the eight-
pin connection cord, battery
and carrying case. The
auxiliary power module
is optional.
Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module
is a power supply requiring
120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz
that provides a 32 Vdc output.
The auxiliary power module
provides control power for
testing an OPTIM trip unit
when other means of control
power is not available or
for continuous OPTIMizer
operation versus temporary
with a battery. The auxiliary
power module connects
into the top of the Digitrip
OPTIMizer via a keyed
receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
power module would be for
the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM
breaker that ordinarily would
not have control power.
Cause of Trip Display/Remote
Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display
can be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
screen, such as cause of trip,
phrase current, ground current
and low loads. The display
is ideal for troubleshooting
common trips such as
ground fault, long delay, and
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
that is contained inside
the enclosure.
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
Note: The OPTIMizer can work
off of 32 Vdc control power,
although 24 Vdc is the standard
on OPTIM breakers.
V4-T2-306 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit
End Cap Kit
Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut
F-Frame Keeper Nut
K-Frame Keeper Nut
Note
L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded.
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK12
Metric M–5 KPEKM12
Three-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK1
Metric M–5 KPEKM1
Four-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Imperial 10–32 KPEK14
Metric M–5 KPEKM14
Three-Pole J-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK2
Metric M–8 KPEKM2
Four-Pole J-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK24
Metric M–8 KPEKM24
Three-Pole K-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK3
Metric M–8 KPEKM3
Four-Pole K-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34
Metric M–8 KPEKM34
Three-Pole L-Frame
Imperial 0.312-18 KPEK4
Metric M-8 KPEKM4
Four-Pole L-Frame
Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK44
Metric M–8 KPEKM44
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Catalog Number
Package of 12
(Priced Individually)
Imperial 10–32 KPR1A
Metric M–5 KPR1AM
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Line/Load
End
Catalog Number
Package of 3
Imperial 0.375–16 Line KPR3A
Load KPR3B
Metric M–8 Line KPR3AM
Load KPR3BM
End Cap Kit
F-Frame Keeper Nut
K-Frame Keeper Nut
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-307
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Termination Hardware
J-Frame Plug Nut
K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1
F-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2
J- and K-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
Notes
1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers.
2 Not for use with T250KB terminals.
3 Individually packed.
4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
5 Two-pole kit.
6 Three-pole kit.
7 Four-pole kit.
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Catalog Number
Package of 6
Imperial 0.250–20 PLN2
Metric M–6 PLN2M
Line/Load End
Catalog
Number
Line and load TAD3
Description
Maximum
Amperes
Catalog
Number
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. 150 FCWTK
225 FCWTK225
Description
Catalog
Number
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs. KCWTK
AWG Wire
Range/Number Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Al/Cu
3/0–350 kcmil (2)
95–150 TA602LDCW 3
Cu
250–350 kcmil (2)
120–250 T602LDCW 3
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240 2TA603LDKCW 45
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240 3TA603LDKCW 46
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240 4TA603LDKCW 47
J-Frame Plug Nut
K-Frame Terminal
Adapter
F-Frame Kit
J- and K-Frame Kit
V4-T2-308 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Termination Hardware
G-Frame Control Wire Terminal
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
Rear Fed Terminals
Base Mounting Hardware
Ordering Information
Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of
mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required.
Mounting Hardware
Notes
1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit.
Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.
2 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars.
Description
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Control wire terminal (kit of 12) 5652B38G01 GCWTK
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number 1
G-Frame 2
100 3 14–2 3TA100G3K
6 14–6 3TA100G6K
F-Frame
225 3 14–2 3TA150F3K
6 14–6 3TA150F6K
J-Frame
250 3 14–2 3TA250J3K
6 14–6 3TA250J6K
K-Frame
400 3 14–2/0 3TA400K3K
6 14–3 3TA400K6K
Frame
Maximum
Amperes
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Catalog
Number 1
FD 150 14–4/0 TA150FDRF
150 14–4/0 3TA150FDRF
225 6–300 kcmil TA225FDRF
225 6–300 kcmil 3TA225FDRF
KD 400 250–500 kcmil TA350KRF
400 250–500 kcmil 3TA350KRF
MDL 800 3/0 MAX (3) TA800MDLRF
800 3/0 MAX (3) 3TA800MDLRF
Screw Length in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
G-Frame
0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 624B375G23
0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm) 8703C80G05
Multiwire Connectors
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-309
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware
Metric Thread Mounting Hardware
Note
1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers.
Number
of Poles Description
Type of
Mounting
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
1 0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 624B375G01
Group 1624B375G02
2 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G01
3, 4 0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1
J-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2
K-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3
L-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4
M-Frame
2, 3 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5
N-Frame
2, 3, 4 0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH5
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
Number
of Poles Description
Type of
Mounting
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
1 M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 4218B80G09
Group 14218B80G10
2 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 4218B80G11
3, 4 M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M
J-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH2M
K-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M
L-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH4M
M-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH5M
N-Frame
2, 3 — Individual BMH5M
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
V4-T2-310 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Terminal Shields
G-Frame Terminal Shield
F-Frame Terminal Shield
J-Frame Terminal Shield
Number Units in Package
Catalog
Number
10 GTSK3
Number
of Poles Location
Standard (Package of 10)
(Priced Individually)
Special—For Use When Electrical
Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1Line625B229G06 —
2Line625B229G07 —
3Line625B229G08 4210B95G01
4Line625B229G09 4210B95G02
Number
of Poles Location
Catalog Number
(Package of 10)
2, 3 Line End 1266C07G01
4Line End6631C01G01
2, 3 Load End 6641C16G01
4 Load End 6641C16G02
F-Frame
J-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-311
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame Terminal Shield
L-Frame Terminal Shield
M-Frame Terminal Shield
N-Frame Terminal Shield
Terminal End Covers
Ordering Information
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering.
F-Frame Terminal End Covers
Interphase Barriers
Ordering Information
Two per package.
Interphase Barriers
Base Mounting Plate
Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC
DIN Rail Adapter
DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC
Key Operated Attachment
Key Operated Attachment
G-Frame GD/GHC
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP
Note
1 For use on three-pole breakers only.
Number
of Poles Location
Catalog Number
(Package of 10)
2, 3 Line TS33LN
4LineTS34LN
3 Load TS33LD
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
314C420G05
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
208B966G01
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
NTS3K
Conductor Opening
Diameter in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
0.25 (6.35 mm) TEC1
0.41 (10.41 mm) TEC2
K-Frame
F-Frame
Frame
Catalog
Number
FIPB1
J, K IPB3
LIPB4
MIPB4
NIPB5
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
1207B513G01
Number
of Poles
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
1, 2 10 1225C79G01
310 1225C79G02 1
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
10 GKOA
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
11294C01H01
Interphase Barrier
Base Mounting Plate
DIN Rail Adapter
Key Operated
Attachment
Lock Dog (Non-
Padlockable)
V4-T2-312 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Padlockable Handle
Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB
Padlockable Handle Lock
Padlockable Handle Lock
Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Notes
1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank.
2 Padlockable in the OFF position only.
Frame
Catalog
Number
FLKD1
J, K LKD3
L, M, N LKD4
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number 1
10 1223C77G03
10 1223C77G05 2
10 1223C77G06 2
Frame
Catalog
Number
GGPHBOFF
J, K PHB3
Frame
Catalog
Number
FPHL1
Non-Padlockable
Handle Block
Padlockable Handle
Padlockable Handle
Lock
Snap-On Padlockable
Handle Lock Hasp
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-313
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Cylinder Lock
Cylinder Lock
Note
1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF
position only, order either catalog number.
Description
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
Single-pole breakers PHL1
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK1
For left side mounting PLK1LOFF
For right side mounting PLK1ROFF
J, K-Frames
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK3
For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1
For right side mounting PLK3ROFF 1
L-Frame (Side Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1
L-Frame (Top Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF HLK4S
Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1
M-Frame
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1
M-Frame (Vertical Mounting)
Lock ON/OFF HLK4S
Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF
N-Frame
Side mounted PLK5
Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S
Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1
R-Frame
Lock ON/OFF HLK6
Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
Frame
Catalog
Number
F, J, K Order by description
Cylinder Lock
V4-T2-314 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Key Interlock Kit
Ordering Information
Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers.
Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or
through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match
the type of lock used.
Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock)
Note
1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be
10 mm in diameter
Lock
Manufacturer
Lock
Type
Bolt Projection in
Withdrawn Position
in Inches (mm)
Kit
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK1
Kirk®F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1
Castell 1K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1
J, K-Frames
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK3
Castell 1K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3
L-, M-, N-Frames
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYK4
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4
Castell 1K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK4
R-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
Kirk F 1.0 (25.4) KYK6
Castell 1K or QK 1.0 (25.4) CTK6
JG-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG
Castell 1K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKJG
LG-Frame
Superior B-4003-1 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG
Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG
Castell 1K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG
photo
position
Key Interlock Kit
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-315
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Sliding Bar Interlock
Ordering Information
The sliding bar interlock is
available for mounting
between two adjacent three-
pole circuit breakers with
circuit breakers centerline
spacing as indicated in table
and enclosure front panel
thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch
(3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field
installation only.)
Sliding Bar Interlock
Walking Beam Interlock
Ordering Information
The walking beam interlock is
available for mounting
between two adjacent circuit
breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4
mm) apart and having the
same pole configuration. The
two circuit breakers must be
factory modified to accept the
walking beam interlock
assembly (suitable for use
with either two-, three- or
four-pole circuit breakers).
With properly modified circuit
breakers, the walking beam
interlock is suitable for field
installation. Order circuit
breakers specifying
modification for walking beam
(20% price adder) and select
walking beam interlock from
table below. Circuit breakers
and walking beam interlock
are boxed and shipped
separately.
Walking Beam Interlock
Note
1 Three-pole only.
Frame
Centerline Spacing
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1
J 4.38 (111.3) SBK2
K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3
L, M 8.50 (215.9) SBK4
N 8.50 (215.9) SBK5
Sliding Bar Interlock
Frame
Catalog
Number
FWBL1
KWBL3
L, M WBL4A
N WBL5
R 1WBL6
Walking Beam
Interlock
V4-T2-316 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Electrical Operator
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM)
Note
1Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD
motor operators listed in table.
Voltage Frequency
Terminal Block 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
120 AC EOP1T07 EOP1P07
240 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11
Voltage Frequency
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD120C
24 DC MOPFD24D
125 DC MOPFD120C
208–240 50/60 Hz MOPFD240C
220–250 DC MOPFD240C
Operating
Voltage Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T07
240 50/60 Hz AC EOP2T11
Operating
Voltage Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT07
240 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT11
Frame
Catalog
Number
KBBMK3
Operating
Voltage Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz EOP4MT07
208 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11
240 50/60 Hz EOP4MT11A
480 50/60 Hz EOP4MT15
125 DC EOP4MT26
24 DC EOP4MT21
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-317
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
Plug-In Adapters
F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
Notes
1100 ampere maximum.
2Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker.
Operating
Voltage Frequency
Pigtail Leads
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz EOP5T07
208 50/60 Hz EOP5T09
240 50/60 Hz EOP5T11
480 50/60 Hz EOP5T15
24 DC EOP5T21
48 DC EOP5T22
125 DC EOP5T26
Operating
Voltage Frequency
Factory-Installed Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
120 50/60 Hz EOP6T08K
240 50/60 Hz EOP6T11K
48 DC EOP6T21K
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100–225 1480D13G01 1480D13G02 1480D13G07 1
Mounting plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 —
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Terminal
End
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
Line
1260C86G05 1260C86G06 1231C67G01
Load
1260C86G07 1260C86G08 1231C67G02
One line and one load
506C144G27 506C144G28
—
Mounting plate
—2
PMP23
—
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
400 PAD32 PAD33 —
Mounting plate 2PMP33 —
V4-T2-318 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type)
M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
N-Frame (Flat Bar Type)
Plug-In Adapters
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
600 (threaded stud type) 506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD44
600 (flat bar type) 1288C19G01 1288C19G02 6636C55H01
Mounting plate 504C824H01 504C824H01 —
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06
Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Two-Pole Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04
Mounting plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
Frame
Number of
Poles
Standard
Certification
Catalog
Number
FD 3 IEC PAD3F
FD 4 IEC PAD4F
JD 3 IEC PAD3JD
KD 3 IEC PAD3K
LD 3 IEC PAD3LD
LD 4 IEC PAD4LD
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-319
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Rear Connecting Studs
F-Frame 1
J-Frame 1
K-Frame 1
L-Frame Ordering Information
M-Frame Ordering Information 1
N-Frame Ordering Information 1
Note
1Not UL listed.
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Tube
Catalog
Number
For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H20
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H21
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H22
100 A short 451D874G01 32B9446H23
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H24
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H25
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H26
100 A long 451D874G02 32B9446H27
For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H06
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H07
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H08
225A short 374D883G01 374D883H09
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H10
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H11
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H12
225A long 374D883G02 374D883H13
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Tube
Catalog
Number
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H05
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H06
250A short 5010D23G01 456D983H07
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H05
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H06
250A long 5010D23G02 5010D23H07
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Standard Tube
Catalog
Number
400 A short 6642C14G02 313C909H17
400 A short 6642C14G04 313C909H18
400 A short 6642C14G06 313C909H19
400 A long 6642C14G03 313C909H20
400 A long 6642C14G05 313C909H21
400 A long 6642C14G07 313C909H22
Stud Catalog
Number
314C960G07
314C960G08
314C960G09
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
225 314C960G01
400 314C960G04
400 314C960G05
400 314C960G06
600 314C960G07
600 314C960G08
600 314C960G09
800 314C960G10
800 314C960G11
800 314C960G12
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
800 623B222G01
800 623B222G02
800 623B222G03
1200 373B375G04
1200 373B375G03
V4-T2-320 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Panelboard Connecting Straps
F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
F-Frame Mounting Bracket
J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
K-Frame Mounting Bracket
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2.75 (69.9) 50 673B142G02 673B142G09
2.75 (69.9) 100 673B142G02 673B142G10
2.75 (69.9) 150 673B142G04 673B142G03
3.50 (88.9) 50 1253C72G01 1253C72G03
3.50 (88.9) 100 1253C73G03 1253C73G06
3.50 (88.9) 150 1253C73G01 1253C73G05
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2624B600H02
3624B600H01
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3.50 (88.9) 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3.50 (88.9) 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2, 3 208B264H01
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-321
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
L-Frame Mounting Bracket
M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
M-Frame Mounting Bracket
N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Center Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
600 624B609G01 506C052G01
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2, 3 208B297H01
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Connector
Type
Pole Connector Type
Catalog
Number
3.50 (88.9) 800 Short 314C996G01
Medium 314C996G02
Long 314C996G03
Catalog
Number
315C270H01
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Connector
Type
Pole Connector Type
Catalog
Number
3.50 (88.9) 1200 Short 505C606G04
Medium 505C606G05
Long 505C606G06
Catalog
Number
315C270H01
V4-T2-322 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type LFD Current Limiter
The LFD current limiter is an
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
FD thermal-magnetic and
electronic circuit breaker,
providing 200,000 A
interrupting capacity at up to
600 Vac. LFD current limiters
for thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories
under File E47239.
Type LFD Current Limiter
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The ground fault alarm unit is
a remotely mounted device
with a combination indicating
light/test button that will light
when the breaker trips or
alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
requires a separate 120 Vac
power source to power the
light and the internal relay,
which has 1NO and 1NC
contacts for remote
indication. The ground fault
alarm unit can be panel
mounted for ordering with an
optional face mounting
bracket. For use on Digitrip
310 only, K- through N-Frame.
GF Alarm Unit
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel
is a highly accurate,
microprocessor-based,
breaker-mounted device
designed to monitor power
and energy readings. It
represents an alternative to
watt meters, watt-hour
meters, and watt demand
meters. Key advantages
include savings in space,
lower installation costs, and
remote monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel
mounts on the load side of a
Series C F-Frame (150
ampere) circuit breaker. It can
be applied on three-phase,
four-wire systems, or single-
phase, three-wire systems
with voltage connected
through Phases A and C.
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
Circuit Breaker
Rating Amperes
Catalog
Number
15–70 LFD3070R
80–160 LFD3150R
Type LFD Current
Limiter
Description
Catalog
Number
Ground fault alarm unit GFAU
Face mounting bracket 1264C67G01
Ground Fault Alarm
Unit
Potential Transformer Module
The potential transformer
module is required for the
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to
provide a voltage input to
allow the trip unit to monitor
power and energy as well as
power factor. The potential
transformer module is a 6 VA
transformer with a primary
voltage input of up to 600 volt
line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
fuses are provided on the
primary of the transformer
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
testing. The device is
normally panel mounted
and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
trip units.
Potential Transformer Module
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit
The solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit provides
verification of performance of
all ratings of Digitrip 310
electronic trip units installed
in circuit breakers while in
service under varying load
and/or phase imbalance. The
test kit operates on 120-volt,
50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and
test times for testing long
time, short time/
instantaneous operation
and optional ground fault
operation of the circuit
breaker.
Portable Test Kit
Description
Catalog
Number
Potential transformer module DOPTMLN
Potential Transformer
Module
Description
Catalog
Number
Solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit
STK2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-323
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) is a panel mounted
user interface device that is
mounted on the front of an
electrical assembly or at a
remote location. The BIM is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
for OPTIM trip units and other
devices. The BIM consists of
four display windows, eight
function buttons, 18 LEDs,
and a graphical time/current
curve to provide breaker
status, operational
information, protection status
and energy monitoring. A 24
Vdc power supply is required
to provide power to the BIM.
This is supplied by the
switchboard builder to
Eaton’s specifications. The
BIM is a member of Eaton’s
PowerNet family of
communicating devices that
connects OPTIM trip units,
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip
units and energy sentinels as
a subnetwork system. The
BIM can also be connected to
a main network via a PONI
module to PowerNet
software.
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
Digitrip OPTIMizer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a
hand-held programmer that is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
from OPTIM trip units. The
OPTIMizer plugs into the
front of an OPTIM trip unit via
an eight-pin telephone jack
and is powered by a nine-volt
battery or the auxiliary power
module. One highlighted
feature is the “Copy” and
“Download” commands.
Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in
minutes and with no errors.
An Auxiliary Power Module
connection provides a trip test
when control power is not
present at the breaker. The
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
standard package to include
the programmer, the eight-
pin connection cord, battery
and carrying case. The
auxiliary power module is
optional.
Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply
A 24 Vdc power supply is
required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip
units that are required to
communicate either on the main
Eaton PowerNet network or as a
subnetwork to a BIM. The
breaker’s load is 45 mA of current.
Typically one power supply is
required per switchboard and can
provide control power to a BIM
and the OPTIM trip units. The 24
Vdc power supply should be an
“isolated high quality” power
supply with a “CE” label, and is
normally provided by the
switchboard manufacturer to
Eaton’s recommendations.
Digitrip OPTIMizer
Catalog
Number
BIMII
Breaker Interface
Module (BIM)
Catalog
Number
OPTIMizer—standard package
Digitrip OPTIMizer
Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module is
a power supply requiring 120
Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that
provides a 32 Vdc output. The
auxiliary power module
provides control power for
testing an OPTIM trip unit
when other means of control
power is not available or for
continuous OPTIMizer
operation versus temporary
with a battery. The auxiliary
power module connects into
the top of the Digitrip
OPTIMizer via a keyed
receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
power module would be for
the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM
breaker that ordinarily would
not have control power.
Auxiliary Power Module
Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display can
be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
screen, such as cause of trip,
phrase current, ground
current and low loads. The
display is ideal for
troubleshooting common
trips such as ground fault,
long delay, and
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
that is contained inside the
enclosure.
Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount
Cause of Trip Display
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground) via
LED indication. The module is
reset after the breaker is
reset.
Cause of Trip LED Module
Catalog
Number
PRTBAPMDV
Auxiliary Power
Module
Catalog
Number
DIGIVIEW
DIGIVIEWR06
Catalog
Number
TRIP-LED
V4-T2-324 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame)
NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1
Series C Rotary Accessories
As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control
panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker.
This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and
comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads.
Series C Auxiliary Switch
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number 2
4 (101.6) C361KJ4
6 (152.4) C361KJ6
Roller Latch 3C361KR
Catalog
Number
5108A61G01
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to
prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed.
Wire Seal
Notes
1Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
required for assembly.
2The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
with these kits.
3Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is
required.
Description
Catalog
Number
Wire seal 5108A03H01
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-325
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
Electrical Operator
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
168j
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop
Notes
1UL listed under UL File E64983.
2The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations.
3Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
4Use current-limiting type fuse where required.
5UL listed under UL File E64124.
6Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
7Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
8The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations.
9Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS).
jMaximum operating time: 12 cycles.
kThe electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations.
lMaximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
mOperator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not
exceed one per minute.
nElectric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn
breaker OFF–1/2 second max.
oMotor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply.
pA minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation.
qApplied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage.
For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required.
Voltage 3Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes
Maximum
Operating Time
Fuse
Amperes 4
120 50/60 Hz AC 10 5 cycles (80 ms) 3
240 50/60 Hz AC 5 5 cycles (80 ms) 2
Voltage 3Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes
120 AC 2
24 DC 5
48 DC 3
125 DC 2
Voltage 3
Inrush Current
Amperes
Fuse
Amperes
120 30 6
240 16 4
Operating
Voltage 3
Inrush Current
Amperes
Fuse
Amperes
120 30 6
240 16 4
Operating Voltage 3Inrush Current Amperes
120 AC 31
208 AC 13
240 AC 12
125 DC 21
24 DC 50
Operating
Voltage 3Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes
Fuse
Amperes
120 50/60 Hz 31 6
208 50/60 Hz 21 —
240 50/60 Hz 19 4
480 50/60 Hz — —
24 DC 50 —
48 DC 80 —
125 DC 21 —
Operating
Voltage qFrequency
Motor Inrush Current
Amperes
120 50/60 Hz 40
240 50/60 Hz 27
48 DC 53
24 DC 58
V4-T2-326 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Rear Connecting Studs
F-Frame 1
F-Frame
Note
1Not UL listed.
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube
Catalog
Number
Dimensions
ABC DEF
For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers
100 A short 451D874G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 32B9446H20 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short 451D874G01 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 32B9446H21 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short 451D874G01 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 32B9446H22 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short 451D874G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 32B9446H23 — 3.63 (92.1) 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 32B9446H24 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 32B9446H25 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 32B9446H26 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long 451D874G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 32B9446H27 6.13 (155.6) — 0.31 (7.9)–18
For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
225A short 374D883G01 1.00 (25.4) 1.06 (26.9) — 374D883H06 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short 374D883G01 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) 1.38 (34.9) — 374D883H07 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short 374D883G01 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) 1.69 (42.9) — 374D883H08 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short 374D883G01 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) 2.00 (50.8) — 374D883H09 — 4.25 (108.0) 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long 374D883G02 1.00 (25.4) — 3.44 (87.3) 374D883H10 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long 374D883G02 0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8) — 3.75 (95.2) 374D883H11 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long 374D883G02 0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9) — 4.06 (103.1) 374D883H12 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long 374D883G02 0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9) — 4.38 (111.3) 374D883H13 7.50 (190.5) — 0.44 (11.1)–14
E
B
AC
D
Mounting Panel
Breaker Mounting
Surface
“F” Thread
.75
(19.1)
.06
(1.5)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-327
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
J-Frame
K-Frame 1
Note
1Not UL listed.
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness Tube Length Tube
Catalog
NumberABC
250A short 5010D23G01 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.4) — 456D983H05
250A short 5010D23G01 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) 1.09 (27.7) — 456D983H06
250A short 5010D23G01 0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7) 1.03 (26.2) — 456D983H07
250A long 5010D23G02 0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4) — 3.88 (98.6) 5010D23H05
250A long 5010D23G02 0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1) — 4.13 (104.9) 5010D23H06
250A long 5010D23G02 0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7) — 4.38 (111.3) 5010D23H07
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness Tube Length Standard Tube
Catalog
Number
Dimensions
ABC DEF
400 A short 6642C14G02 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) 0.84 (21.3) — 313C909H17 — 3.66 (93.0) 0.75–16 (19.1–406.4)
400 A short 6642C14G04 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) 1.09 (27.69) — 313C909H18 ———
400 A short 6642C14G06 0.25–0.5 (6.35–12.7) 1.03 (26.16) — 313C909H19 ———
400 A long 6642C14G03 0.75–1 (19.1–25.4) — 3.78 (96.0) 313C909H20 ———
400 A long 6642C14G05 0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4) — 4.03 (102.4) 313C909H21 6.58 (167.1) — —
400 A long 6642C14G07 0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7) — 4.28 (108.7) 313C909H22 ———
Mounting Panel
Do Not Use More
Than 10 Ft Lbs
Torque to Tighten Nuts
C
A
0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread
Breaker
B
6.66
(169.2)
0.06
(1.5)
0.59
(15.0)
1.59
(40.4)
0.03
(0.7)
0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread
3.63
(92.2)
Mounting Panel
Breaker Mounting
Surface
“F” Thread
C
A
D
B
E
0.06
(1.5)
1.67
(42.4)
V4-T2-328 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
L-Frame
M-Frame
N-Frame
Stud Length (A)
Stud Catalog
Number
5.47 (138.9) 314C960G07
7.97 (202.4) 314C960G08
10.47 (265.9) 314C960G09
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter
and
Thread
Extension
Back of
Breaker
Stud
Catalog
Number
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G06
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G09
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G10
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.0) 314C960G12
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter
and
Thread
Extension
Back of
Breaker
Stud
Catalog
Number
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.5 (139.7) 623B222G01
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 8.0 (203.2) 623B222G02
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 10.5 (266.7) 623B222G03
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.5 (139.7) 373B375G04
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 10.5 (266.7) 373B375G03
A
Insulators
Nut
Rear
Connecting
Stud
Washer
Insulating Panel
Circuit Breaker
.44
(11.2)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-329
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames
Contents
Description Page
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-330
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-330
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-332
Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-332
Line and Load Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-332
Optional Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-332
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-333
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-334
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-332
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-335
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications.
Product Overview
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames
15–800 Amperes
NEMA 480 Vac
Eaton’s Definite Purpose
molded case circuit breakers
are available in three-pole
configurations, and are
designed to meet the specific
requirements of HVAC/R
and pumping applications.
As with other members of
Eaton’s family of molded
case circuit breakers, Definite
Purpose breakers provide
high quality, reliability,
unmatched performance
and outstanding value.
Eaton’s Definite Purpose
breakers are rated from 15–
800 A and are available in five
frame sizes. Each frame size
has the same compact
outside dimensions as
Series C breakers.
Additionally, Definite Purpose
breakers have been
rigorously tested to the
UL 489 standard. They
are assembled in an ISO
certified facility.
Trip Units and Terminals
Definite Purpose breakers
contain factory-sealed
thermal-magnetic trip units.
The GP-Frame breaker
(15–100 A) includes line and
load terminals and breaker
mounting hardware.
FP (15–225A), KP (200–
400 A), LP (450–600 A) and
MP (700–800 A) Frames ship
standard without mounting
hardware. For line and load
terminals, add “L” to the end
of the catalog number or “W”
for no terminals.
External Accessories
Definite Purpose breakers
use the same external
accessories as Series C
breakers: handle
mechanisms, motor
operators, lock-off devices,
busbar extensions and
multiple terminal
arrangements.
V4-T2-330 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Product Selection Guide
Electrical Characteristics
Breaker Type GPS FPS FPH KPS KPH
Amperage range 15–100 A 15–225A 15–225A 200–400 A 200–400 A
Performance level SSHSH
Breaker capacity (kA rms) 240 Vac 65 65 100 65 100
NEMA, UL, CSA480 Vac2235653565
600 Vac — 18 25 25 35
Number of poles 33333
Maximum voltage (Vac) 480 600 600 600 600
Thermal-magnetic ■■■■■
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-331
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Electrical Characteristics, continued
Breaker Type LPS LPH MPS MPH
Amperage range 450–600 A 450–600 A 700–800 A 700–800 A
Performance level SHSH
Breaker capacity (kA rms) 240 Vac 65 100 65 100
NEMA, UL, CSA 480 Vac 35 65 50 65
600 Vac25352535
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Maximum voltage (Vac) 600 600 600 600
Thermal-magnetic ■■■■
V4-T2-332 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Features
Base Mounting Hardware
English base mounting
hardware is included with
GP frame only. For all other
frames, order base mounting
hardware separately as per
the table to the right.
Line and Load Terminals
Both line and load terminals
are included with GP-Frame
Definite Purpose breakers.
For all other frames, add “L”
for line and load terminals
to be included or “W” for
no terminals.
Accessories
End Cap Accessory Kit
End caps for line and load
conductor termination are
optional with each breaker.
End caps secure the
conductor with a ring-type
connector. The kit includes
one end cap, three cap
screws, three nuts and three
lock washers.
Series C Accessories
For internal accessories, see
Page V4-T2-271.
For external accessories, see
Page V4-T2-302.
Base Mounting Hardware
Note: Base mounting hardware, is included with GP-Frame breakers.
A separate catalog number is not required.
Line and Load Termination
Optional Line and Load Terminals
Note
1Package of three terminals.
End Cap Accessory Kit
Frame
Catalog Number
English Metric
GP Included —
FP BMH1 BMH1M
KP BMH3 BMH3M
LP BMH4 BMH4M
MP BMH5 BMH5M
Breaker
Termination
Type
Awg Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm)
Wire
Type
Bolt Size
English
Bolt Size
Metric
Torque
Lb–In
Torque
Nm
Catalog
Number
GP Wire #14–1/0 2.5–50 Cu only — — 45 5.1 Included
Breaker
Maximum
Amperes
Awg Wire
Range
Wire
Type
Catalog
Number
Catalog Number
with Control Wire
Termination
FP 100 #14–#10 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1—
100 #8 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1—
100 #6–#4 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1—
100 #3–4/0 Cu/Al 3T100FB 1—
200 #3–4/0 Cu only 3T150FB 1—
225 #4–4/0 Cu/Al 3TA225FB 1—
225 #6–300 Cu/Al 3TA225FDK 1—
KP 400 250–500 (1) Cu/Al TA350K —
400 3/0–250 (2) Cu/Al 3TA400K 13TA400KCW
LP 500 250–350 (2) Cu/Al TA602LD TA602LDCW
600 400–500 (2) Cu/Al 3TA603LDK 13TA603LDKCW
MP 800 3/0–400 (3) Cu/Al TA800MA2 TA800MA2CWT
800 500–750 (2) Cu/Al TA801MA TA801MACWT
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-333
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Notes
1Not available on GP-Frame.
2When choosing a molded case switch, select the highest amperage rating for the frame and the standard interrupting rating.
Frame Size
GP = GP-Frame
FP = FP-Frame
KP = KP-Frame
LP = LP-Frame
MP = LP-Frame
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
GP-Frame FP-Frame KP-Frame LP-Frame MP-Frame
015 = 15A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A
030 = 30 A
035 = 35A
040 = 40 A
045 = 45A
050 = 50 A
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
080 = 80 A
090 = 80 A
100 = 100 A
015 = 15A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A
030 = 30 A
035 = 35A
040 = 40 A
045 = 45A
050 = 50 A
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
080 = 80 A
100 = 100 A
110 = 110 A
125 = 125A
150 = 150 A
175 = 175A
200 = 200 A
225 = 225A
175 = 175A
200 = 200 A
250 = 250 A
300 = 300 A
400 = 400 A
450 = 450 A
500 = 500 A
600 = 600 A
700 = 700 A
800 = 800 A
Options
K = Molded case switch 2
L = Line and load terminals
W = Without terminals or
mounting hardware 1
Interrupting Rating
S = Standard
H = High 1
FP S 3 150 L
V4-T2-334 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Product Selection
Catalog Numbers
When ordering Definite Purpose breakers, use the appropriate
catalog numbers given below.
GP-Frame/15–100 A
Note: All GP frames come standard with line and load terminals
and base mounting hardware. Not available without terminals.
FP-Frame/15–225 A
Note: At the end of catalog number, add “L” for terminals or “W”
for no terminals.
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
GP/15–100 A circuit breakers GPS3015
GPS3020
GPS3025
GPS3030
GPS3035
GPS3040
GPS3045
GPS3050
GPS3060
GPS3070
GPS3080
GPS3090
GPS3100
GP/100 A molded case switch GPS3100K
GP 100
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
FP/15–225A circuit breakers FPS3015
FPS3020
FPS3025
FPS3030
FPS3035
FPS3040
FPS3045
FPS3050
FPS3060
FPS3070
FPS3080
FPS3090
FPS3100
FPS3110
FPS3125
FPS3150
FPS3175
FPS3200
FPS3225
FPH3015
FPH3020
FPH3025
FPH3030
FPH3035
FPH3040
FPH3045
FPH3050
FPH3060
FPH3070
FPH3080
FPH3090
FPH3100
FPH3110
FPH3125
FPH3150
FPH3175
FPH3200
FPH3225
FP/225A molded case switch FPS3225K
FP 225
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-335
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
KP-Frame/200–400 A
LP-Frame/450–600 A
MP-Frame/700–800 A
Note: For KP, LP, MP frames above, add “L” for terminals or W”
for no terminals to end of catalog number.
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
KP/175–400 A circuit breakers KPS3175
KPS3200
KPS3250
KPS3300
KPS3400
KPH3175
KPH3200
KPH3250
KPH3300
KPH3400
KP/400 A molded case switch KPS3400K
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
LP/450–600 A circuit breakers LPS3450
LPS3500
LPS3600
LPH3450
LPH3500
LPH3600
LP/600 A molded case switch LPS3600K
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
MP/700–800 A circuit breakers MPS3700
MPS3800
MPH3700
MPH3800
MP/800 A molded case switch MPS3800K
KP 250
LP 400
MP 800
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used
for construction purposes unless approved.
Contact Eaton for detailed outline drawings.
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Definite Purpose Frames
Breaker Type
GP FP KP LP MP
Width 3.00 (76.2) 4.13 (104.9) 5.49 (139.4) 8.25 (209.6) 8.25 (209.6)
Height 4.88 (124.0) 6.00 (152.4) 10.12 (257.0) 10.75 (273.1) 16.00 (406.4)
Depth 2.63 (66.7) 3.38 (85.9) 4.31 (109.6) 3.81 (96.8) 4.06 (103.1)
V4-T2-336 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Metering and Communications
Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU
PM3 Modules
Contents
Description Page
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-337
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-337
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-338
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
Product Description
The PM3 is the perfect
solution for main, branch
circuit and standalone
monitoring/metering
applications. With information
at your fingertips, you can
meter, monitor and
communicate phase current
and voltage with calculated
power and energy.
The PM3 is versatile, as it
connects to the load side of
a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) and communicates
easily to a local network or
the Internet through Eaton
Power Xpert® Gateways
(PXGs). Cost of ownership
is reduced through ease of
installation. The PM3 is
your ideal MCCB
metering solution.
Application Description
●Communications via
Modbus® and Eaton’s
INCOM™ protocol;
compatible with Eaton’s
PXG for Web page and
Ethernet capabilities
●Works in 240 Vac PM3,
480 Vac and 600 Vac
applications
●480 Vac PM3 has
internal power supply
to power electronics
●600 Vac PM3 requires
24 Vdc auxiliary power
●Seamlessly integrates with
thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units
Features and Benefits
●Communicates electrical
system data and circuit
breaker status
●Calculates power and
energy to an accuracy of
1.0% of reading
●Configurable with thermal-
magnetic or electronic
trip units
●Suitable for reverse-feed
applications
●Easy to install
PM3 Benefits When Combined
with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
●Alarming: high load and
ground fault
●Zone selective interlocking
●Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System™
●Cause-of-trip localized
information through
Digiview and TRIP-LED
●Modbus/INCOM
communications
●HMI connectivity
through PXG
●Current and voltage
metering to 0.5% of
reading
●Power and energy
monitoring to 1.0%
of reading
●Reduces cost of ownership
Standards and Certifications
●Meets ANSI C12.1
revenue grade standard
with a current and
voltage accuracy of
0.5% of reading
●UL 489, Annex J
●IEC 61000-4-2—ESD
●IEC 61000-4-4—EFT
●IEC 61000-4-5—SURGE
●IEC 61000-4-6—EMC
●ANSI C12.1 (1% accuracy)
●UL/cUL/CE
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-337
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Metering and Communications
Product Selection
PM3 Modules
End Cap Kits
(Sold Separately)
Technical Data and
Specifications
Metered parameters
●IA, IB, IC
●VAB, VBC, VCA, Van, Vbn, Vcn
●Apparent Energy, Forward
Real Energy, Reverse Real
Energy, Net Real Energy,
Lagging Reactive Energy,
Leading Reactive Energy,
Net Reactive Energy
●Apparent Power A, B, C;
Apparent Power Total;
Reactive Power A, B, C;
Reactive Power Total; Real
Power A, B, C;
Real Power Total
●Frequency, Apparent
Power Factor, Apparent
PFA, Apparent PFB,
Apparent PFC
Frame
Catalog Number
480 V 600 V
Modbus
FD — PM3FM
JG —PM3JM
KD and LG —PM3LM
INCOM
FD PM3FI480 PM3FI600
JG PM3JI480 PM3JI600
KD and LG PM3LI480 PM3LI600
Frame Description
Catalog
Number
FD Metric end cap kit
for F-Frame
KPEKM1
English end cap kit
for F-Frame
KPEK1
JG Metric end cap kit
for JG-Frame
FJ3RTWK
English end cap kit
for JG-Frame
FJ3RTDK
KD Metric end cap kit
for K-Frame
KPEKM3
English end cap kit
for K-Frame
KPEK3
LG Metric end cap kit
for LG-Frame
L3RTWK
PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications for
Modbus RTU
Description Specification
Current Inputs
Pickup current 0.3A rms
Maximum reported current FD/JG 250 A rms
KD/LD 630 A rms
Accuracy 0.5% of reading
Voltage Inputs
Range Line-to-neutral 30–366 Vac
Line-to-line 52–635 Vac
Supported systems Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral
Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems
Input impedance 996 kiloohm/phase
Burden per phase 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600 V;
0.014 VA at 120V
Phase voltage connections Internal via screw terminal to busbar
For wye system, a neutral is required to be connected to the PM3 on the
right Phoenix connector.
Neutral connection If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral
based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage.
The system voltage must be balanced for this to be accurate.
Frequency
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Accuracy ± 0.1 Hz
Resolution 0.1 Hz
Power and Energy
Accuracy 1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 V.
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature –20 °C to +50 °C
Storage temperature –20 °C to +50 °C
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH noncondensing
Sensing Method
Voltage, current True rms
Sampling rate 13.02K samples per second
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA 1.03 sec at 60 Hz
All other parameters 1.07 sec at 60 Hz
Power Supply (External)
DC voltage 18–30 Vdc
Maximum current 30.0 mA at 24 Vdc
Burden 0.72W
Standard Communication Format
Connection type Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
Com port baud rate 9600 or 19,200 bauds Default: 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range 01–247
Data format Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8, Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1) Default: 8, N, 2
Protocols Modbus RTU
Internal termination resistor
selectable ON or OFF
Via DIP switch Default: Enabled
V4-T2-338 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Metering and Communications
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights
1.38
(35.1) 0.69
(17.5) Line End
2.88
(73.2)
4.50
(114.3)
9.53
(242.1)
11.00
(279.4)
6.00
(152.4)
3.63
(92.2)
C
LHandle
Load End
2.06
(52.3)
4.13 (104.9)
3.94 (100.1)
3.42
(86.9)
3.34
(84.8)
3.50 (88.9)
3.39
(86.1)
3.19
(81.0)
123456789101112131415
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y
S
E
A
L
E
D
O
N
123456
On
Off
3.63
(92.2)
C
LHandle
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module Tx Rx STATUS
Settings Network Address
O
N
ON 123456
123456
MODBUS
Power
A
B
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc (–)
Bell Alarm
Aux. Alarm
COM
COM
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
1.72
(43.7) 0.86
(21.8) Line End
4.92
(125.0)
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4) 13.83
(351.3)
10.13
(257.3)
5.77
(146.6)
C
LHandle
Load End
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
4.88 (124.0)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.81
(96.8)
On/I
Off/O
5.77
(146.6)
C
LHandle
O
N
123456
O
N
O
F
F
PUSH TO
TRIP
1.38
(35.1) 0.69
(17.5) Line End
3.17
(80.5)
5.50
(139.7)
10.50
(266.7) 12.00
(304.8)
7. 0 0
(177.8)
3.95
(100.3)
C
LHandle
Load End
2.06
(52.3)
4.13 (104.9)
4.41 (112.0)
3.42
(86.9)
3.34
(84.8)
3.57 (90.7)
3.44
(87.4)
3.34
(84.8)
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y
S
E
A
L
E
D
3.95
(100.3)
C
LHandle
123456789101112131415
123456789101112131415
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module Tx Rx STATUS
Settings Network Address
O
N
ON 123456
123456
MODBUS
Power
A
B
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc (–)
Bell Alarm
Aux. Alarm
COM
COM
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
1.72
(43.7) 0.86
(21.8) Line End
4.73
(120.1)
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4) 13.82
(351.0)
10.13
(257.3)
5.58
(141.7)
C
L
Handle
Load End
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
5.43 (137.9)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
5.58
(141.7)
C
L
Handle
Description Frame Dimensions and Weights
Weight in lbs (kg) FD 1.26 (0.57)
JG 1.60 (0.73)
KD/LG 2.25 (1.02)
Basic unit in inches (mm) FD 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
JG 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG 5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm) FD/JG 8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
KD/LG 6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-339
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-340
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-341
Accessories Selection Guide and
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-343
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-343
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-344
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-344
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . V4-T2-410
Learn
Online
Drawings
Online
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Product Description
Eaton’s engine generator
molded case circuit breakers
are designed specifically for
application on diesel engine
powered standby generators
where high interrupting
circuit breakers are not
required. The JG through NG
breakers are equipped with a
special trip unit, that includes
standard thermal (overload)
protection and special low
magnetic pickup range (FG
includes a fixed thermal-
magnetic pickup). The
standard thermal trip unit
provides overload protection
for conductors per the
National Electrical Code®. The
low magnetic pickup range is
approximately two to five
times the continuous rating
and provides closer low-level
short-circuit protection when
applied on generators that
have very low short-circuit
capacity. This combination
allows the user to customize
the breaker to the generator
output.
Application Description
Engine generator circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed application.
Standards and Certifications
Engine generator molded
case circuit breakers are
designed to conform with the
following standards:
●Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489, Molded
Case Circuit Breakers and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
File E7819
●Canadian Standards
Association Standard
C22.2 No. 5, Service
Entrance and Branch Circuit
Breakers
●International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
947-2, Circuit Breakers
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
V4-T2-340 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented
only as an aid to
understanding catalog
numbers. It is not to be used
to build catalog numbers for
circuit breakers.
●FG breakers include both
line and load side terminals
●JG, KG, LG and NG
breakers with W catalog
number suffix do not
include any terminals
●JG, KG, LG and NG
breakers without W catalog
number suffix include both
line and load terminals
●Contact Eaton for
additional ratings and
internal/external accessories
●Reverse feed
Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG
Frame
FG
JG
KG
LG
NG
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Trip Amperes
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
Suffix
W = Without terminals
FG 3 100 W
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-341
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
The following table lists FG
through NG engine generator
breakers with the maximum
generator kVA and kW rating.
Engine generator breakers
are applied at 115% of the
generator full load current
rating (FLA). The maximum
kW rating is based on three-
phase generators at 80%
power factor.
Thermal-Magnetic
Notes
1Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
4Breaker includes line and load terminals.
5Without terminals.
The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
Magnetic
Pickup Range
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
Engine Generator
Breaker 3
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Catalog
NumberkVA 1kW 2kVA 1kW 2kVA 1kW 2
Fixed 5 4 11 9 14 11 FG3015 4
Fixed7 6 14121814FG3020 4
Fixed9 7 18142318FG3025 4
Fixed 11 9 22 17 27 22 FG3030 4
Fixed131025203225FG3035 4
Fixed141229233629FG3040 4
Fixed161332264132FG3045 4
Fixed181436294536FG3050 4
Fixed221743355443FG3060 4
Fixed252051406351FG3070 4
Fixed292358467258FG3080 4
Fixed322665528165FG3090 4
Fixed362972589072FG3100 4
Fixed403279649979FG3110 4
Fixed4536907211390FG3125 4
Fixed 54 43 108 87 135 108 FG3150 4
Fixed 63 51 126 101 158 126 FG3175 4
Fixed 72 58 144 116 181 144 FG3200 4
Fixed 81 65 162 130 203 162 FG3225 4
350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175W 5
350–700 63 51 126 101 158 126 JG3175 4
350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200W 5
350–700 72 58 144 116 181 144 JG3200 4
350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225W 5
350–700 81 65 162 130 203 162 JG3225 4
350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250W 5
350–700 90 72 181 144 226 181 JG3250 4
500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300W 5
500–1000 108 87 217 173 271 217 KG3300 4
500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350W 5
500–1000 126 101 253 202 316 253 KG3350 4
1000–2000 144 116 289 231 361 289 KG3400 4
V4-T2-342 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Electronic
Notes
1Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
4Breaker includes line and load terminals.
The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
Magnetic
Pickup Range
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
Engine Generator
Breaker 3
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Catalog
NumberkVA 1kW 2kVA 1kW 2kVA 1kW 2
500–2500 162 130 325 260 406 325 LG3450 4
500–2500 181 144 361 289 451 361 LG3500 4
500–2500 217 173 433 347 542 433 LG3600 4
500–2500 253 202 505 404 632 505 NG3700 4
500–2500 289 231 578 462 722 578 NG3800 4
1250–5000 325 260 650 520 812 650 NG3900 4
1250–5000 361 289 722 578 903 722 NG31000 4
1250–5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867 NG31200 4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-343
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Enclosures
Type 1 General Purpose
●Surface or flush mounting
●15–1200 ampere range
●600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Type 1 enclosed breakers
are designed for use in
commercial buildings,
apartment buildings and
other areas where a general
purpose enclosure is
applicable. The breaker is
front operable and is capable
of being padlocked in either
the ON or OFF position.
Ratings through 1200
amperes are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories as
approved for service entrance
application. Both surface and
flush mounted enclosures are
available.
Type 3R Rainproof Surface
Mounting
●Interchangeable hubs
(through 400 amperes)
●15–1200 ampere range
●600 Vac, 500 Vdc
This general purpose outdoor
service center employs a
circuit breaker inside a
weatherproof sheet steel
breaker enclosure to serve
as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder
circuits. Ratings through
1200 amperes are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
application.
Type 12 Dustproof Surface
Mounting
●No knockouts or other
openings
●15–1200 ampere range
●600 Vac, 500 Vdc
The Type 12 enclosure is
designed in line with
specifications for special
industry applications where
unusually severe conditions
involving oil, coolant, dust and
other foreign materials exist
in the operating atmosphere.
The handle padlocks in the
OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle
mechanism to prevent
opening the cover with the
circuit breaker in the ON
position. Ratings through
1200 amperes are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
application.
Enclosure Selection Data
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Enclosure
Type Class
Catalog
Number
FG
15–225
Type 1 SFDN225
Type 3R RFDN225
Type 12 JFDN225
JG
175–250
Type 1 SJDN250
Type 3R RJDN250
Type 12 JJDN250
KG
300–400
Type 1 SKDN400
Type 3R RKDN400
Type 12 JKDN400
LG
450–600
Type 1 SLDN600
Type 3R RLDN600
Type 12 JLDN600
NG
700–1200
Type 1 SNDN1200
Type 3R RNDN1200
Type 12 JNDN1200
Options and Accessories
Standard Terminals
Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
Internal Accessories
Auxiliary Switch 2
Shunt Trip 2
Notes
1Package of three terminals.
2Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers.
3Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed.
Breaker
Frame
Max. Amp
Rating
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
FG 100 14–1/0 2.5–50 3T100FB 1
FG 150 4–4/0 25–95 3TA225FD 1
JG 250 4–350 kcmil 25–185 TA250KB
KG 350 250–500 kcmil 120–240 TA350K
KG 400 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 3TA400K 1
LG 600 250–500 kcmil (2) 120–240 3TA603LDK
NG 700 1–500 kcmil (2) 50–300 TA700NB1
NG 1000 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 TA1000NB1
NG 1200 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–300 TA1200NB1
Max. Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
Main Lug Number
Size Cu/Al
Ground Lug
Size Cu/Al
Catalog
Number
100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0 INK100
250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250
400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or
(2) 1/0–250 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil INK400
600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600
1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or
(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
(1) 6–250 kcmil INK1200
Breaker
Frame
Factory
Mounted
1A-1B
Factory
Mounted
2A-2B
Field Kit
Catalog Number
Field Kit
Catalog Number
FG 3A06 A1X1PK A13 A2X1RPK
JG A06 A1X2PK A13 A2X2PK
KG A06 A1X3PK A13 A2X3PK
LG A06 A1X4PK A13 A2X4PK
NG A06 A1X5PK A13 A2X5PK
Breaker
Frame Rating
Factory
Mounted
Field Kit
Catalog Number
FG 312–24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K
JG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT2P04K
KG 12–24 Vdc S42 SNT3P04K
LG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT4LP03K
NG 12–24 Vdc S02 SNT5LP03K
V4-T2-344 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Selection Data
Type 1 Surface Mounted Type 3R Rainproof Type 12, 12K Dustproof
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240 18,000
480 14,000
600 10,000
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
220, 240 18,000/ 9,000
380, 415 14,000/ 7,000
660, 690 18,000/ 9,000
14,000 / 7,000
10,000/5,000
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
Enclosure
Type Class A B C D E
Approx. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Conduit Sizes,
Inches
Catalog
Number
FG
15–225
Type 1 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.6) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.3) 1.20 (30.5) 15 (7) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225
Type 3R 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 19 (9) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225
Type 12 25.66 (651.8) 8.84 (224.7) 9.31 (236.5) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.2) 18 (8) — JFDN225
JG
175–250
Type 1 34.70 (881.4) 10.92 (277.4) 7.20 (182.9) 30.00 (762.0) 1.88 (47.8) 31 (14) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 SJDN250
Type 3R 37.50 (952.5) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 40 (18) 0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3 RJDN250
Type 12 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.6) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.6) 1.94 (49.3) 37 (17) — JJDN250
KG
300–400
Type 1 38.81 (985.8) 11.06 (280.9) 10.94 (277.9) 34.00 (863.6) 2.28 (57.9) 53 (24) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400
Type 3R 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 60 (27) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50 RKDN400
Type 12 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.5) 14.06 (357.1) 39.90 (1013.5) 1.97 (50.0) 53 (24) — JKDN400
LG
450–600
Type 1 45.88 (1165.4) 14.31 (363.5) 12.38 (314.5) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.91 (48.5) 81 (37) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 SLDN600
Type 3R 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 84 (38) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4 RLDN600
Type 12 48.31 (1227.1) 14.91 (378.7) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.6) 1.92 (48.8) 81 (37) — JLDN600
NG
700–1200
Type 1 61.22 (1555.0) 21.44 (544.6) 15.41 (391.4) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 178 (81) — SNDN1200
Type 3R 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 175 (79) — RNDN1200
Type 12 63.59 (1615.2) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.8) 61.84 (1570.7) 1.97 (50.0) 170 (77) — JNDN1200
E
DA
C
B
C
ON
OFF
E
AD
B
ON
OFF
EC
AD
B
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-345
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-347
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-348
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-355
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-356
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-357
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . V4-T2-410
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Product Description
DC (direct current)
systems and applications
are becoming commonplace
as alternative energy sources
have expanded and the
number of DC devices
and data centers using DC
power has swelled.
Eaton offers molded case
circuit breakers and switches
to meet circuit protection and
switching requirements for a
host of different DC end user
requirements. Applications
include UPS battery supply
circuits, solar systems and
electric vehicle charging, as
well as commercial and
industrial distribution.
Current ratings are available
from 15 to 3000 A, with
a full scale of voltage and
interrupting ratings to address
needs ranging from standard
to the highest performance.
Optional internal accessories
provide remote tripping and
indication of breaker status.
The DC breaker family is
UL 489 listed and exceeds
the requirements in UL 489
Supplement SC for UPS
applications. Eaton breakers
may be applied in both
ungrounded and select
grounded applications, with
poles connected in series
to operate at the maximum
voltages shown on Page
V4-T2-346. To use DC circuit
breakers on 600 V grounded
systems, three poles in series
must be connected on the
ungrounded leg.
All DC breakers use the
same internal and external
accessories as their
corresponding Series C
and Series G AC frame
equivalents, except for the
NBDC breaker, which uses
the same internal and
external accessories as
the standard NB frame.
The HFDDC through
HMDLDC and EG to RG
DC breakers use the same
internal and external
accessories as their
corresponding Series C
and Series G AC Frame
equivalents. NBDC uses the
same internal and external
accessories as standard
NB breakers.
Many of the Eaton AC
molded case circuit breakers
carry 250 Vdc ratings for
ungrounded systems. Refer
to Pages V4-T2-9 and
V4-T2-117 for these
interrupting tables.
V4-T2-346 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Notes
1DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489.
2EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications.
HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings.
3Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel.
See Page V4-T2-356 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Interrupting Capacity (kA)
Poles in
Series
Volts DC 1
125
Poles in
Series 250 2
Poles in
Series 500 600
Poles in
Series 750 2
EGEDC 100 10 135 235 — 3 — —
EGSDC 100 35 142 250 — 3 — —
EGHDC 100 42 150 265 — 3 — —
HFDDC 225 42 150 2 — 42 342 4
JGEDC 250 35 135 2 — 35 3 — —
JGSDC 250 42 142 2 — 50 3 — —
JGHDC 250 50 150 2 — 65 3 — —
HJDDC 250 42 150 2 — 42 3 — —
HKDDC 400 42 150 2 — 42 3 — —
LGEDC 600 22 122 2 — 35 3 — —
LGSDC 600 22 122 2 — 50 3 — —
LGHDC 600 50 150 2 — 65 3 — —
HLDDC 600 42 150 2 — 35 3 — —
HLDDC 31200 42 150 2 — — — — —
HMDLDC 800 42 150 2 — 35 3 — —
NBDC 1200 42 150 2 — 50 3 — —
RGHDC 3000 42 150 2 — 65 3 — —
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
125 Volts DC Poles in
Series
250 Volts DC Poles in
Series
600 Volts DC Poles in
SeriesIcu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGEDC 100 10 10 1 10 10 2 — — —
EGSDC 100 35 35 1 35 35 2 — — —
EGHDC 100 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
JGEDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
JGSDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
JGHDC 250 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
HJDDC 250 — — — — — — 20 10 3
LGEDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGSDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGHDC 600 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
HLDDC 600 — — — — — — 20 10 3
HMDLDC 800 — — — — — — 20 10 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-347
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
DC Circuit Breaker
Frame
EGEDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGSDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGHDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
HFDDC = Series C—F (225 A max.)
JGEDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGSDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGHDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
HJDDC = Series C—J (250 A max.)
HKDDC = Series C—K (400 A max.)
LGEDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGSDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGHDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
HLDDC = Series C—L (1200 A max.)
HMDLDC = Series C—M (800 A max.)
NBDC = NB (1200 A max.)
RGHDC = Series G—R (3000 A max.)
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Trip Unit Ampere Rating
015 =15 A
020 =20 A
025 =25 A
030 =30 A
035 =35 A
040 =40 A
045 =45 A
050 =50 A
060 =60 A
070 =70 A
080 =80 A
090 =90 A
100 =100 A
110 =110 A
125 =125 A
150 =150 A
175 =175 A
200 =200 A
225 =225 A
250 =250 A
300 =300 A
350 =350 A
400 =400 A
450 =450 A
500 =500 A
600 =600 A
700 =700 A
800 =800 A
900 =900 A
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
2500 = 2500 A
3000 = 3000 A
Suffix
Series C, NB Frames
K = Molded case switch
L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame
MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals
W = Without terminals
Series G Frames
FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals
FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals
KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals
KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals
HFDDC 3150 W
V4-T2-348 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25 EGEDC3025FFG EGEDC3025FFW
30 EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW
35 EGEDC3035FFG EGEDC3035FFW
40 EGEDC3040FFG EGEDC3040FFW
45 EGEDC3045FFG EGEDC3045FFW
50 EGEDC3050FFG EGEDC3050FFW
60 EGEDC3060FFG EGEDC3060FFW
70 EGEDC3070FFG EGEDC3070FFW
80 EGEDC3080FFG EGEDC3080FFW
90 EGEDC3090FFG EGEDC3090FFW
100 EGEDC3100FFG EGEDC3100FFW
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25 EGSDC3025FFG EGSDC3025FFW
30 EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW
35 EGSDC3035FFG EGSDC3035FFW
40 EGSDC3040FFG EGSDC3040FFW
45 EGSDC3045FFG EGSDC3045FFW
50 EGSDC3050FFG EGSDC3050FFW
60 EGSDC3060FFG EGSDC3060FFW
70 EGSDC3070FFG EGSDC3070FFW
80 EGSDC3080FFG EGSDC3080FFW
90 EGSDC3090FFG EGSDC3090FFW
100 EGSDC3100FFG EGSDC3100FFW
Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25 EGHDC3025FFG EGHDC3025FFW
30 EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW
35 EGHDC3035FFG EGHDC3035FFW
40 EGHDC3040FFG EGHDC3040FFW
45 EGHDC3045FFG EGHDC3045FFW
50 EGHDC3050FFG EGHDC3050FFW
60 EGHDC3060FFG EGHDC3060FFW
70 EGHDC3070FFG EGHDC3070FFW
80 EGHDC3080FFG EGHDC3080FFW
90 EGHDC3090FFG EGHDC3090FFW
100 EGHDC3100FFG EGHDC3100FFW
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-349
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
1 For breaker without terminals, replace “L” with “W” at end of catalog number.
2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15 HFDDC1015L HFDDC2015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L
20 HFDDC1020L HFDDC2020L HFDDC3020L HFDDC4020L
25 HFDDC1025L HFDDC2025L HFDDC3025L HFDDC4025L
30 HFDDC1030L HFDDC2030L HFDDC3030L HFDDC4030L
35 HFDDC1035L HFDDC2035L HFDDC3035L HFDDC4035L
40 HFDDC1040L HFDDC2040L HFDDC3040L HFDDC4040L
45 HFDDC1045L HFDDC2045L HFDDC3045L HFDDC4045L
50 HFDDC1050L HFDDC2050L HFDDC3050L HFDDC4050L
60 HFDDC1060L HFDDC2060L HFDDC3060L HFDDC4060L
70 HFDDC1070L HFDDC2070L HFDDC3070L HFDDC4070L
80 HFDDC1080L HFDDC2080L HFDDC3080L HFDDC4080L
90 HFDDC1090L HFDDC2090L HFDDC3090L HFDDC4090L
100 HFDDC1100L HFDDC2100L HFDDC3100L HFDDC4100L
110 HFDDC1110L HFDDC2110L HFDDC3110L HFDDC4110L
125 HFDDC1125L HFDDC2125L HFDDC3125L HFDDC4125L
150 HFDDC1150L HFDDC2150L HFDDC3150L HFDDC4150L
175 — HFDDC2175L HFDDC3175L —
200 — HFDDC2200L HFDDC3200L —
225 — HFDDC2225L HFDDC3225L —
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 2
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100 JGEDC3100FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGEDC3125FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150 JGEDC3150FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGEDC3175FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGEDC3200FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225 JGEDC3225FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGEDC3250FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
HFDDC
V4-T2-350 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Note
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100 JGSDC3100FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGSDC3125FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150 JGSDC3150FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGSDC3175FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGSDC3200FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225 JGSDC3225FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGSDC3250FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100 JGHDC3100FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGHDC3125FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150 JGHDC3150FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGHDC3175FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGHDC3200FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225 JGHDC3225FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGHDC3250FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70 HJDDC3250F JT3070T TA250KB
90 HJDDC3250F JT3090T TA250KB
100 HJDDC3250F JT3100T TA250KB
125 HJDDC3250F JT3125T TA250KB
150 HJDDC3250F JT3150T TA250KB
175 HJDDC3250F JT3175T TA250KB
200 HJDDC3250F JT3200T TA250KB
225 HJDDC3250F JT3225T TA250KB
250 HJDDC3250F JT3250T TA250KB
JGHDC3250NN
HJDDC3250
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-351
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2 Three-pole kit.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K
125 HKDDC3400F KT3125T TA300K
150 HKDDC3400F KT3150T TA300K
175 HKDDC3400F KT3175T TA300K
200 HKDDC3400F KT3200T TA300K
225 HKDDC3400F KT3225T TA300K
250 HKDDC3400F KT3250T TA350K
300 HKDDC3400F KT3300T TA350K
350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K
400 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGEDC3250FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGEDC3350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGEDC3400FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGSDC3250FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2
HKDDC3400
LGEDC3630NN
V4-T2-352 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34
Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2 Three-pole kit.
3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250 LGHDC3250FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK 2
600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 HLDDC3600F LT3300T TA602LD
350 HLDDC3600F LT3350T TA602LD
400 HLDDC3600F LT3400T TA602LD
450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA602LD
500 HLDDC3600F LT3500T TA602LD
600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Catalog
Number
600 HLDDC20600
700 HLDDC20700
800 HLDDC20800
900 HLDDC20900
1000 HLDDC21000
1200 HLDDC21200
HLDDC
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-353
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately.
2 Six rear connectors included as standard complete circuit breaker.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1
400 HMDLDC3800F MT3400T TA700MA1
450 HMDLDC3800F MT3450T TA700MA1
500 HMDLDC3800F MT3500T TA700MA1
600 HMDLDC3800F MT3600T TA700MA1
700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1
800 HMDLDC3800F MT3800T TA800MA2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker Factory
Assembled without Terminals 2
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number
700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1
800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1
900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB1
1000 NBDC31000MW Included TA1000NB1
1200 NBDC31200MW Included TA1200NB1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled 2
Standard Rear
Connectors
Imperial Mounting
Hardware
Metric Mounting
Hardware
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number
1600 RGHDC3160FFWE RGHDC3160FFWM Included B2016RDM
2000 RGHDC3200FFWE RGHDC3200FFWM Included B2016RDM
2500 RGHDC3250FFWE RGHDC3250FFWM Included B2500RDM
3000 RGHDC3300FFWE RGHDC3300FFWM Included B3000RDM
HMDLDC3800F
RGHDC3300FFWM
V4-T2-354 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges
Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard.
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and
have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
Molded Case Switches
Note
1Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
Breaker
Frame
Maximum Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of
Terminals Included
Standard Terminal
Catalog Number
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14–1/0 2.5–50 3 3TA125EF
HFDDC 20 Steel Cu/Al 14–10 (1) 2.5–4 (1) 3 3T20FB
100 Steel Cu/Al 14–1/0 (1) 2.5–50 (1) 3 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3TA225FD
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 250 Stainless steel Cu 4–350 (1) 25–185 (1) 1 T250FJ
HJDDC 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–350 kcmil (1) 25–185 (1) 1 TA250KB
HKDDC 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 3 3TA400K
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK
HLDDC 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK
HMDLDC 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2
NBDC 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 (4) 1 TA1200NB1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Interrupting Capacity
(Volts DC)
Poles in
Series
With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
600 Vdc Maximum
100 42 3 HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW
150 42 3 HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW
225 42 3 HFDDC3225KL HFDDC3225KW
250 65 3 JGKDC3250KSG JGKDC3250KSW
250 42 3 HJDDC3250K HJDDC3250KW
400 35 3 HKDDC3400K HKDDC3400KW
65 3 LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3400KSW
600 65 3 LGKDC3630KSG LGKDC3630KSW
35 3 HLDDC3600K HLDDC3600WK
800 35 3 HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK
500 Vdc Maximum
100 65 3 EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW
250 Vdc Maximum
100 50 2 HFDDC2100KL HFDDC2100KW
150 50 2 HFDDC2150KL HFDDC2150KW
225 50 2 HFDDC2225KL HFDDC2225KW
1200 50 1HLDDC21200K 1HLDDC21200WK 1
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-355
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Internal Accessories
Notes
1F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker
is mounted and connected.
2Right-pole mounted.
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration.
Description
Factory
Installation
(HFDDC)
Field Installation Kits
HFDDC 1
EGEDC,
EGSDC,
EGHDC
JGEDC,
JGSDC,
JGHDC
LGEDC,
LGSDC,
LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC RGHDC
Right-Pole Mounting
Auxiliary switch
1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1X2PK A1X3PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 —
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK AUX2A2BPK AUX2A2BPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2X4PK 4980D16G06 A2X6RPK
Alarm switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1L2RPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK — A1L6RPK
Auxiliary and alarm combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AAL2RPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK — A2L6RPK
Left-Pole Mounting
Shunt trip
12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT012CPK SNT012CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G14 —
24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G13 SNT6P03K 2
48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G12 SNT6P23K 2
60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G11 SNT6P23K 2
125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP26K 2606D58G10 SNT6P23K 2
250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K — — SNT2P14K SNT3P14K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP14K 2606D58G09 SNT6P14K
120 Vac S06 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP11K 2060D58G05 SNT6P11K 2
Undervoltage release
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K UVR012DPK UVR012DPK UVH2LP20K UVH3LP20K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP20K 372D032G06 UVH6RP20K 2
24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K UVR024DPK UVR024DPK UVH2LP21K UVH3LP21K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP21K 372D032G07 UVH6RP21K 2
48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K UVR048DPK UVR048DPK UVH2LP22K UVH3LP22K UVH4LP22K UVH4LP22K 372D032G08 UVH6RP23K 2
125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K UVR125DPK UVR125DPK UVH2LP26K UVH3LP26K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP26K 372D032G09 UVH6RP26K 2
250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K UVR250DPK UVR250DPK UVH2LP28K UVH3LP28K UVH4LP28K UVH4LP28K 372D032G10 UVH6RP28K 2
120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR120APK UVR120APK UVH2LP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D632G05 UVH6RP08K 2
V4-T2-356 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Wiring Diagrams
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series
500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series
Notes
1Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
Load (A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Load (A)
Load
Load (A)
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-357
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
DC Breaker Dimensions
Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
HFDDC 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.1)
HKDDC 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
600 A Max. HLDDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
1200 A Max. HLDDC 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
NBDC 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
RGHDC 3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7)
V4-T2-358 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
600 Vdc Per-Pole 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-359
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-359
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-359
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-360
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-362
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-365
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-368
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-369
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . V4-T2-410
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
Product Overview
●Two PVGard lineups
●600 Vdc per-pole breaker
and switch. Each pole
rated 600 Vdc
●1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breaker and switch.
Requires poles in series
connection
●Both options UL 489B
listed for solar photovoltaic
circuit protection
●50 °C calibration
●Offers both 100% and
80% rated breakers
●Handle bi-directional
current flow
Product Description
Photovoltaic (PV) systems
convert the energy of the sun
into electrical power that is
fed directly into the electric
grid. Within the balance of
system (BOS), direct current
(DC) circuit breakers protect
the wiring connected from
the PV modules to the
combiner or the inverter,
while also behaving as
a disconnect.
Eaton is a global leader in
circuit protection and brings
this expertise to bear in the
photovoltaic market. PVGard
solar circuit breakers are part
of a product family that
combines a disconnect with
circuit protection in a single,
compact, resettable device
to protect and isolate DC
circuits as needed in
photovoltaic systems.
PVGard breakers can replace
fuses, fuse holders and
disconnects in combiner box
and inverter applications—
saving space, streamlining
design, purchasing and
receiving, and reducing spare
parts requirements.
There are two PVGard lineups
to choose from: the industry-
exclusive, 600 Vdc per-pole
breakers and switches
designed for residential and
light commercial applications
and 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breakers and switches for
commercial and utility scale
applications.
PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Lineup
Only Eaton can offer this
breakthrough breaker that will
save significant space, time
and cost. As a single-circuit-
per-pole device, it allows
space savings of up to 66%
when compared to traditional
poles-in-series disconnects,
switches and breakers. In
addition, it eliminates the
need for jumpers for poles-in-
series connection—saving on
installation time, labor and
even inventory.
PVGard 1000 Vdc
Poles-in-Series Lineup
This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
lineup provides reliable and
safe disconnect means and
overcurrent protection in
a single, compact device for
commercial and utility scale
PV systems. This solution
does not require jumpers
with the breaker/switch to
be a UL 489B listed device,
providing reliability and
flexibility in design without
limitation on implementation
of the breaker/switch. If
needed, cost-effective Eaton
jumpers can be included.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-359
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Application Description
Photovoltaic (PV) systems
convert the energy of the sun
into electrical power that is
fed directly into the electric
grid. PVGard circuit breakers
are used to protect the wiring
from the modules to the
combiner box or inverter from
overcurrents, and to provide
an isolation mechanism.
Eaton offers a complete line of
UL 489 Listed multi-purpose
600 Vdc poles-in-series
breakers and switches, as
well as protection for the
AC side of the inverter.
Refer to Page V4-T2-345
for 600 Vdc breakers and
Page V4-T2-6 for AC
breaker selection.
Features
PVGard breakers are uniquely
designed with these features:
●Meets the higher voltage
and lower fault current
levels of solar systems
●Tested to extreme ambient
conditions from –40ºC to
+90ºC
●Full complement of
accessories for status,
signalling, and on/off
operation remotely
●Can handle bi-directional
flow of current
●Can be applied in
grounded, ungrounded
or bi-polar systems
●Meets and exceeds the
standards of UL 489B for
photovoltaic molded case
circuit breakers and
molded case switches
●Available both standard
(80%-rated) and 100%-
rated breakers
●50ºC calibration
●Ability to open on signal
from DC arc or ground fault
detector
●Wide range of current
ratings increases options
for matching incoming
strings
●Eliminates fuse stocking
costs and matching issues
Designed specifically for
high- and low-temperature
demands of PV installations,
PVGard circuit breakers
undergo extreme ambient
cycling tests, and carry a
robust operating temperature
range. Trip units calibrate at
100% and 80% of nameplate
current in a 50ºC ambient,
ensuring continuous
operation in higher
temperature environments
typical to solar.
Rigorous third-party testing
includes limited and standard
fault current tests, electrical
and mechanical endurance,
di-electric voltage withstand
and temperature tests.
Eaton’s PVGard products are
stand-alone devices without
requiring jumpers to be
UL 489B listed devices.
PVGard breakers are available
with a full complement of
accessories to provide string
status, enable remote trip,
on/off operation, and can
be customized to site
requirements.
Standards and Certifications
●Designed to meet UL 489B
for solar photovoltaic circuit
protection
●UL File E350638, Category
Control Number DIUR
V4-T2-360 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-364.
For complete internal and external accessories, see accessory section of each frame.
JG PVS Frame, 250 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 1.2 kA 1
KD PVS Frame, 400 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 3 kA 1
Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
Number Poles/
600 Vdc Circuits
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
90 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3090W CJGPVS3090W
100 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3100W CJGPVS3100W
125 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3125W CJGPVS3125W
150 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3150W CJGPVS3150W
175 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3175W CJGPVS3175W
200 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3200W CJGPVS3200W
225 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3225W CJGPVS3225W
250 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic JGPVS3250W CJGPVS3250W
Number Poles/
600 Vdc Circuits
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
100 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3100W CKDPVS3100W
125 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3125W CKDPVS3125W
150 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3150W CKDPVS3150W
175 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3175W CKDPVS3175W
200 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3200W CKDPVS3200W
225 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3225W CKDPVS3225W
250 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3250W CKDPVS3250W
300 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3300W CKDPVS3300W
350 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3350W CKDPVS3350W
400 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPVS3400W CKDPVS3400W
JG PVS Frame
KD PVS Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-361
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-364.
FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1
KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1
Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
30 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4030W CFDPV4030W
40 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4040W CFDPV4040W
50 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4050W CFDPV4050W
60 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4060W CFDPV4060W
70 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4070W CFDPV4070W
80 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4080W CFDPV4080W
90 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4090W CFDPV4090W
100 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic FDPV4100W CFDPV4100W
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
125 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4125W CKDPV4125W
150 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4150W CKDPV4150W
175 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4175W CKDPV4175W
200 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4200W CKDPV4200W
225 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4225W CKDPV4225W
250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4250W CKDPV4250W
300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4300W CKDPV4300W
350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic KDPV4350W CKDPV4350W
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
250 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4250W CLGPV4250W
300 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4300W CLGPV4300W
350 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4350W CLGPV4350W
400 4 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic LGPV4400W CLGPV4400W
80% Rated 100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes Poles in Series Trip Unit Catalog Number Catalog Number
300 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3300W CMDLPV3300W
350 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3350W CMDLPV3350W
400 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3400W CMDLPV3400W
450 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3450W CMDLPV3450W
500 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3500W CMDLPV3500W
600 3 Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic MDLPV3600W CMDLPV3600W
FD PV Frame
KD PV Frame
LG PV Frame
MDL PV Frame
V4-T2-362 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Available Accessories
●Auxiliary switch
●Shunt trip
●Electrical operator
●Alarm lockout
●Undervoltage release
●Te r m i n a l s
●Lock-off devices
●End cap kits
●Rotary handle mechanisms
●Flexible shaft handle
mechanisms
Optional modifications
●Freeze testing
For complete internal and external accessories, see the
accessory section of each frame.
External Accessories
Description Frame
Catalog
Number
Imperial Base Mounting Hardware
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV
KD PVS
BMH3
—JG PVSN/A
—LG PVN/A
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and
lockwashers and flat washers
MDL PV BMH5
Metric Base Mounting Hardware
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers FD PV BMH1M
M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers KD PV
KD PVS
BMH3M
— JG PVS Included 1
— LG PV Included 1
M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers MDL PV BMH5M
Interphase Barriers
FD PV IPB1
KD PV
KD PVS
IPB3
JG PVS FJIPBK 2
LG PV IPB3
MDL PV IPB4
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
FD PV LKD1
KD PV
KD PVS
LKD3
JG PVS N/A
LG PV N/A
MDL PV LKD4
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 3
FD PV PLK1
KD PV
KD PVS
PLK3
JG PVS FJPHL
LG PV LPHL
MDL PV HLK4
Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40ºC 4
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC molded case
switches (MCS) are used in
applications requiring a
compact, high capacity
disconnect. PVGard 1000 Vdc
MCS are UL 489B listed and
have automatic instantaneous
current protection. These
devices do not provide
overload protection.
Molded Case Switches
Notes
1Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch
(included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A2546G02.
2Individually priced.
3Locks in ON and OFF position.
4Add 20% to list price.
Frame Modification Code
FD PV F01
JG PVS F01
KD PV and KD PVS F01
LG PV F01
MDL PV F01
Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 50 °C
Interrupting
Capacity Vdc
Poles in
Series
Catalog
Number
1000 Vdc Maximum
100 3000 4 FDPV4100KW
200 5000 4 KDPV4200KW
250 5000 4 KDPV4250KW
350 5000 4 KDPV4350KW
400 5000 4 LGPV4400KSW
600 7500 3 MDLPV3600KSW
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-363
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting
Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting
Notes
1Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker.
FD PV 1JG PVS
KD PV
KD PVS LG PV MDL PV
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Auxiliary Switch
1A-1B A06 A1X1PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X3PK A1 AUX1A1BPK A06 A1X4PK
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X3PK A2 AUX2A2BPK A13 A2X4PK
Alarm Switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPKL B06 A1L3RPK B1 ALM1M1BJPK B06 A1L4RPK
Auxiliary and Alarm Combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK B2w AUXALRMJPK C05 AAL3RPK B2 AUXALRMJPK C05 AA114RPK
FD PV 1JG PVS
KD PV
KD PVS LG PV MDL PV
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Shunt Trip
12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S4 SNT012CPK S42 SNT3P04K S4 SNT012CPK S02 SNT4LP03K
24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K S1 SNT060CPK S42 SNT3P04K S1 SNT060CPK S02 SNT4LP03K
48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S1 SNT060CPK S50 SNT3P06K S1 SNT060CPK S86 SNT4LP23K
60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K S1 SNT060CPK S50 SNT3P06K S1 SNT060CPK S86 SNT4LP23K
125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K S5 SNT125DPK S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S42 SNT4LP26K
250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K ——S14 SNT3P14K — — S14 SNT4LP14K
120 Vac S10 SNT1LP12K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT3P11K S2 SNT120CPK S10 SNT4LP11K
Undervoltage Release
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K —— T02UVH3LP20K U1 UVR012DPK T02 UVH4LP20K
24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K U2 UVR024CPK T02 UVH3LP21K U2 UVR024DPK T06 UVH4LP21K
48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH3LP22K U4 UVR048DPK T10 UVH4LP22K
60 Vdc — — U4 UVR048DPK ———— ——
125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K U6 UVR125DPK T14 UVH3LP26K U6 UVR125DPK T14 UVH4LP26K
250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K U8 UVR250DPK T18 UVH3LP28K U8 UVR250DPK T18 UVH4LP28K
120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K U5 UVR120APK U18 UVH3LP08K U5 UVR120APK U18 UVH4LP08K
V4-T2-364 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering
Endcap Kits
Notes
1Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
Breaker
Frame
Maximum
Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of
Terminals
Included
Standard
Terminal
Catalog
Number Comments
FD PV 50 Steel Cu/Al 14–4 (1) 2.5–25 (1) 3 3TA50FB
100 Aluminum Cu/Al 6–300 kcmil (1) 16–150 (1) 3 3TA225FDK Includes 3P terminal cover
100 Copper Cu 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3T225FD
JG PVS 250 Aluminum Cu/Al #8–350 kcmil (1) — — TA250FJ
250 Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 — 13TA251FJK1
250 Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 — 23TA251FJK2
250 Copper Cu #4–350 kcmil (1) — — T250FJ
KD PV
KD PVS
225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4TA400K Contains interphase barriers
250 Aluminum Cu/Al 2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1) 70–240 (2) 4 4TA401K
300 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
225 Copper Cu 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 T300K
250 Copper Cu 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 T350K
250 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 4 4T400K Contains interphase barriers
300 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
350 Copper Cu 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (2) 4 4TA401K Contains interphase barriers
LG PV 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4TA632LK Includes 4P terminal cover
250 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (1) 35–240 (1) 1 T350LK
400 Copper Cu 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 4 4T632LK Includes 4P terminal cover
MDL PV 300 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2
Breaker Frame Number of Poles Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number
FD PV 4 Imperial 10–32 KPEK14
4 Metric M–5 KPEKM14
JG PVS 3 Imperial — FJ3RTDK
3 Metric — FJ3RTWK
KD PV 4 Imperial 0.312–18 KPEK34
4 Metric M–8 KPEKM34
KD PVS 3 Imperial — KPEK3
3 Metric — KPEKM3
LG PV 4 Imperial — N/A
4 Metric M-10 L4RTWK
MDL PV 3 Imperial — —
3 Metric — —
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-365
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Technical Data and Specifications
●Thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers
●Designed to meet UL 489B
for solar photovoltaic circuit
protection
●100% rated of the
continuous current rating
●50 °C calibrated
●Can be applied in
grounded, ungrounded or
bi-polar systems
●Ability to open on signal
from DC arc or ground fault
detector
●Two PVGard lineups
●UL File EE350638,
Category Control
Number DIUR
●600 Vdc per-pole breaker
and switch
– Each pole rated
600 Vdc
●1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breaker and switch
– Requires poles in
series connection
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
600 Vdc Per-Pole
PVGard 600 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 600 Vdc Per-Pole
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
Maximum
Amperes kA Rating
JG PVS 90 250 1.2
KD PVS 100 400 3
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
Maximum
Amperes kA Rating
Poles in
Series
FD PV 30 100 3 4
KD PV 125 350 5 4
LG PV 250 400 5 4
MDL PV 300 600 7.5 3
V4-T2-366 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
Notes
1Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
3Not UL 489B recognized size for maximum of 400 A breaker.
JG PVS KD PVS
Number of 600 Vdc circuits 3 3
Maximum voltage rating 600 Vdc 600 Vdc
Ampere range 90–250 A 100–400 A
Interrupting capacity at 600 Vdc 1.2 kA 3 kA
Time constant 1 ms 1 ms
Trip unit type Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths
Auxiliary circuits
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
Endurance
Mechanical operations
Electrical operations
Maximum switching frequency
10,000
400
240 per hour
6000
400
240 per hour
Third-party certification UL 489B UL 489B
Environment
Design ambient temperature
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
50 °C
93%
85%
50 °C
93%
85%
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C
Relative humidity
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes
Mounting—permissible mounting position
Connection diagrams
Terminations
Al/Cu wire TA250FJ: (1) #8–350 kcmil TA300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
3TA251FJK1: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 2TA350K: (1) 250–500 kcmil
3TA251FJK2: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 3TA403K: (2) 1/0–400 kcmil
3TA402K: (1) 500–-750 kcmil 4
Cu wire T250FJ: (1) #4–350 kcmil T300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Height
Width
Depth
7.00 (177.8)
4.13 (104.9)
3.57 (90.7)
10.13 (257.3)
5.50 (139.7)
4.10 (104.1)
Weight in lbs 6.6 11.42
90º
90º
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-367
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
Notes
1Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
FD PV KD PV LG PV MDL PV
Number of poles 4443
Maximum voltage rating 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc 1000 Vdc
Maximum current rating 100 A 350 A 400 A 600 A
Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 7.5 kA
Time constant 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
Ampere range 15–100 A 125–350 A 250–400 A 300–600 A
Trip unit type Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths
Auxiliary circuits
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
Endurance
Mechanical operations
Electrical operations
Maximum switching frequency
10,000
1000
300 per hour
10,000
400
240 per hour
8000
400
240 per hour
8000
400
240 per hour
Third-party certification UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B UL 489B
Environment
Design ambient temperature
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
50 °C
91%
88%
50 °C
91%
88%
50 °C
93%
88%
50 °C
93%
88%
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C
Relative humidity
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
Suitable for reverse-feed applications Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mounting—permissible mounting position
Connection diagrams 1 2
Terminations
Al/Cu wire #6–300 kcmil (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–400 kcmil
Cu wire #4–4/0 (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (2) #2–500 kcmil (3) 3/0–300 kcmil
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Height
Width
Depth
6.00 (152.4)
5.50 (139.7)
3.38 (85.9)
10.13 (257.3)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
10.13 (257.3)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
16.00 (406.4)
8.25 (209.5)
4.06 (103.1)
Weight in lbs 6 20 20 29
90º
90º
90º
90º
Load
(A)
Load
V4-T2-368 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
Frame
Number of
Circuits in
a Frame Width Height Depth
JG PVS 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.44 (87.4)
KD PVS 3 5.49 (139.4) 10.13 (257.2) 4.31 (109.6)
Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
FD PV 4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
KD PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
LG PV 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
MDL PV 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-369
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Wiring Diagrams
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
JF PVS, KD PVS—600 Vdc Per-Pole
FD PV, KD PV, LG PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles-in-Series
MDL PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
Notes
1Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
Load
Suitable for grounded or ungrounded systems.
Suitable for quantity (3) 600 Vdc circuits.
Load (A)
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Load (A)
Load
V4-T2-370 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-372
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-376
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-387
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-390
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . V4-T2-410
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Product Overview
State-of-the-art E2 mining
service breakers incorporate
the rigid specifications and
testing procedures developed
by a focus group led by
engineers from several
large coal companies and
Eaton design engineers.
Additionally, the performance
of these breakers was proven
and verified during hundreds
of hours of field testing in
harsh mine environments.
E2 mining breakers are
available in 600 Vac, l000Y/
577 Vac and 1200 Vac.
Interchangeable trip units can
be used on either 600 or 1000
Vac frames.
The E2 mining breaker family
is designed especially for
trailing cable application per
MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field
interchangeable electronic
rms sensing trip units are
available from 150 to 2000
amperes with instantaneous
pickup settings conforming
to the code of Federal
Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2.
Electromechanical trip units
are also available with a
wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
E2 electronic trip units are the
first to provide the mining
industry with true rms
sensing, made possible by
the custom ASIC
microprocessor in each
electronic trip unit.
E2 breakers are designed to
be physically and electrically
interchangeable with Classic
Mining Service Breakers and
supersede Series C® Mining
Service Breakers. The table to
the right outlines direct
replacements.
600 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
1000 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
Note
1E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.
Classic Series C E2
FBM FDBM E2F
HFBM FDM E2F
HFDM (mag. only) E2F
— JDM E2J
KAM KDM E2K
KAMH KDM E2K
LAM LDM E2L
LAMH LDM E2L
LCM LDM E2L
LCMH LDM E2L
MAM — E2M
MAMH — E2M
MCM — E2M
MCMH — E2M
NBM — E2N
NBMH — E2N
NCM — E2N
NCMH — E2N
Classic Series C E2M
HFM — E2FM
—JDCME
2JM
HKAM KDCM E2KM
HLAM LDCM E2LM
HLCM LDCM E2LM
HMAM — E2MM
HMCM — E2MM
HNBM — E2NM
HNBMH — E2NM
HNCM — E2NM
HLCLM — E2NM
HPBM — E2RM 1
Source Description
TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-371
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Eaton’s mining service circuit
breakers provide short-circuit
protection as specified in the
code of Federal Regulations
30 CFR 75.601-2.
E2 225/400 A K frame and
400/600 A L frame electronic
trip units feature specifically
designed instantaneous
pickup settings to conform
exactly with the code of
Federal Regulations 30 CFR
75.601-2. Electromechanical
trip units are also available
with a wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
Interrupting Capacity Rating
Circuit
Breaker Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
Vac (50/60 Hz) Vdc 1
240 480 600 1000Y/577 1200 250
E2F 652518— — 10
E2J 653518— — 10
E2K 653525— — 10
E2LME 100 65 35 — — 42
E2L 653525— — 22
E2M 653525— — 22
E2N 655025— — —
E2R 125 65 50 — — —
E2FM 65 25 18 10 — 10
E2JM 65 35 18 10 — 22
E2KM 65 35 25 14 — 10
E2LMZ 100 65 35 10 — 42
E2LM — 35 25 18 — 22
E2MM — 35 25 18 — 22
E2NM 2—502525 — —
E2RM — 65 50 25 — —
E2KW — — — 10 10 —
E2LW — — — 10 10 —
E2MW — — — 12 12 —
The tables below list the
conductor size maximum
allowable circuit breaker
instantaneous setting and
the E2 breaker that meets
that setting.
Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75
Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data
Notes
1Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit.
Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated.
2Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers.
Conductor
Size
Maximum
Breaker
Instantaneous
Setting
Maximum
Ampere
75 °C Insulated
Conductor
E2/E2M/E2W
Instantaneous
Only Setting
14 50 15 E2K 150 A A
12 75 20 E2K 150 A B
10 150 30 E2K 150 A C
8 200 50 E2K 225 A A
6 300 65 E2K 225 A B
4 500 85 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A C/A
3 600 100 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A D/B
2 800 115 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A E/C
1 1000 130 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A F/D
1/0 1250 150 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A G/E
2/0 1500 175 E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A H/F
3/0 2000 200 E2L 400 A G
4/0 2500 230 E2L 400 A H
250 2500 255 E2L 400 A H
300 2500 285 E2L 400 A H
350 2500 310 E2L 400 A H
400 2500 335 E2L 400 A H
500 2500 380 E2L 400 A H
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load)
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load)
V4-T2-372 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
E2 Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
E2 Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
Notes
1All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No “E” suffix required.
2Not available with instantaneous only.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Frame Size
E2K
E2L
E2M
E2N
E2R
Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI
38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with
maintenance mode
Electronic Trip
E 1 = Electronic trip
Terminal
W= No terminals
Blank = Standard terminals
Optional Features
B20 2= No terminals
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
E2K E M 3 400 38 2B20 W
Current Ampere
Rating
100–2000
Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
Blank = Standard mag.
2= High mag.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Frame Size
K
L
M
Trip Unit Function
M= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI
38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with
maintenance mode
Electronic Trip
E = Electronic trip
Optional Features
B20 1= High load alarm
Voltage
M = 600 V and 1000 V
interchangeable
K E M 3 400 38 T 2 B20
Current Ampere
Rating
100–2000
Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
Blank = Standard mag.
2= High mag.
Trip Unit
T
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-373
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1
E2 Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
E2 Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
Notes
1Does not apply to E2LME/LMZ.
2Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Frame Size
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Frame
Designation
F
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
E2K M 3 400 F
Current Ampere
Rating
70–800
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Frame Size
E2F
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Trip Unit Function
M= Magnetic only
Blank = Thermal-magnetic
E2K M 3 400 M K W
Current Ampere
Rating
3–800
Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
See catalog
Terminal
W= No terminals
Blank = Standard terminals
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
W 2= 1200 Vac max.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Frame Size
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Trip Unit Function
M= Magnetic only
Blank = Thermal-magnetic
E2K 3400 T M A
Current Ampere
Rating
70–800
Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
See catalog
Trip Unit
T
V4-T2-374 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum
E2F/E2FM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.3
120 Vac 1.5
127 Vac 1.7
110 Vdc 1.5
120 Vdc 1.7
125 Vdc 1.9
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 0.96
120 Vac 1.13
127 Vac 1.25
110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 0.94
120 Vdc 1.12
125 Vdc 1.21
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 3.3
120 Vac 3.6
127 Vac 3.8
110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 3.3
120 Vdc 3.6
125 Vdc 3.8
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-375
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Operating Voltage
VAMinimum
E2F/E2FM 48 Vac 33.6 92
60 Vac 140
110 Vac 480
120 Vac 570
127 Vac 640
208 Vac 146 180
220 Vac 200
230 Vac 240
48 Vdc 33.6 100
60 Vdc 160
110 Vdc 77 55
120 Vdc 66
125 Vdc 71
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 60.5 66
120 Vac 84
127 Vac 102
110 Vdc 77 112
120 Vdc 138
125 Vdc 150
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
24 Vac 41
48 Vac 18 139
60 Vac 210
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 60 83
120 Vac 92
127 Vac 117
24 Vdc 120
48 Vdc 18 475
60 Vdc 720
110 Vdc 82 99
120 Vdc 120
125 Vdc 121
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Operating Voltage
VAMinimum
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
48 Vac 34 830
60 Vac 1280
110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
48 Vdc 34 710
60 Vdc 1105
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 60.5 330
120 Vac 390
127 Vac 430
110 Vdc 77 370
120 Vdc 440
125 Vdc 480
V4-T2-376 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
3 A–150 A
E2F/E2FM
Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units
1
Note
1 For two-pole application, use outer poles.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
25 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic
15 — — E2F3015 —
20 — — E2F3020 E2FM3020
25 — — E2F3025 E2FM3025
30 — — E2F3030 —
35 — — E2F3035 —
40 — — E2F3040 E2FM3040
45 — — E2F3045 —
50 — — E2F3050 E2FM3050
60 — — E2F3060 E2FM3060
70 — — E2F3070 E2FM3070
80 — — E2F3080 E2FM3080
90 — — E2F3090 E2FM3090
100 — — E2F3100 E2FM3100
125 — — E2F3125 E2FM3125
150 — — E2F3150 E2FM3150
Magnetic Only
39–30—E2F003AM —
7 21–70 — E2F007CM —
15 45–150 — E2F015EM —
30 90–300 — E2F030HM —
50–150 — E2F030EM —
50 150–500 — E2F050KM E2FM050KM
66–190 — E2F050YM E2FM050YM
70 210–700 — E2F070MM E2FM070MM
100 150–500 — E2F100KM E2FM100KM
300–1000 — E2F100RM E2FM100RM
150 450–1500 — E2F150TM E2FM150TM
750–2500 — E2F150UM E2FM150UM
E2F/E2FM
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-377
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
70 A–250 A
E2J/E2JM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2J3250F.
2 Frame only: E2JM3250F.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
25 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic
70 300–650 E2J3070T E2J3070W E2JM3070W
90 450–900 E2J3090T E2J3090W E2JM3090W
100 500–1000 E2J3100T E2J3100W E2JM3100W
125 625–1250 E2J3125T E2J3125W E2JM3125W
150 750–1500 E2J3150T E2J3150W E2JM3150W
175 875–1750 E2J3175T E2J3175W E2JM3175W
200 1000–2000 E2J3200T E2J3200W E2JM3200W
225 300–650 E2J3225TA E2J3225AW E2JM3225AW
500–1000 E2J3225TD E2J3225DW E2JM3225DW
1125–2250 E2J3225T E2J3225W E2JM3225W
250 1250–2500 E2J3250T E2J3250W E2JM3250W
Magnetic Only
250 300–650 E2J3250TMA E2J3250MAW E2JM3250MAW
450–900 E2J3250TMC E2J3250MCW E2JM250MCW
500–1000 E2J3250TMD E2J3250MDW E2JM3250MDW
625–1250 E2J3250TMF E2J3250MFW E2JM3250MFW
750–1500 E2J3250TMG E2J3250MGW E2JM3250MGW
875–1750 E2J3250TMJ E2J3250MJW E2JM3250MJW
1000–2000 E2J3250TMK E2J3250MKW E2JM3250MKW
1125–2250 E2J3250TML E2J3250MLW E2JM3250MLW
1250–2500 E2J3250TM E2J3250MW E2JM3250MW
E2J/E2JM
V4-T2-378 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
100 A–400 A
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 34
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic
100 500–1000 E2K3100T E2K3100W E2KM3100W E2KW3100W
125 625–1250 E2K3125T E2K3125W E2KM3125W E2KW3125W
150 750–1500 E2K3150T E2K3150W E2KM3150W E2KW3150W
175 875–1750 E2K3175T E2K3175W E2KM3175W E2KW3175W
200 1000–2000 E2K3200T E2K3200W E2KM3200W E2KW3200W
225 300–650 E2K3225TA E2K3225AW E2KM3225AW E2KW3225AW
500–1000 E2K3225TD E2K3225DW E2KM3225DW E2KW3225DW
1125–2250 E2K3225T E2K3225W E2KM3225W E2KW3225W
250 1250–2500 E2K3250T E2K3250W E2KM3250W E2KW3250W
300 1500–3000 E2K3300T E2K3300W E2KM3300W E2KW3300W
320 1600–3200 — — — E2KW3320W
350 1750–3500 E2K3350T E2K3350W E2KM3350W E2KW3350W
400 2000–4000 E2K3400T E2K3400W E2KM3400W —
Magnetic Only
400 300–650 E2K3400TMA E2K3400MAW E2KM3250MAW E2KW3250MAW
500–1000 E2K3400TMD E2K3400MDW E2KM3400MDW E2KW3350MDW
625–1250 E2K3400TMF E2K3400MFW E2KM3400MFW E2KW3350MFW
750–1500 E2K3400TMG E2K3400MGW E2KM3400MGW E2KW3350MGW
875–1750 E2K3400TMJ E2K3400MJW E2KM3400MJW E2KW3350MJW
1000–2000 E2K3400TMK E2K3400MKW E2KM3400MKW E2KW3350MKW
1125–2250 E2K3400TML E2K3400MLW E2KM3400MLW E2KW3350MLW
1250–2500 E2K3400TMW E2K3400MWW E2KM3400MWW E2KW3350MWW
1500–3000 E2K3400TMN E2K3400MNW E2KM3400MNW E2KW3350MNW
1600–3200 — — — E2KW3350MVW
1750–3500 E2K3400TMR E2K3400MRW E2KM3400MRW E2KW3350MRW
2000–4000 E2K3400TM E2K3400MW E2KM3400MW —
E2K/E2KM
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-379
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
100 A–400 A
E2KE/E2KEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2KE340038B20W, KEM3400TB20.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
150 50–800 KEM3150TM E2KE3150MW E2KEM3150MW
225 200–1500 KEM3225TM E2KE3225MW E2KEM3225MW
500–2500 KEM3225TM2 E2KE3225M2W E2KEM3225M2W
400 200–1500 KEM3400TM E2KE3400MW E2KEM3400MW
500–2500 KEM3400TM2 E2KE3400M2W E2KEM3400M2W
310+ Electronic LSI 3
100 50–800 KEM3100T E2KE3100W E2KEM3100W
125 50–800 KEM3125T E2KE3125W E2KEM3125W
150 50–800 KEM3150T E2KE3150W E2KEM3150W
200 200–1500 KEM3200T E2KE3200W E2KEM3200W
225 200–1500 KEM3225T E2KE3225W E2KEM3225
500–2500 KEM3225T2 E2KE32252W E2KEM32252W
400 200–1500 KEM3400T E2KE3400W E2KEM3400W
500–2500 KEM3400T2 E2KE34002W E2KEM34002W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
100 50–800 KEM310038T E2KE310038W E2KEM310038W
125 50–800 KEM312538T E2KE312538W E2KEM312538W
150 50–800 KEM315038T E2KE315038W E2KEM315038W
200 200–1500 KEM320038T E2KE320038W E2KEM320038W
225 200–1500 KEM322538T E2KE322538W E2KEM322538
500–2500 KEM322538T2 E2KE3225238W E2KEM3225238W
400 200–1500 KEM340038T E2KE340038W E2KEM340038W
500–2500 KEM340038T2 E2KE3400238W E2KEM3400238W
E2KM
V4-T2-380 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
160 A–400 A
E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)
Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Frame only: E2LME3400NN.
2Frame only: E2LMZ3400NN.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Magnetic Only
400 3600–4400 LT3400KM E2LME3400KMW E2LMZ3400KMW
Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit
160 320–1920 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
200 400–2400 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
225 450–2700 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
250 500–3000 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
300 600–3600 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
315 630–3780 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
350 700–4200 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
400 800–4800 LT340031M E2LME340031W E2LMZ340031W
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-381
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A–600 A
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1Frame only: E2L3600F.
2Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
4600 A thermal 1125–2250 T.A.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 3
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic
300 1500–3000 E2L3300T E2L3300W E2LM3300W E2LW3300W
320 2250–4500 E2L3450T E2L3450W E2LM3450W E2LW3320W
350 1600–3200 — — — E2LW3350W
400 1750–3500 E2L3350T E2L3350W E2LM3350W E2LW3400W
450 2000–4000 E2L3400T E2L3400W E2LM3400W E2LW3450W
500 2500–5000 E2L3500T E2L3500W E2LM3500W —
600 3000–6000 E2L3600T E2L3600W E2LM3600W —
1125–2250 E2L3600TL 4———
Magnetic Only
450 1600–3200 — — — E2LW3450MVW
1125–2250 — — — E2LW3450MLW
1500–3000 — — — E2LW3450MNW
1750–3500 — — — E2LW3450MRW
2000–4000 — — — E2LW3450MXW
2250–4500 — — — E2LW3450MYW
600 1125–2250 E2L3600TML E2L3600MLW E2LM3600MLW —
1500–3000 E2L3600TMN E2L3600MNW E2LM3600MNW —
1750–3500 E2L3600TMR E2L3600MRW E2LM3600MRW —
2000–4000 E2L3600TMX E2L3600MXW E2LM3600MXW —
2250–4500 E2L3600TMY E2L3600MYW E2LM3600MYW —
2500–5000 E2L3600TMP E2L3600MPW E2LM3600MPW —
3000–6000 E2L3600TM E2L3600MW E2LM3600MW —
V4-T2-382 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A–600 A
E2LE/E2LEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2LE360038B20W, LEM3600TB20.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
400 500–2500 LEM3400TM E2LE3400MW E2LEM3400MW
1000–4000 LEM3400TM2 E2LE3400M2W E2LEM3400M2W
600 500–2500 LEM3600TM E2LE3600MW E2LEM3600MW
2500–5000 LEM3600TM2 E2LE3600M2W E2LEM3600M2W
310+ Electronic LSI 3
300 500–2500 LEM3300T E2LE3300W E2LEM3300W
350 500–2500 LEM3350T E2LE3350W E2LEM3350W
400 500–2500 LEM3400T E2LE3400W E2LEM3400W
1000–4000 LEM3400T2 E2LE34002W E2LEM34002W
600 500–2500 LEM3600T E2LE3600W E2LEM3600W
2500–5000 LEM3600T2 E2LE36002W E2LEM36002W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
300 500–2500 LEM330038T E2LE330038W E2LEM330038W
350 500–2500 LEM335038T E2LE335038W E2LEM335038W
400 500–2500 LEM340038T E2LE340038W E2LEM340038W
1000–4000 LEM340038T2 E2LE3400238W E2LEM3400238W
600 500–2500 LEM360038T E2LE360038W E2LEM360038W
2500–5000 LEM360038T2 E2LE3600238W E2LEM3600238W
E2LM
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-383
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A— 800 A
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
12 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 34
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Thermal-Magnetic
400 1000–2000 ———E2MW3400W
500 1250–2500 ———E2MW3500W
600 1500–3000 E2M3600TN E2M3600W E2MM3600W E2MW3600W
630 1600–3200 ———E2MW3630W
800 2000–4000 E2M3800TX E2M3800W E2MM3800W E2MW3800W
Magnetic Only
800 1500–3000 E2M3800TMN E2M3800MNW E2MM3800MNW E2MW3800MNW
1600–3200 — — — E2MW3800MVW
2000–4000 E2M3800TMX E2M3800MXW E2MM3800MXW E2MW3800MXW
2500–5000 E2M3800TMP E2M3800MPW E2MM3800MPW —
3000–6000 E2M3800TMW E2M3800MWW E2MM3800MWW —
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
V4-T2-384 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
800 A
E2ME/E2MEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2ME380038B20W, MEM3800TB20.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
800 500–2500 MEM3800TM E2ME3800MW E2MEM3800MW
1000–4000 MEM3800TM2 E2ME3800M2W E2MEM3800M2W
310+ Electronic LSI 3
800 500–2500 MEM3800T E2ME3800W E2MEM3800W
1000–4000 MEM3800T2 E2ME38002W E2MEM38002W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
800 500–2500 MEM380038T E2ME380038W E2MEM380038W
1000–4000 MEM380038T2 E2ME3800382W E2MEM3800382W
E2MN
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-385
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
400 A–1200 A
E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2N380038B20W.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
800 500–2500 — E2N3800MW E2NM3800MW
1200 1250–5000 — E2N312MW E2NM312MW
310+ Electronic LSI 1
400 500–2500 — E2N3400W E2NM3400W
500 500–2500 — E2N3500W E2N3M500W
600 500–2500 — E2N3600W E2NM3600W
700 500–2500 — E2N3700W E2NM3700W
800 500–2500 — E2N3800W E2NM3800W
900 1250–5000 — E2N3900W E2NM3900W
1000 1250–5000 — E2N310W E2NM310W
1200 1250–5000 — E2N312W E2NM312W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1
400 500–2500 — E2N340038W E2NM340038W
500 500–2500 — E2N350038W E2NM350038W
600 500–2500 — E2N360038W E2NM360038W
700 500–2500 — E2N370038W E2NM370038W
800 500–2500 — E2N380038W E2NM380038W
900 1250–5000 — E2N390038W E2NM390038W
1000 1250–5000 — E2N31038W E2NM31038W
1200 1250–5000 — E2N31238W E2NM31238W
E2NM
V4-T2-386 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
1600 A–2000 A
E2R/E2RM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2R1638B20W.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic LSI 1
1600 2–8 x In— E2R316W E2RM316W
2000 2–8 x In— E2R320W E2RM320W
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1
1600 2–8 x In— E2R316T38W E2RM316T38W
2000 2–8 x In— E2R320T38W E2RM320T38W
E2RM
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-387
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Line and Load Terminals
End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals
External Accessories
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range
(No. Conductors)
Catalog
Number
E2F/E2FM 100 Cu/AI #14–1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three)
150 Cu #4–4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three)
E2J/E2JM 250 Cu #4–350 (1) T250KB
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 225 Cu #3–350 (1) T300K
350 Cu 250–500 (1) T350K
400 Cu 2/0–250 (2) 3T400K (three-pole kit)
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 3TA631LK
E2L/E2LM/E2LW 400 Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
600 Cu 250–350 (2) T602LD
E2M/E2MM/E2MW 600 Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1
600 Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1
800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2
800 Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA
800 Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1
E2N/E2NM 700 Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1
1000 Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1
1200 Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3
1600 Cu/AI 500–1000 (4) TA1600RD
2000 Cu/AI 2–600 (6) TA2000RD
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Catalog
Number
Metric
Catalog
Number Imperial
E2F/E2FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 —
E2J/E2JM 250 KPEK2 KPEMK2 —
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 —
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 —L3RTWK—
E2L/E2LM/E2LW 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 —
Breaker Type
Catalog
Number
E2F/E2FM PLK1
E2J/E2JM PLK3
E2K/E2KM/E2KW PLK3
E2LME/E2LMZ LPHL
E2L/E2LM/E2LW HLK4
E2M/E2MM/E2MW HLK4
E2N/E2NM PLK5
E2R/E2RM HLK6
V4-T2-388 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Internal Accessories
Undervoltage Release 1
Notes
1Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
2LH (RH also available).
3Pigtail leads.
4Terminal blocks.
5RH only.
Breaker
Type
UVR
Type
Voltage
Rating
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification Code
E2F/E2FM Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2U18
Handle reset 110–127 Vdc Left pole UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) 2U42
E2J/E2JM Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH2LP08K 2U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH2LP11K 2U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH2LP26K 2T14
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K 23 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08KT 24 U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH3LP08K 2U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH3LP11K 2U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH3LP26K 2T14
E2LME/E2LMZ Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVR120APK U5
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVR125DPK U6
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/E2MM/
E2MW
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K 23 U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08KT 24 U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH4LP08K 2U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH4LP11K 2U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH4LP26K 2T14
E2N/E2NM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K 3U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K 4U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH5LP08K 2U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K 2U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH5LP26K 2T14
E2R/E2RM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K 35 U58
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K 5U49
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K 5U53
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Right pole UVH6RP26K 5T33
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-389
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Shunt Trip 1
Auxiliary Switch
Breaker
Type
Voltage
Rating
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 48–127 Vac or
48–60 Vdc
Left pole SNT1LP08K 2S06
208–230 Vac or
110–127 Vdc
Left pole SNT1LP12K 2S10
E2J/E2JM 110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole SNT2P11K 3S10
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole SNT3P11K 3S10
E2LME/E2LMZ 24–60 Vac/dc Left pole SNT060CPK S1
110–240 Vac/dc Left pole SNT120CPK S2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
48–60 Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K 2S06
48–60 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP23K 2S86
110–240 Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K 2S10
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP26K 2S42
E2N/E2NM 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K 2S10
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT5LP26K 2S42
E2R/E2RM 110–240 Vac Right pole SNT6P11K 4S29
110–125 Vdc Right pole SNT6P26K 4S45
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
(1A and 1B)
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06
2RightA2X1RPK A13
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1X2PK A06
2RightA2X2PK A13
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1X3PK A06
2RightA2X3PK A13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1
2RightAUX2A2BPK A2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
1RightA1X4PK A06
2RightA2X4PK A13
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06
2RightA2X5PK A13
E2R/E2RM 2 Right A2X6RPK A12
4RightA4X6RPK A19
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)
Notes
1Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
2LH (RH also available).
3LH or RH.
4RH only.
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06
2RightA2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06
E2K/E2KM/E2KW 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06
2RightA2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1
2RightALM2M2BJPK B3
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
1RightA1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06
2RightA2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06
2RightA2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13
E2R/E2RM 1 Right A1L6RPK B05
2RightA2L6RPK B12
V4-T2-390 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
3 A–150 A
E2F/E2FM
Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units
70 A–250 A
E2J/E2JM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 4.13 (104.9)
B 6.00 (152.4)
C 3.38 (85.9)
D 3.50 (88.9)
On
Off
A C
D
B
Front View Side View
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 4.13 (104.9)
B 10.00 (254.0)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.31 (109.5)
ON/
OFF/
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-391
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
100 A–400 A
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
100 A–400 A
E2KE/E2KEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic
Trip Units
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 5.49 (139.4)
B 10.13 (257.3)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.31 (109.5)
ON
OFF
B
AC
D
Front View Side View
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 5.49 (139.4)
B 10.13 (257.3)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.31 (109.5)
ON
OFF
B
AC
D
Front View Side View
V4-T2-392 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
160 A–400 A
E2LME/E2LMZ
Circuit Breakers
300 A–600 A
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 5.48 (139.2)
B 10.13 (257.3)
C 4.00 (101.6)
D 4.22 (107.1)
On/I On/I
Off/O Off/O
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 10.75 (273.1)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.38 (111.3)
On/I On/I
Off/O Off/O
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-393
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
300 A–600 A
E2LE/E2LEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
300 A–800 A
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 10.75 (273.1)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.38 (111.3)
On/I On/I
Off/O Off/O
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.38 (111.3)
On/I On/I
Off/O Off/O
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
V4-T2-394 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
800 A
E2ME/E2MEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
400 A–1200 A
E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4)
C 4.06 (103.1)
D 4.38 (111.3)
On/I On/I
Off/O Off/O
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 8.25 (209.6)
B 16.00 (406.4)
C 5.50 (139.7)
D 6.00 (152.4)
ON/I
OFF/O
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-395
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
1600 A–2000 A
E2R/ E2RM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
B
A
Front View Side View
C
D
Description Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A 15.50 (393.7)
B 16.00 (406.4)
C 9.00 (228.6)
D 10.00 (254.0)
V4-T2-396 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-398
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-403
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-405
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . V4-T2-410
Classic Mining Breakers
Product Overview
Classic mining service circuit
breakers continue to be
manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve
an exact physical and
electronic replacement of
previously Cutler-Hammer
installed Westinghouse
equipment. To upgrade to the
current offering of E2 mining
circuit breakers, consult the
cross reference information
on Page V4-T2-405.
AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes
Special DC Interrupting Capacity
Notes
1Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater.
2HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes.
3Resistive circuit.
4Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit.
Breaker Type
60 Hz
AC Volts KAM LAM, MAM, NBM HKAM HLAM 2
All Other 1000 Volt
Breakers 2
240 25,000 42,000 — — —
480 22,000 30,000 — — —
600 22,000 22,000 — — —
1000 1— — 10,000 12,000 14,000
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at 300–330 Vdc
Single-Pole Two Poles in Series 4
Maximum
Ampere Rating 0.0–0.15 mH Inductance 30.15–0.5 mH Inductance 0.5–0.9 mH Inductance 2.4 mH Inductance
KAM 225 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
LAM 400/600 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
MAM 800 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
NBM 1200 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-397
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service
Undervoltage Release Data
Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 72 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between
35 to 70% of rated voltage.
Shunt Trip Coil Data
Notes
1Supplied for external customer mounting.
2New design electrical reset UVR.
316,000 for Type MAM and HMAM.
Breaker
Type Volt s
Line
Amperes
Series
Resistors 1
Total
VA
KAM, HKAM 1480/60 0.021 10,000 10.1
240/60 0.019 — 4.6
120/60 0.021 — 2.5
120/60 20.13 — 15.6
LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM 1
480/60 0.033 12,000 315.9
240/60 0.028 6,000 6.7
120/60 0.029 — 3.5
120/60 20.13 — 15.6
Breaker
Type Volts Amperes VA
KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM
480/60 0.085 40.8
240/60 1.7 408
120/60 0.88 105.6
48 DC 8.0 384
V4-T2-398 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-405.
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Terminals not included in style number.
2All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
3Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
4UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers 12 Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 3
KAM 2609D60G64 2 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G07 2 180 M UVR 4200–400
2609D60G66 2 180 M Standard shunt trip 3200–400
1291C26G01 2 225 TM UVR 4300–700
1291C26G02 2 225 TM UVR 4500–1000
2609D60G67 3 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G08 3 180 M UVR 4200–400
2609D60G69 3 180 M Standard shunt trip 3200–400
5685D48G75 3 225 TM None 300–700
5685D48G74 3 225 TM None 500–1000
1291C26G03 3 225 TM UVR 4300–700
1291C26G04 3 225 TM UVR 4500–1000
2609D60G01 3 225 TM Standard shunt trip 3300–700
2609D60G02 3 225 TM Standard shunt trip 3500–1000
2609D60G40 3 225 M None 300–700
2609D60G41 3 225 M None 500–700
1291C26G05 3 225 M UVR 4300–700
1291C26G06 3 225 M UVR 4500–1000
LAM 1291C32G01 2 400 TM UVR 4500–1000
2609D60G61 2 400 M Shunt trip (48 Vdc) 750–1500
1291C32G03 3 400 TM UVR 4500–1000
5685D48G73 3 400 TM None 800–1600
1291C32G02 3 400 TM UVR 4800–1600
2609D60G03 3 400 TM Standard shunt trip 3800–1600
2609D60G44 3 400 M None 800–1600
1291C32G04 3 400 M UVR 4800–1600
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-399
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-405.
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued
Notes
1Terminals not included in style number.
2All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
3Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
4UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers 12 Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 3
MAM 2609D60G17 2 600 TM UVR 3750–1500
2609D60G18 2 800 TM UVR 31000–2000
2609D60G63 3 400 TM UVR 32000–4000
5685D48G72 3 600 TM None 1500–3000
2609D60G19 3 600 TM UVR 31500–3000
2609D60G04 3 600 TM Standard shunt trip 31500–3000
2609D60G05 3 800 TM Standard shunt trip 32000–4000
5685D48G71 3 800 TM None 2000–4000
2609D60G20 3 800 TM UVR 32000–4000
2609D60G46 3 800 M None 1500–3000
2609D60G47 3800MUVR 31500–3000
2609D60G48 3 800 M None 2000–4000
2609D60G49 3800MUVR 32000–4000
NBM 1229C37G13 21000TMUVR 41500–3000
1229C37G14 21200TMUVR 42000–4000
1227C36G10 3 1000 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G15 31000TMUVR 42500–5000
1227C36G13 3 1000 TM Standard shunt trip 32500–5000
1227C36G14 3 1200 TM Standard shunt trip 32500–5000
1227C36G09 3 1200 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G16 31200TMUVR 42500–5000
1227C36G19 3 1200 M None 2500–5000
1229C37G17 31200MUVR 42500–5000
V4-T2-400 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
Notes
1 The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed.
2 120 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type.
3 Rated 120 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 1
HKAM 2609D60G70 3 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G16 3180MUVR 2200–400
5685D48G87 3 225 TM None 300–700
1291C26G12 3 225 TM UVR 2300–700
5685D48G86 3 225 TM None 500–1000
1291C26G13 3 225 TM UVR 2500–1000
1291C26G14 3225MUVR 2300–700
1291C26G15 3225MUVR 2500–1000
HLAM 5685D48G85 3 400 TM None 800–1600
1291C32G07 3 400 TM UVR 2800–1600
1291C32G09 3400MUVR 2800–1600
HMAM 5685D48G84 3 600 TM None 1500–3000
2609D60G28 3 600 TM UVR 31500–3000
5685D48G83 3 800 TM None 2000–4000
2609D60G29 3 800 TM UVR 32000–4000
2609D60G57 3800MUVR 31500–3000
2609D60G58 3800MUVR 32000–4000
HNBM 1227C36G12 3 1000 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G19 3 1000 TM UVR 22500–5000
1227C36G11 3 1200 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G20 3 1200 TM UVR 22500–5000
1229C37G18 3 1200 M UVR 22500–5000
HKAM
HLAM
HMAM
HNAM
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-401
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only
Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Notes
1Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
2Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
3Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers.
4800 amperes.
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Style
Numbers
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Style
Numbers
KAM 1225 2 2602D86G11 MAM 2800 2 2600D43G11
225 3 2602D86G12 800 3 2600D43G12
KAMH 1225 2 2602D86G13 MAMH 2800 2 2600D43G13
225 3 2602D86G14 800 3 2600D43G14
HKAM 1225 3 1264C99G05 HMAM 2800 3 1264C99G03
LAM 2400 2 2602D99G05 NBM 21200 2 2610D64G07
400 3 2602D99G06 1200 3 2610D64G08
LAMH 2400 2 2602D99G07 NBMH 21200 2 2610D64G09
400 3 2602D99G08 1200 3 2610D64G10
HLAM 2400 3 1264C99G02 HNBM 21200 3 2610D64G13
LAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G07
LAMH3600F 600 3 2603D48G08
HLAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G09
Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Only
Breaker
Type
Conductor
Size
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
Maximum Continuous
Amperes
Three-Pole 3
Style Numbers
Three-Pole
Style Numbers
HKAM #6 150–400 180 — 2609D99G22
#4–#3 300–700 225 5685D48G40 2611D75G01
#4–#1 500–1000 225 5685D48G34 2611D75G02
HLAM #4–#1 750–1500 400 5685D48G97 2609D99G21
#2–#2/0 800–1600 400 5685D48G28 2611D75G03
HLAM600 #2–2/0 750–1500 600 2609D99G20 —
2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 2609D99G19 —
HMAM #2–#2/0 750–1500 600 ——
2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 5685D48G22 2611D75G04 4
#1–3/0 1000–2000 800 ——
3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 800 5685D48G16 2611D75G05
HNBM 2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 1000 ——
4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1000 5685D48G10 —
3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 1200 ——
4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1200 5685D48G04 2611D75G07
V4-T2-402 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers
Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound.
Terminals For Mining Service Breakers
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Package of 3 Line Terminals
Style Number
Wire Range,
Type
FBM, HFBM Style pressure type terminals 100 624B100G02 #14–1/0 Al/Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 50 624B100G10 #14–#4 Al/Cu
100 624B100G17 # 4–4/0 Al/Cu
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Terminal
Catalog Number
Wire Range, Type
Number of Cables
KAM, HKAM Standard pressure terminals (copper only) 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
LAM Standard copper pressure terminals 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
400 T401LA (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
400 TA400LA1 (1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu
400 TA401LA (1) 600–750 kcmil Al
LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600 Standard copper pressure terminals 600 T600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
MAM, HMAM, MAMH Standard copper pressure terminals 350 T350MA (1) #1–600 kcmil Cu
600 T600MA1 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu
800 T800MA1 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA700MA1 (2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu
800 TA800MA2 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
800 TA801MA (2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
NBM, HNBM, NBMH Standard copper pressure terminals 1000 T1000NB1 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu
1200 T1200NB1 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 1000 TA1000NB1 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
1200 TA1200NB1 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu
1200 TA1201NB1 (3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-403
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Rear Connected Studs 1
For complete stud assembly,
order a stud and tube based
on thickness of customer’s
mounting panel. A short stud
must be assembled adjacent
to a long stud to maintain
clearances required by
Underwriters Laboratories.2
Two studs required per pole.
For List Prices, see Eaton’s
Price and Availability Digest.
Mounting Panel
Thickness In
Inches (mm)
Stud Tube
Length
Style
Numbers
Length In
Inches (mm)
Style
Numbers
KAM, HKAM Breakers
0.75 (19.1)–1.00 (25.4) Short 656D565G01 0.84 (21.3) 456D983H05
Long 656D565G02 3.78 (96.0) 456D983H08
0.50 (12.7)–0.75 (19.1) Short 656D565G01 1.09 (27.7) 456D983H06
Long 656D565G02 4.03 (102.4) 456D983H09
0.25 (6.4)–0.50 (12.7) Short 656D565G01 1.34 (34.0) 456D983H07
Long 656D565G02 4.28 (108.7) 456D983H10
Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole
Line and Load Terminal Shields 5
Notes
1Not UL Iisted.
2400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer
connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud.
3150, 300 and 400 ampere frames only.
4This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts
must be used.
5For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10.
Stud
Ampere Number
Diameter, In
Inches (mm)
and Thread
Extension Back
of Breaker In
Inches (mm)
Stud
Style Numbers
LAM, HLAM Breakers
225 30.50 (12.7)–13 3.22 (81.8) 1241 345
0.50 (12.7)–13 6.28 (159.5) 1241 346
225 34 0.50 (12.7)–13 4.97 (126.2) 1241 392
400 30.75 (19.1)–16 5.47 (138.9) 05B7383G22
0.75 (19.1)–16 7.97 (202.4) 05B7383G23
0.75 (19.1)–16 10.47 (265.9) 05B7383G24
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G16
1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G17
1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G18
MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04
0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05
0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G06
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07
1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08
1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G09
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 4.91 (124.7) 314C960G10
1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11
1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G12
NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.50 (139.7) 623B222G01
1.13 (28.7)–12 8.00 (203.2) 623B222G02
1.13 (28.7)–12 10.50 (266.7) 623B222G03
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.50 (139.7) 373B375G04
1.25 (31.8)–12 10.50 (266.7) 373B375G03
Breaker Type Description Style Numbers
KAM Line terminals 1261C93G01
Load terminals 1262C46G01
LAM-400 Line terminals 1261C95G01
Load terminals 1262C48G01
MAM Line terminals 1261C97G01
Load terminals 1261C97G02
V4-T2-404 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release
For Classic breakers field
mountable on special frames
listed on Page V4-T2-405, or
replacement on breakers
originally equipped with this
type UVR.
For undervoltage protection.
A solenoid device mounts
within breaker case. Coil
must be energized before
closing breaker. Trips breaker
when voltage drops below
35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks
up and seals in at 72 to 85%
of coil rating. For line voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain ratings.
Standard leads extend 18.00
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
Breaker
Type Volts
Style
Numbers
Right-Hand Mounting
LAM, HLAM 120 Vac 4995D12G11
120 Vac 11228C76G03
240 Vac 4995D12G13
480 Vac 4995D12G14
125 Vdc 4995D12G09
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
120 Vac 5672D69G11
120 Vac 1—
240 Vac 5672D69G13
480 Vac 5672D69G14
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
120 Vac 4995D11G11
120 Vac 11229C35G03
240 Vac 4995D11G13
480 Vac 4995D11G14
Left-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 120 Vac 4995D10G01
120 Vac 11228C76G03
240 Vac 4995D10G03
480 Vac 4995D10G04
Shunt Trips
For tripping breaker from a
remote point. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when coil
is energized. A cutoff switch
breaks the circuit to the
momentary rated coil when
breaker opens. Available for
control voltages up to 250
Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and
frequency must be specified.
Standard leads extend 18.00
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
Notes
1Electrical reset UVR.
2Auto reset type.
Breaker
Type
Volts
(50–60 Hz)
Style
Numbers
Right-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 2605D15G16
240 Vac 2605D15G17
120 Vac 2605D15G19
LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 2606D56G16
240 Vac 2606D56G17
120 Vac 2606D56G19
48 Vdc 2606D56G07
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
480 Vac 2606D57G16
240 Vac 2606D57G17
120 Vac 2606D57G19
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
480 Vac 2606D58G16
240 Vac 2606D58G17
120 Vac 2606D58G19
Left-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 2605D15G02
240 Vac 2605D15G03
120 Vac 2605D15G05
LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 2606D56G02
240 Vac 2606D56G03
120 Vac 2606D56G05
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
480 Vac 2606D57G02
240 Vac 2606D57G03
120 Vac 2606D57G05
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
480 Vac 2606D58G02
240 Vac 2606D58G03
120 Vac 2606D58G05
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-405
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Reference Information
E2 Cross-Reference
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
1491D72G31 E2J3070T
1491D72G32 E2J3090T
1491D72G33 E2J3100T
1491D72G37 E2J3200T
6622C87G27 E2K3225AWU66
6622C87G28 E2K3225DWU66
6622C87G32 E2K3400GWU66
E2KM3100 E2KEM3100W
E2KM3100U66 E2KEM3100WU66
E2KM3125 E2KEM3125W
E2KM3125U66 E2KEM3125WU66
E2KM3150 E2KEM3150W
E2KM3150MU66 E2KEM3150WU66
E2KM3150TM E2KEM3150MW
E2KM3150U66 E2KEM3150MWU66
E2KM3200 E2KEM3200W
E2KM3200U66 E2KEM3200WU66
E2KM3225 E2KEM3225W
E2KM3225F E2KM3400F
E2KM3225FUV E2KM3400F
E2KM3225MU66 E2KEM3225MWU66
E2KM3225TM E2KEM3225TM
E2KM3225U66 E2KEM3225WU66
E2LM3300U66 E2LEM3300WU66
E2LM3350U66 E2LEM3350WU66
E2LM34002U66 E2LEM34002WU66
E2LM3400F E2LM3600F
E2LM3400FUV E2LM3600F
E2LM3400M2U66 E2LEM3400M2WU66
E2LM3400MU66 E2LEM3400MWU66
E2LM3400U66 E2LEM3400WU66
FDBM3015 E2F3015
FDBM3015WU62 E2F3015WU62
FDBM3020 E2F3020
FDBM3025 E2F3025
FDBM3025U62 E2F3025U62
FDBM3030 E2F3030
FDBM3030U62 E2F3030WU62
FDBM3030WU62 E2F3030WU62
FDBM3035 E2F3035
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
FDBM3040 E2F3040
FDBM3045 E2F3045
FDBM3050 E2F3050
FDBM3050U62 E2F3050U62
FDBM3050WU62 E2F3050WU62
FDBM3060 E2F3060
FDBM3070 E2F3070
FDBM3070WU62 E2F3070WU62
FDBM3080 E2F3080
FDBM3090 E2F3090
FDBM3100 E2F3100
FDBM3100LM04U62 E2F3100M04U62
FDBM3125 E2F3125
FDBM3150 E2F3150
FDBM3150L E2F3150L
FDM3015 E2F3015
FDM3015L E2F3015L
FDM3015LU62 E2F3015LU62
FDM3020 E2F3020
FDM3020LU62 E2F3020LU62
FDM3025 E2F3025
FDM3025L E2F3025L
FDM3025LS22 E2F3025LS22
FDM3025LU62 E2F3025LU62
FDM3030 E2F3030
FDM3030LS22 E2F3030LS22
FDM3040 E2F3040
FDM3040L E2F3040L
FDM3040LU62 E2F3040LU62
FDM3050 E2F3050
FDM3050LU62 E2F3050LU62
FDM3050U62 E2F3050U62
FDM3060 E2F3060
FDM3060LU62 E2F3060LU62
FDM3070 E2F3070
FDM3070A02U62 E2F3070A02U62
FDM3080 E2F3080
FDM3090 E2F3090
FDM3100 E2F3100
FDM3100LS22 E2F3100LS22
V4-T2-406 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
FDM3100LU62 E2FLU62
FDM3125 E2F3125
FDM3125LU62 E2F3125LU62
FDM3150 E2F3150
HFDM003AM E2F003AM
HFDM003AMLU62 E2F003AMLU62
HFDM007CM E2F007CM
HFDM007CMU62 E2F007CMU62
HFDM015EM E2F015EM
HFDM015EMA02 E2F015EMA02
HFDM015EMLU62 E2F015EMLU62
HFDM015EMU62 E2F015EMU62
HFDM030HM E2F030HM
HFDM030HMLU62 E2F030HMLU62
HFDM030HMU62 E2F030HMU62
HFDM050KM E2F050KM
HFDM050KML E2F050KML
HFDM050KMLU62 E2F050KMLU62
HFDM050KMU62 E2F050KMU62
HFDM070MM E2F070MM
HFDM070MMU62 E2F070MMU62
HFDM1001M E2F1001M
HFDM1001MS22 E2F1001MS22
HFDM100LM E2F100LM
HFDM100LMA02 E2F100LMA02
HFDM100LMU62 E2F100LMU62
HFDM 100RM E2F100RM
HFDM100RML E2F100RML
HFDM100RMS22 E2F100RMS22
HFDM100RMU62 E2F100RMU62
HFDM150TM E2F150TM
HFDM150TML E2F150TML
HFDM150TMU62 E2F150TMU62
HFDM150UM E2F150UM
JCDA2D1S30 E2JM250MDA2D1S30
JCMA2D1S30 E2JM250MFA2D1S30
JDCM3070W E2JM3070W
JDCM3090W E2JM3090W
JDCM3100W E2JM3100W
JDCM3125W E2JM3125W
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JDCM3150W E2JM3150W
JDCM3175W E2JM3175W
JDCM3200W E2JM3200W
JDCM3225A5W E2JM3225AW
JDCM3225D5W E2JM3225DW
JDCM3225W E2JM3225W
JDCM3250A5MW E2JM3250MAW
JDCM3250A5MWU18 E2JM3250MAWU18
JDCM3250A5W E2JM3250AW
JDCM3250C5MW E2JM3250MCW
JDCM3250D5MW E2JM3250MDW
JDCM3250D5MWA06 E2JM3250MDWA06
JDCM3250D5W E2JM3250DW
JDCM3250D5WS10 E2JM3250DWS10
JDCM3250F E2JM3250F
JDCM3250F5MD01 E2JM3250MFD01
JDCM3250F5MW E2JM3250MFW
JDCM3250G5MW E2JM3250MGW
JDCM3250G5WA02D01 E2JM3250MGA02D01
JDCM3250J5MW E2JM3250MJW
JDCM3250J5MWA02 E2JM3250MJA02
JDCM3250J5WA02D01 E2JM3250MJA02D01
JDCM3250J5WD01 E2JM3250MJD01
JDCM3250K5MW E2JM3250MKW
JDCM3250L5MW E2JM3250MLW
JDCM3250MW E2JM3250MW
JDCM3250W E2JM3250W
JDCMAA2D1 E2JM3250MM02D01
JDCMDD1S30 E2JM3250MDS30D01
JDCMFD01 E2JM3250MFD01
JDCMGA02D1 E2JM3250MGA02D01
JDCMJA2D1 E2JM3250MJA02D01
JDCMJD01 E2JM3250MJD01
JDM2250F E2JM3250F
JDM3070W E2J3070W
JDM3090W E2J3090W
JDM3100W E2J3100W
JDM3125W E2J3125W
JDM3150W E2J3150W
JDM3150WU18 E2J3150WU18
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-407
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JDM3175W E2J3175W
JDM3200W E2J3200W
JDM3200WA06 E2J3200WA06
JDM3225A5W E2J3225AW
JDM3225D5W E2J3225DW
JDM3225W E2J3225W
JDM3250A5MW E2J3250MAW
JDM3250A5W E2J3250AW
JDM3250C5MW E2J3250CW
JDM3250D5MW E2J3250MDW
JDM3250D5W E2J3250DW
JDM3250F E2J3250F
JDM3250F5MW E2J3250MFW
JDM3250G5MW E2J3250MGW
JDM3250J5MW E2J3250MJW
JDM3250K5MW E2J3250MKW
JDM3250L5MW E2J3250MLW
JDM3250MW E2J3250MW
JDM3250W E2J3250W
JDM3250WS10 E2J3250WS10
JM2225T1125-2250 E2J3225T
JM3070T E2J3070T
JM3090T E2J3090T
JM3100T E2J3100T
JM3125T E2J3125T
JM3150T E2J3150T
JM3175T E2J3175T
JM3200T E2J3200T
JM3225T E2J3225T
JM3225TA5 E2J3225TA
JM3225TD5 E2J3225TD
JM3250T E2J3250T
JM3250TA5 E2J3250TA
JM3250TA5M_350-700 E2J3250TMA
JM3250TC5M E2J3250TMC
JM3250TD5_500-1000 E2J3250TMD
JM3250TF5M_625-1250 E2J3250TMF
JM3250TG5M_750-1500 E2J3250TMG
JM3250TJ5M_875-1750 E2J3250TMJ
JM3250TK5M_1000-2000 E2J3250TMK
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JM3250TL5M_1125-2250 E2J3250TML
JM3250TM E2J3250TM
KDCM3100W E2KM3100W
KDCM3125W E2KM3125W
KDCM3150W E2KM3150W
KDCM3175W E2KM3175W
KDCM3200W E2KM3200W
KDCM3225A5MW E2KM3200MAW
KDCM3225D5MW E2KM3200MDW
KDCM3225W E2KM3225W
KDCM3250W E2KM3250W
KDCM3250WU18 E2KM3250WU18
KDCM3300W E2KM3300W
KDCM3350W E2KM3350W
KDCM3400D5MA02D09H04 E2KM3400MDA02D09H04
KDCM3400D5MW E2KM3400MDW
KDCM3400D5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MDA02D07
KDCM3400D5W E2KM3400DW
KDCM3400D5WD09 E2KM3400DD09
KDCM3400F E2KM3400F
KDCM3400F5MW E2KM3400MFW
KDCM3400FD09G04 E2KM3400MFD09G04
KDCM3400G5MW E2KM3400MGD09G05
KDCM3400G5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MGD09H04
KDCM3400G5W E2KM3400MGW
KDCM3400G5WD07 E2KM3400MGD07
KDCM3400J5MA02D09 E2KM3400MJA02D09
KDCM3400J5MA2D9G4S30 E2KM3400MJA2D9G4S30
KDCM3400J5MD09 E2KM3400MJD09
KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30 E2KM3400MJD09H04S30
KDCM3400J5MW E2KM3400MJW
KDCM3400J5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MJA02D07
KDCM3400J5MWA06 E2KM3400MJWA06
KDCM3400J5MWD07S30 E2KM3400MJD07S30
KDCM3400J5WD07 E2KM3400MJD07
KDCM3400K5MW E2KM3400MKW
KDCM3400K5MWS10 E2KM3400MKWS10
KDCM3400K5MWU18 E2KM3400MKWU18
KDCM3400L5MW E2KM3400MLW
KDCM3400L5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MLD09H04
V4-T2-408 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
KDCM3400L5MWS10 E2KM3400MLWS10
KDCM3400L5WD07 E2KM3400MLD07
KDCM3400MW E2KM3400MW
KDCM3400N5MW E2KM3400MNW
KDCM3400N5MWA06 E2KM3400MNWA06
KDCM3400N5WA02D07 E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDCM3400R5MW E2KM3400MRW
KDCM3400W E2KM3400W
KDCM3400W5MW E2KM3400MWW
KDCMDMD07 E2KM3400MDD07
KDCMNA2D7 E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDM2400F E2K2400F
KDM2400G5MS50 E2K2400MGWS50
KDM2400G5MW E2K2400MGW
KDM2400W5MW E2K2400MWW
KDM2400W5MWA06D07S10 E2K2400MWA06D07S10
KDM2400W5MWA06D10S10 E2K2400MWA06D10S10
KDM2400W5MWD07 E2K2400MWD07
KDM2400W5MWD07S10 E2K2400MWD07S10
KDM2400W5MWD10 E2K2400MWD10
KDM2400W5MWD10S10 E2K2400MWD10S10
KDM2400W5MWS10 E2K2400MWWS10
KDM3100W E2K3100W
KDM3125W E2K3125W
KDM3150W E2K3150W
KDM3150WA06 E2K3150WA06
KDM3175W E2K3175W
KDM3200W E2K3200W
KDM3225A5W E2K3225AW
KDM3225D5A13D09U18 E2K3225DA13D09U18
KDM3225D5MW E2K3400MDW
KDM3225D5W E2K3225DW
KDM3225F E2K3400F
KDM3225W E2K3225W
KDM3225WK37 E2KE3225W
KDM3225WK37U18 E2KE3225WU18
KDM3225WK38 E2KE3225MW
KDM3250W E2K3250W
KDM3300W E2K3300W
KDM3300WA06U18 E2K3300WA06U18
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
KDM3300WS10 E2K3300WS10
KDM3350W E2K3350W
KDM3400D5MW E2K3400MDW
KDM3400D5W E2K3400DW
KDM3400D5WU18 E2K3400DWU18
KDM3400F E2K3400F
KDM3400F5MW E2K3400MFW
KDM3400FK37A06D09D18 E2KE3400A06D09D18
KDM3400G5A06D09U18 E2K3400GA06D09U18
KDM3400G5A13D09U18 E2K3400GA13D09U18
KDM3400G5MW E2K3400MGW
KDM3400G5W E2K3400GW
KDM3400G5WA06 E2K3400GWS10
KDM3400G5WS10 E2K3400GWS10
KDM3400G5WU18 E2K3400GWU18
KDM3400J5MW E2K3400MJW
KDM3400K5MS54 E2K3400MKWS54
KDM3400K5MW E2K3400MKW
KDM3400L5MW E2K3400MLW
KDM3400MW E2K3400MW
KDM3400MWA06U18 E2K3400MWA06U18
KDM3400N5MW E2K3400MNW
KDM3400R5MW E2K3400MRW
KDM3400W E2K3400W
KDM3400W5MW E2K3400MWW
KEM3100T KEM3100T
KEM3125T KEM3125T
KEM3150T KEM3150T
KEM3150TM KEM3150TM
KEM3200T KEM3200T
KEM3225T KEM3225T
KEM3225T2 KEM3225T2
KEM3225TM KEM3225TM
KEM3225TM2 KEM3225TM2
KM2225TA5 E2K2225TA
KM2225TA5M E2K2400TMA
KM2225TD5 E2K2225TD
KM2225TD5M E2K2400TMD
KM2400TD5 E2K2400TD
KM2400TD5M E2K2400TMD
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-409
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
Series C Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
KM2400TG5M E2K2400TMG
KM2400TN5M E2K2400TMN
KM2400TW5M E2K2400TMW
KM3100T E2K3100T
KM3125T E2K3125T
KM3150T E2K3150T
KM3175T E2K3175T
KM3200T E2K3200T
KM3225T E2K3225T
KM3225TA5 E2K3225TA
KM3225TA5M E2K3400TMA
KM3225TD5 E2K3225TD
KM3225TD5M E2K3400TMD
KM3250T E2K3250T
KM3300T E2K3300T
KM3350T E2K3350T
KM3400T E2K3400T
KM3400TD5 E2K3400TD
KM3400TF5M E2K3400TMF
KM3400TG5M E2K3400TMG
KM3400TJ5M E2K3400TMJ
KM3400TK5M E2K3400TMK
KM3400TL5M E2K3400TML
KM3400TM E2K3400TM
KM3400TN5M E2K3400TMN
KM3400TR5M E2K3400TMR
KM3400TW5M E2K3400TMW
LDCM3600EMA05W E2LEM3600MA05W
LDCM3600F E2LM3600F
LDM3600F E2L3600F
Series C
Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
LEM3300T LEM3300T
LEM3350T LEM3350T
LEM3400T LEM3400T
LEM3400T2 LEM3400T2
LEM3400TM LEM3400TM
LEM3400TM2 LEM3400TM2
LEM3600T LEM3600T
LEM3600TM LEM3600TM
LM3600TL6M E2L3600TML
LM3600TN6M E2L3600TMN
LM3600TP6M E2L3600TMP
LM3600TR6M E2L3600TMR
LM3600TS6M E2L3600TM
LM3600TX6M E2L3600TMX
UVE3LP08K UVE3LP08K
UVE4LP08K UVE4LP08K
Source Description
TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals
V4-T2-410 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
GFR Relay
Contents
Description Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-339
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-345
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-358
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-370
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-396
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-411
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-412
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-412
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR
Product Description
A Type GFR ground fault
protection system, when
properly installed on a
grounded electrical system,
will sense phase-to-ground
fault currents. When the level
of fault current is in excess of
the pre-selected current
pickup and time delay
settings, the GFR relay will
initiate a trip action of a
disconnect device, which will
open the faulted circuit and
clear the fault.
The GFR devices are UL
Class I devices designed to
protect electrical equipment
against extensive damage
from arcing ground faults.
A basic Type GFR ground
fault protection system
consists of a ground fault
relay, a ground fault current
sensor and a disconnect
device equipped with a shunt
trip device. This disconnect
device can be a molded case
circuit breaker, a power
circuit breaker, a bolted
pressure switch or other
fusible disconnect device,
suitable for application with
UL Class I ground fault
sensing and relaying
equipment.
Note: Suitable for either surface
or semi-flush mounting.
Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s GFR ground fault
relays, current sensors, test
panels and accessory devices
are UL listed by Underwriters
Laboratories in accordance
with their standard for ground
fault sensing and relaying
equipment, UL 1053, under
File E48381.
Note: Relays are also listed with
CSA under their file number
43357.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-411
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
Each installation requires:
●One relay unit (select trip
ampere as required)
●One current sensor (select
configuration required)
●One circuit breaker or
disconnect device with
shunt trip, or a shunt trip
attachment for mounting in
existing breaker
●Test panel (optional)
GFR Relay
Current Sensor
Notes
1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.
2 One end removable for installation.
Ground Fault Pickup Amperes
1–12 5–60 100–1200
GFR Relay
Types
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 1
For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control
Electrical reset with zone interlocking GFR12EI GFR60EI GFR1200EI
Electrical reset without zone interlocking GFR12E GFR60E GFR1200E
Mechanical reset with zone interlocking GFR12MI GFR60MI GFR1200MI
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking GFR12M GFR60M GFR1200M
For 120 Vdc Control
Electrical reset with zone interlocking — — GFR1200EID
Electrical reset without zone interlocking — — GFR1200ED
Mechanical reset with zone interlocking — — GFR1200MID
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking — — GFR1200MD
Window Size
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Used with Relays Rated 1–12 Amperes
5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1283C45G01
Used with Relays Rated 5–60 Amperes
2.50 (63.5) I.D. 179C768G01
5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1256C13G01
7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 21257C88G04
3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 760.5) Rect. 2 1257C92G03
Used with Relays Rated 100–1200 Amperes
2.50 (63.5) I.D. 179C768G02
5.50 (139.7) I.D. 1256C13G02
8.25 (209.6). I.D. 179C767G02
7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 21257C88G03
9.94 x 16.94 (252.5 x 430.3) Rect. 2 1257C90G02
9.94 x 23.94 (252.5 x 608.1) Rect. 2 1257C91G02
15.94 x 19.94 (404.9 x 506.4) Rect. 2 1257C89G02
3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 633.5) Rect. 2 1257C92G04
6.75 x 29.64 (171.5 x 752.9) Rect. 21255C39G03
GFR Relay
Typical Current Sensor
V4-T2-412 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Options
Additional optional equipment
can be added to the protection
system to meet the
requirements of the specifying
engineer, including:
●Ground fault test panel
●Ground fault warning
indicator relay
●Ground fault indicating
ammeter
GFR relays are available with
zone selective interlocking
circuitry to interlock several
relays within the same
system. This allows the relay
which detects a ground fault
to instantly clear the fault by
tripping the disconnect
device. The relay
simultaneously sends a signal
to relay units “upstream” from
the fault to time delay or to
block their operation
completely. Current sensors
in various designs provide a
range of “window” sizes to
accommodate standard bus
and cable arrangements.
Shunt trip attachments may
be ordered for field mounting
in Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers, or may be ordered
factory installed in the
breaker.
Test Panel (120 Vac)
Used to test the ground fault
system, to give an indication
the relay has tripped the
breaker, and to reset the relay
after tripping. These
functions may be separately
mounted pilot devices.
Note: When a mechanically reset
relay is used with a test panel,
both the relay and test panel
must be reset following either a
simulated ground fault test or
actual ground fault. Not UL listed.
Optional Test Panel
Ground Fault Warning Indicator
This is an accessory item for
use with GFR relays with
interlocking circuitry. At
approximately 30–50% of the
relay pickup setting, the
indicator switches separate
120 Vac control power to a
lamp or relay, (not included)
to give an indication of a
ground fault. The indicator is
rated 110/120 Vac 50/60 Hz
for a maximum indicator load
of 0.5 amperes.
Ground Fault Warning
Indicator
Indicating Ammeter
The optional indicating
ammeter connects to the
sensor terminals through a
momentary contact
pushbutton, and will indicate
(in amperes) any ground fault
current flowing through the
sensor. Kit includes the
ammeter and pushbutton.
Note: Not UL listed.
Ammeter Kit
Shunt Trip Attachments
Use 120 Vac shunt trips.
Faceplate
Recommended when these
relays are semi-flush
mounted, to close the door
cutout opening.
Face Plate
Technical Data and
Specifications
Sensor
●600 volt, 50/60 Hz
maximum system voltage
Electrical Ratings
GFR Relay
●Ground fault detection
ranges:
●1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to
1200 amperes
●Output contacts:
●240 volt, 50/60 Hz:
3.0 amperes
●120 volt, 50/60 Hz:
6.0 amperes
●28 Vdc: 3.0 amperes
●125 Vdc: 0.5 amperes
●Control power
requirements:
●
120 volt, 50/60 Hz or
125 Vdc (optional)
Control Test
Catalog
Number
120 Volt
50/60 Hz
120 Volt
50/60 Hz
GFRTP
Description
Catalog
Number
Manual reset 1234C67G01
Self-resetting 1234C67G02
GFR System
Used with
Kit Catalog
Number
1–12 ampere 752B820G01
5–60 ampere 752B820G02
100–1200 ampere 752B820G03
Description
Catalog
Number
Faceplate 752B410G01
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-413
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
. . . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Handle Mechanisms—Series G
Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used
to operate molded case
circuit breakers, molded case
switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Through-
the-Door and Direct (Close-
Coupled)—providing safe,
dependable operation and
ease of installation.
Through-the-Door
●High-Performance Rotary
●Universal Rotary
Direct (Close-Coupled)
●Universal Direct
Flange Mounted
●Flex Shaft™
Handle mechanisms are used
on enclosed circuit breakers,
control panels and motor
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
V4-T2-414 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-415
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-418
Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
The high-performance rotary
handle mechanism uses a
simple, yet robust design
to make installation and
operation easy. The external
handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
ensuring reliability. The metal-
on-metal interface between
the handle and shaft prevents
contaminant buildup that
could impede operation,
while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect
the handle from heat and
fading in direct sunlight, as
well as chemicals that may
be introduced in harsh
environments.
In addition to its robust
design features, the handle
mechanism has stand-off
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
applications where an internal
or double door is required.
The high-performance
external handle can accept
padlocks or multi-hasp locks.
The door is interlocked when
padlocked and cannot be
bypassed.
Features
●NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54)
and NEMA Type 4/4X
(IP65) ratings
●Black/Blue or Red/Yellow
external handle colors
●Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
be cut to size to match
enclosure depth
●Conveniently packaged as
kit containing handle, shaft
and mechanism
●Replacement parts are
available separately
●Metallic functional
components ensure
reliability
●Metal-on-metal interface
between handle and shaft
●UV and chemical agent-
resistant materials protect
the handle
●Shallow profile
●Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
breakers and molded case
switch platforms
●Same handle can be used
on multiple frame sizes,
reducing the number of
parts needed
●Red and yellow handles to
designate emergency
disconnecting means
●All handle mechanisms can
accept padlocks or multi-
hasp locks for added
flexibility
●Fast, easy installation
(see video on website for
step-by-step instructions)
Standards and Certifications
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
internal handle that can be
operated independent of
door position, and locked-out
to meet one of the key NFPA
requirements (NFPA® 79)
and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
●NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
●NEMA 4/4X, IP65
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-415
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—EG-, JG- and LG-Frame
Notes
1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
Rating Type EG-Frame JG-Frame LG-Frame
Description NEMA IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
S01 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G25 JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G28 JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16 —
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B0 / 68C6040G26 JGHMVD12B0 / 68C6041G14 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6040G29 JGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6041G17 —
S01 blue handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24B0 / 68C6040G27 JGHMVD24B0 / 68C6041G15 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6040G30 JGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6041G18 —
S01 red handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31 JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34 JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G22 —
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12R0 / 68C6040G32 JGHMVD12R0 / 68C6041G20 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6040G35 JGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6041G23 —
S01 red handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24R0 / 68C6040G33 JGHMVD24R0 / 68C6041G21 —
4/4X 65 EGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6040G36 JGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6041G24 —
S2 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13 JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01 LGHMVD06B / 68C6042G01
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16 JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04 LGHMVD06BX / 68C6042G04
S2 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12B / 68C6040G14 JGHMVD12B / 68C6041G02 LGHMVD12B / 68C6042G02
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12BX / 68C6040G17 JGHMVD12BX / 68C6041G05 LGHMVD12BX / 68C6042G05
S2 blue handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24B / 68C6040G15 JGHMVD24B / 68C6041G03 LGHMVD24B / 68C6042G03
4/4X 65 EGHMVD24BX / 68C6040G18 JGHMVD24BX / 68C6041G06 LGHMVD24BX / 68C6042G06
S2 red handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19 JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07 LGHMVD06R / 68C6042G07
4/4X 65 EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G22 JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10 LGHMVD06RX / 68C6042G10
S2 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD12R / 68C6040G20 JGHMVD12R / 68C6041G08 LGHMVD12R / 68C6042G08
4/4X 65 EGHMVD12RX / 68C6040G23 JGHMVD12RX / 68C6041G11 LGHMVD12RX / 68C6042G11
S2 red handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12 54 EGHMVD24R / 68C6040G21 JGHMVD24R / 68C6041G09 LGHMVD24R / 68C6042G09
4/4X 65 EGHMVD24RX / 68C6040G24 JGHMVD24RX / 68C6041G12 LGHMVD24RX / 68C6042G12
S01 Blue Handle
S01 Red Handle
S2 Blue Handle
S2 Red Handle
V4-T2-416 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—NG- and RG-Frame
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
Rating Type NG-Frame RG-Frame
Description NEMA IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
S3 blue handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01 —
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03 —
S3 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G02 —
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04 —
S4 blue handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05 RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07 RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03
S4 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06 RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G02
4/4X 65 NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08 RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04
S3 Blue Handle
S3 Red Handle
S4 Blue Handle
S4 Red Handle
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-417
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Separate Components for Series G Frames
Series G Components—Shafts and Mechanisms
Series G Components—Handles Only
Series G Components—Optional Caps
As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available.
Series G Replacement Hardware
This kit provides replacement parts for
Series G high performance handle only.
Notes
124-inch handle comes with support bracket.
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
Frame
Shaft
Width
Shaft Length Mechanism
Only6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch 24-Inch 1
EG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G97 1498D66G17
JG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G98 69D6025G17
LG 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 66A6010G99 69D6051G30
NG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G30
RG 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — — 69D9101G31
Frame
Rating Type Handles Only
NEMA IP
S01
Blue/Black
S01
Red/Yellow
S2
Blue/Black
S2
Red/Yellow
S3
Blue/Black
S3
Red/Yellow
S4
Blue/Black
S4
Red/Yellow
EG 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
JG 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 — — — —
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 — — — —
LG 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
NG 1/3R/12 54 — — — — 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
RG 1/3R/12 54 — — — — — — 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 — — — — — — 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
Catalog Number
S01 66A6032H01 Black handle cap HPHC0DGX
S2 66A6032H02 Black handle cap HPHC2DGX
S3 66A6032H03 Black handle cap HPHC3DGX
Catalog Number
High-performance handle
replacement parts kit
66A6029G01
V4-T2-418 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Handle Type
Front Operation
Direction of Operation Door Drilling
Ty p e S 01
Ty p e S 2
Ty p e S 3
Ty p e S 4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-419
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-420
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Universal Rotary
Product Description
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is
suitable for use with Type 1
or 12 enclosure types. All
rotary handle mechanisms
include a handle “lock off” to
prevent turning the breaker
ON while in the OFF position,
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
made of molded material.
The Universal Rotary
mechanisms for EG-, JG- and
LG-Frame MCCBs can be
operated by hand with the
door open or “locked off” to
prevent operation with the
door open.
Standards and Certifications
Universal Rotary is UL listed
and meets CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
Features
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
Notes
1Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
Rotary
Number
of Poles
NEMA Enclosure Type
Handle
Lock-Off 2
Handle Indication:
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET
International
Markings
ON (I) OFF (O)
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)1 3R 12 4/4X 1
Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ —■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
V4-T2-420 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
Series G Rotary Ordering Information
Notes
1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware.
2 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.
4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
Handle
Color
UL
Rating
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog Number 1
EG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) EHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) EHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) EHMVD24R
JG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) FJHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) FJHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) FJHMVD24R
LG-Frame
Black 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24B
Red 1, 12 6.00 (152.4) KLHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) KLHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) KLHMVD24R
NG-Frame
Black 1 6.00 (152.4) HMVD5B
RG-Frame
Black 1 9.00 (228.6) HMVD6B
Shaft
Length
Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog
Number 2
Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number
Standard
Handle 3
Breaker
Mechanism 4Shaft 5IEC IP65 67 IEC IP66 67
N-Frame (ND and NG)
6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G05 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM5R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G07 WHM5R24 WHM5R24X
Universal Rotary
Series G Rotary
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-421
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker.
They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
standard variable depth
Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanisms are rated Type 1
and Type 12.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is available as
standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
It is also available without a
door interlock.
Application Description
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms are typically
used for applications where
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being
fabricated.
Standards and Certifications
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL listed,
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
compliant, and meets CSA
requirements.
Product Selection
Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms
Black Handle Color Red Handle Color
With Interlock Without Interlock With Interlock Without Interlock
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB EHMCCRI EHMCCR
JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB JHMCCRI JHMCCR
LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB LHMCCRI LHMCCR
Universal Direct
(EG–LG)
V4-T2-422 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-423
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-424
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-424
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Flex Shaft
Product Description
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments.
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
Standards and Certifications
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
File E64983 and meets CSA
requirements.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-423
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Note: Type 4X handle
mechanisms are available.
Add Suffix X to the complete
Catalog Number.
Note: When selecting the length
of shaft, ensure minimum
bending radius of 4 inches
(101.6 mm) is maintained to
operate properly.
Note: The standard method
of shipment includes the
mechanism preset at the factory;
however, minor field adjustments
may be required.
Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12
Notes
1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame.
2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted.
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 (0.6) 3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.3) 6 (1.8)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG EHMFS02 EHMFS03 EHMFS04 EHMFS05 EHMFS06
JG N/A JHMFS03 JHMFS04 JHMFS05 JHMFS06
LG N/A — LHMFS04 — —
NG N/A N/A F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C
RG N/A N/A F6S04 F6S05 F6S06
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.1)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG EHMFS07 EHMFS08 EHMFS09 EHMFS10
JG JHMFS07 JHMFS08 JHMFS09 JHMFS10
LG LHMFS07 ——LHMFS10
NG N/A N/A N/A F5S10C
RG N/A N/A N/A N/A
Flex Shaft
V4-T2-424 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Accessories
Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design,
1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft
Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker
contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted
on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring.
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
(E- through R-Frame) 1
Dimensions
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
(E- through R-Frame) 1
Notes
1Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
required for assembly.
2The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
with these kits.
3Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point
latching is required.
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
EG AUX1EBFSEG
JG AUX1EBFSJG
LG AUX1EBFSLG
Catalog
Number 2
C361KJ4
C361KJ6
C361KR
Catalog
Number 2
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)
C361KJ4 4.00 (101.6)
C361KJ6 6.00 (152.4)
C361KR Roller latch 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-425
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
Product Overview
Handle mechanisms are used
to operate molded case
circuit breakers, molded case
switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Through-
the-Door and Direct (Close-
Coupled)—providing safe,
dependable operation and
ease of installation.
Through-the-Door
●High-Performance Rotary
●Series C Rotary
●Universal Rotary
Direct (Close-Coupled)
●Universal Direct
●Euro IEC
●G Direct
Flange Mounted
●Flex Shaft
●C371
Handle mechanisms are used
on enclosed circuit breakers,
control panels and motor
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
V4-T2-426 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Through-the-Door Handle
Mechanisms
Eaton’s through-the-door
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure
or cabinet door and externally
operate the circuit breaker via
a variable depth shaft or a
linear operator (Type MC).
Each rotary type handle
mechanism includes a
handle, base operating
mechanism and shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
Series C Rotary and Universal
Rotary handle mechanisms
are for use with molded case
circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L,
MDL), molded case switches
and motor circuit protectors.
Type 4/4X handles are similar
to standard handles except
they include an internal
neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X
handle style number is
6648C22G03. Due to
gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing,
the handle may not indicate
a tripped position.
Universal Rotary F-Frame
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle
Mechanisms
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker. They are
used in shallow enclosures
where the standard variable
depth Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used. They are
typically for applications
where high volume,
standardized enclosures
are being fabricated.
The Euro IEC Direct handle
mechanism can be used on
F- through R-Frames.
The G Direct is available with
a black or the yellow handle,
and with or without a shroud.
It is suitable for use with
NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for
use only with the G-Frame
(GD, GC, GHC, GMCP).
An escutcheon ring and
interlock clip are provided as
standard. The standard design
includes a lock-off feature.
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be
used with NEMA 1, 3R and
12 fabricated enclosures. An
optional handle is available for
Flex Shaft that is suitable for
use with NEMA 4 and 4X
environments. Flex Shaft
comes preset from the
factory, requiring only minor
field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
The Type C371 circuit breaker
operating mechanisms are
designed for installation in
control enclosures where
main or branch circuit
protective devices are
required. All circuit breaker
mechanisms are suitable for
right-hand mounting.
Auxiliary contacts are not
available for mounting on
operating mechanisms.
Where required, have them
installed in circuit breaker.
Handle Extension
Handle extension is not
included with J, K, L, M and
N-Frame breakers. It must be
purchased separately.
Standards and Certifications
Type C371 is UL Listed under
File E62635.
Flex Shaft is UL Listed under
File E64983 and meets
CSA requirements.
Series C Rotary and Universal
Rotary, are UL Listed and
meet CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL 489 Listed,
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2,
and meets CSA requirements.
The Euro IEC Direct handle
mechanism is IEC-240-1. G
Direct is UL Listed and meets
CSA requirements.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-427
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-428
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-430
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
The high-performance rotary
handle mechanism uses a
simple, yet robust design
to make installation and
operation easy. The external
handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
ensuring reliability. The metal-
on-metal interface between
the handle and shaft prevents
contaminant buildup that
could impede operation,
while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect
the handle from heat and
fading in direct sunlight, as
well as chemicals that may
be introduced in harsh
environments.
In addition to its robust
design features, the handle
mechanism has stand-off
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
applications where an internal
or double door is required.
The high-performance
external handle can accept
padlocks or multi-hasp locks.
The door is interlocked when
padlocked and cannot be
bypassed.
Features
●NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54)
and NEMA Type 4/4X
(IP65) ratings
●Black/Blue or Red/Yellow
external handle colors
●Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
be cut to size to match
enclosure depth
●Conveniently packaged as
kit containing handle, shaft
and mechanism
●Replacement parts are
available separately
●Metallic functional
components ensure
reliability
●Metal-on-metal interface
between handle and shaft
●UV and chemical agent-
resistant materials protect
the handle
●Shallow profile
●Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
breakers and molded case
switch platforms
●Same handle can be used
on multiple frames sizes
reducing the number of
parts needed
●Red and yellow handles to
designate emergency
disconnecting means
●All handle mechanisms can
accept padlocks or multi-
hasp locks for added
flexibility
●Fast, easy installation
(see video on website for
step-by-step instructions)
Standards and Certifications
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
internal handle that can be
operated independent of
door position, and locked-out
to meet one of the key NFPA
requirements (NFPA® 79)
and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
●NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
●NEMA 4/4X, IP65
V4-T2-428 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame
Separate Components for Series C Frames
Series C Components—Shaft and Mechanism
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
Rating Type GC/GD-Frame GMCP-Frame
Description NEMA IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12B / 68C6039G01 GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12BX / 68C6039G03 GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12 54 GCHMVD12R / 68C6039G02 GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
4/4X 65 GCHMVD12RX / 68C6039G04 GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
Frame
Shaft
Width
Shaft Length Mechanism
Only6-Inch 10-Inch 12-Inch
GC/GD 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GCHMVD / 2A92095G15
GMCP 6 mm — — 66A6013H02 GMHMVD / 2A92095G16
GD 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 1498D34G90
FD 8 mm 66A6010G95 — 66A6010G96 1498D34G91
JD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G92
KD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G93
LD 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G94
MDL 10 mm 66A6012G15 — 66A6012G16 1498D34G95
ND 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G30
RD 12 mm — 66A6013H01 — 69D9101G31
S01 Blue Handle
S01 Red Handle
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-429
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Series C Components—Handles Only
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
Frame
Rating Type Handles Only
NEMA IP
S01
Blue/Black
S01
Red/Yellow
S2
Blue/Black
S2
Red/Yellow
S3
Blue/Black
S3
Red/Yellow
S4
Blue/Black
S4
Red/Yellow
GC/GD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 ——————
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 ——————
GMCP 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 ——————
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 ——————
GD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 ————
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 ————
FD 1/3R/12 54 68C6048G41 68C6048G42 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 ————
4/4X 65 68C6048G43 68C6048G44 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 ————
JD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 ————
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 ————
KD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 ————
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 ————
LD 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
MDL 1/3R/12 54 — — 68C6048G01 68C6048G02 68C6048G05 68C6048G06 — —
4/4X 65 — — 68C6048G03 68C6048G04 68C6048G07 68C6048G08 — —
ND 1/3R/12 54 ————68C6048G05 68C6048G06 68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 ————68C6048G07 68C6048G08 68C6048G11 68C6048G12
RD 1/3R/12 54 ——————68C6048G09 68C6048G10
4/4X 65 ——————68C6048G11 68C6048G12
V4-T2-430 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Handle Type
Front Operation
Direction of Operation Door Drilling
Ty p e S 01
Ty p e S 2
Ty p e S 3
Ty p e S 4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-431
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-432
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Series C Rotary
Product Description
Eaton’s through-the-door
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure
or a cabinet door and
externally operate the circuit
breaker via a variable depth
shaft or a linear operator
(Type MC). Each rotary type
handle mechanism includes a
handle, a base operating
mechanism and a shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
Series C Rotary handle
mechanisms are used with
molded case circuit breakers
(F, J, K, L, MDL), molded
case switches and motor
circuit protectors.
These rotary handles are
robust and durable, made
entirely of metal parts. It also
has a lock-out tag-out level at
the tip of the handle for
padlocking.
NEMA Type 4/4X handles are
similar to standard handles
except they include an
internal neoprene gasket.
NEMA Type 4/4X handle style
number is 6648C22G03. Due
to gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing,
the handle may not indicate a
tripped position.
Standards and Certifications
Series C Rotary is UL listed and
meets CSA requirements.
Features
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
Notes
1Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
Rotary
Number
of Poles
NEMA Enclosure Type
Handle
Lock-Off 2
Handle Indication:
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET
International
Markings
ON (I) OFF (O)
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)1 3R 12 4/4X 1
Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ —■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
V4-T2-432 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
Series C Rotary Ordering Information
Notes
1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.
3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
Shaft
Length
Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog
Number 1
Separate Catalog Number Catalog Number
Standard
Handle 2
Breaker
Mechanism 3Shaft 4IEC IP65 56 IEC IP66 56
F-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM1R06 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G08 WHM1R06 WHM1R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM1R12 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G05 WHM1R12 WHM1R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM1R16 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G06 WHM1R16 WHM1R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM1R24 6648C22G25 6648C23G11 4217B37G07 WHM1R24 WHM1R24X
J-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM2R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G08 WHM2R06 WHM2R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM2R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G05 WHM2R12 WHM2R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM2R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G06 WHM2R16 WHM2R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM2R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G21 4217B37G07 WHM2R24 WHM2R24X
K-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM3R06 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G08 WHM3R06 WHM3R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM3R12 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G05 WHM3R12 WHM3R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM3R16 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G06 WHM3R16 WHM3R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM3R24 6648C22G01 6648C23G25 4217B37G07 WHM3R24 WHM3R24X
L- and MDL-Frame
6.00 (152.4) HM4R06 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G08 WHM4R06 WHM4R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM4R12 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G05 WHM4R12 WHM4R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM4R16 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G06 WHM4R16 WHM4R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM4R24 6648C22G11 6648C23G19 4217B37G07 WHM4R24 WHM4R24X
MD/MDS
6.00 (152.4) HM7R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G08 — —
12.00 (304.8) HM7R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G05 — —
16.00 (406.4) HM7R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G06 — —
24.00 (609.6) HM7R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G17 4217B37G07 — —
N-Frame (ND and NG)
6.00 (152.4) HM5R06 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G08 WHM5R06 WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8) HM5R12 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G05 WHM5R12 WHM5R12X
16.00 (406.4) HM5R16 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G06 WHM5R16 WHM5R16X
24.00 (609.6) HM5R24 6648C22G21 6648C23G08 4217B37G07 WHM5R24 WHM5R24X
Series C Rotary
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-433
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-420
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-433
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-434
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Universal Rotary
Product Description
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is
suitable for use with Type 1
or 12 enclosure types. All
rotary handle mechanisms
include a handle “lock off” to
prevent turning the breaker
ON while in the OFF position,
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
made of molded material.
The Universal Rotary
mechanisms for EG-, JG- and
LG-Frame MCCBs can be
operated by hand with the
door open or “locked off” to
prevent operation with the
door open.
Standards and Certifications
Universal Rotary is UL listed
and meets CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
Features
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
Notes
1Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
Rotary
Number
of Poles
NEMA Enclosure Type
Handle
Lock-Off 2
Handle Indication:
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET
International
Markings
ON (I) OFF (O)
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)1 3R 12 4/4X 1
Series C rotary — ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary — ■ —■ — ■ ■ ■ Molded plastic Yellow/Red/Black 90 deg. 6, 12, 24
V4-T2-434 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Universal Rotary F-Frame
Series C Universal Rotary 1
Note
1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately.
Handle
Color
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog Number
G-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) GHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) GHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) GHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) GHMVD12R
F-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) FHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) FHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) FHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) FHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6) FHMVD24R
J-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) JHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) JHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) JHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) JHMVD12R
K-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) KHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) KHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) KHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) KHMVD12R
L-Frame
Black 6.00 (152.4) LHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8) LHMVD12B
Red 6.00 (152.4) LHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8) LHMVD12R
Universal Rotary
F-Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-435
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-422
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-436
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker.
They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
standard variable depth
Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanisms are rated Type 1
and Type 12.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is available as
standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
It is also available without a
door interlock.
Application Description
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms are typically
used for applications where
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being
fabricated.
Standards and Certifications
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is IEC 60947-1
and IEC 60947-2 compliant.
V4-T2-436 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Euro IEC Direct
G Direct 1
Note
1Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
Frame
Black Handle
Catalog
Number
FHMCC1B
JHMCC2B
KHMCC3B
L and M HMCC4B
NHMVD5B
RHMVD6B
Frame
Black Handle Yellow Handle
With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
GD/GHC HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30
GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-437
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-438
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Flex Shaft
Product Description
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments.
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
Standards and Certifications
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
File E64983 and meets CSA
requirements.
V4-T2-438 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft
Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms
Type C371
Notes
1Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable for GMCP.
2For increased maximum allowable depth, see connecting rods on Page V4-T2-439.
3Dimensions shown are from panel flange surface.
4Does not include handle.
Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete catalog number. Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for IEC handle. Original narrow handle design (No C Suffix) is available.
Remove C from catalog number.
When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches (101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly. The standard method of
shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor field adjustments may be required.
Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and RH all other RH only.
Breaker
Frame
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
3 (0.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.5) 6 (1.8) 7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.0)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
G 1F0S03C F0S04C F0S05C F0S06C — — — —
FF1S03C F1S04C F1S05C F1S06C F1S07C F1S08C F1S09C F1S10C
F (dual) F1S03CD F1S04CD F1S05CD F1S06CD F1S07CD F1S08CD F1S09CD F1S10CD
JF2S03C F2S04C F2S05C F2S06C F2S07C F2S08C F2S09C F2S10C
KF3S03C F3S04C F3S05C F3S06C F3S07C F3S08C F3S09C F3S10C
L and MDL — F4S04C F4S05C F4S06C — — — F4S10C
N— F5S04C F5S05C F5S06C — — — F5S10C
R— F6S04 F6S05 F6S06 — — — —
MD, MDS (old) — F7S04 F7S05 F7S06 — — — F7S10C
Circuit Breaker or
Motor Circuit Protector
Frame
Size
Variable Depth
Mounting Range
Min./Max. 23
Operating
Mechanism Only 4
Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle
For NEMA 1–12
Enclosure
For NEMA 4/4X
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
HMCP and Series C
EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED
150 6.50–16 (165.1–406.4) C371E C371E1 C371E2
HMCP and Series C
HJD, JD, JDB, JDC
250 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6
HMCP and Series C
DK, HKD, KD, KDB
400 6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4) C371F C371F5 C371F6
Series C
HLD, LD, LDC
600 8.50–22 (215.9–558.8) C371G C371G5 C371G6
Series C MD, MDS
(No MDL)
800 8.75–22 (222.3–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6
Series C
HND, ND, NDC
1200 9.75–22 (247.7–558.8) C371K C371K5 C371K6
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com V4-T2-439
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Handle Only
Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied)
For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting
surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is
mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure.
Connecting Rods 1
Note
1Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm).
Circuit Breaker
Frame Size
(Amperes)
NEMA
Enclosure Type
Operating
Handle Length
Catalog
Number
150 1/3R/3/12 4.00 (101.6) C371H1
4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H2
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H3
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H4
250–1200 1/3R/3/12 4.00 (101.6) C371H5
4/4X 4.00 (101.6) C371H6
1/3R/3/12 6.00 (152.4) C371H7
4/4X 6.00 (152.4) C371H8
Amperes Catalog Number
600–1200 C371CS6
Application Catalog Number
Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200 A sizes) C371CS1
Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400 A sizes) C371CS1
Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200 A sizes) C371CS2
V4-T2-440 Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—May 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Extension
Contents
Description Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-413
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-414
Universal Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-419
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-421
Flex Shaft
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . V4-T2-427
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-431
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . . V4-T2-435
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-437
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-438
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-T2-440
Handle Extension
Product Description
●Suitable for use on two- or
three-pole G-Frame
●Not included with J, K, L,
M and N-Frame breakers;
it must be purchased
separately
●Included with R-Frame
breakers
Product Selection
Handle Extension 12
Notes
1 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame
breakers. It must be purchased separately.
2 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame
breakers.
Frame
Style
Number
J, K HEX3
L, M HEX4
NHEX5
RHEX6
Handle Extension
